HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION...

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED MDPL JAIPUR TERMINAL PROJECT

Terminal Automation of 349 Tenderer’s signature with seal

Bid Document

for

Design, Engineering, Supply,

Erection, Testing & Commissioning

of

Terminal Automation System

for MDPL Jaipur Terminal

Tender No.HPC-001/MDPL/BPJ/01

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED

(A Government of India Enterprise)



TABLE OF CONTENTS

I. Section 1 - Notice Inviting Tender

II. Section 2 - Instructions to Bidders

III. Section 3 - Declaration Form

IV. Section 4 - General Terms and Conditions of Works Contract

V. Section 5 - Special Conditions of Contract

VI. Section 6 - Proformas / Annexures

A. Bid Security Form

B. Contract Performance Bank Guarantee

C. Letter of Authority for attending Pre-Bid Meeting, Unpriced and Priced Bid

Opening

D. Loading Criteria

VII. Section 7 - Health , Safety and Welfare Plan During Construction

VIII. Section 8 - Technical Specifications

IX. Section 9 – Un-Priced Schedule Formats

X. Section 10 - Completion Schedule

XI. Section 11 – Priced Schedule Formats

XII. Proposal Forms



SECTION – 1

NOTICE INVITING

TENDER




(A Government of India Enterprise) MARKETING DIVISION

8, Shoorji Vallabhdas Marg, Ballard Estate, Mumbai- 400 001, India

Phone: 022 22612149 / 22637451 , Fax: 022 22613576

NOTICE INVITING TENDER JOB :Terminal Automation System (TAS) at MDPL Jaipur

Electronic digitally signed & sealed (encrypted) tenders are invited under two bid system

from eligible Indian Bidders as per details given below for following tenders –

A. Tender for TAS at Jaipur :Tender No.HPC-001/MDPL/BPJ/01

A.1 On-line confirmation for Bid

participation by bidder

From 22.12.2007 (1300 hours) to

21.01.2008 (1730 Hours)

A.2 Tender Due Date Upto 24.01.2008 (1500 Hours IST)

A.3 Online Unpriced Bid opening from 1530 Hours on 24.01.2008.

A.4 Tender document fee Rs. 5000/- (Non - refundable)

A.5 EMD Rs. 9,80,000/-

Bids are to be submitted online only. Bids received in any other form shall not be

accepted for both the tenders.

For viewing details including EMD, BID QUALIFICATION CRITERIA, LOCATIONS

etc. please visit our web site www.hindustanpetroleum.com and go to tender section by

clicking the link “tenders”. For on-line bidding, please visit website

http://eproc.hpcl.co.in, click the link “Vendor Instruction Manual” and follow the

procedure given therein.

HPCL reserves the right to extend price/purchase preference as per prevailing guidelines

of Government of India.

Ch. Manager Procurement (P & P)



1.0 BRIEF SCOPE OF WORK:

Terminal Automation System ( TAS ) designing and engineering for complete

Tank Truck loading control, Plant Control and Tank Farm Management ( TFM ).

Supply of complete hardware and software development for Terminal Automation

System including factory testing, packaging, shipping, custom clearance,

insurance, installation, commissioning, site testing, trial run and stabilisation of the

complete system. The complete requirements shall be executed on turnkey basis

with single point responsibility.

BID QUALIFICATION CRITERIA:

2.1 Bidders shall have experience in executing turnkey automation jobs including

software development, supply, installation, testing & commissioning of equipment

/ material in hydrocarbon sector. Bidders, during the last 7(seven) years (The

period of seven years shall be reckoned from 30.11.2007) should have executed

and successfully completed either of the following:-

A. Three jobs each not less than Rs. 2.0 crores

Or

B. Two jobs each not less than Rs. 2.5 crores

Or

C. One job not less than Rs. 4 crores

2.2 Annual Turnover: shall meet the minimum prescribed pre-qualification

requirement as follows:

As per the audited balance sheet and Profit and Loss account the average annual

financial turnover during the last three financial years (2004-2005,2005-2006,

2006-2007) should be at least Rs 10 crores.

2.3 Net worth as per the latest (2006-07) audited balance sheet and Profit & Loss

account shall be positive.

2.4 Bidder shall furnish documentary evidence i.e. copies of work orders/ relevant

pages of contract, completion certificate from their clients, annual reports

containing audited balance sheets and profit & loss accounts statement, in the first

instance itself, in support of their fulfilling the qualification criteria. HPCL reserve

the right to complete the evaluation based on the details furnished without seeking

any additional information.

3.0 Parties who are affiliates of one another can decide which Affiliate will make a

bid. Only one affiliate may submit a bid. Two or more affiliates are not permitted

to make separate bids directly or indirectly. If 2 or more affiliates submit a bid,



then any one or all of them are liable for disqualification. However upto 3 affiliates

may make a joint bid as a consortium, and in which case the conditions applicable

to a consortium shall apply to them. “Affiliate” of a Party shall mean any company

or legal entity which:

(a) controls either directly or indirectly a Party, or

(b) which is controlled directly or indirectly by a Party; or

(c) is directly or indirectly controlled by a company, legal entity or

partnership which directly or indirectly controls a Party. “Control” means actual

control or ownership of at least a 50% voting or other controlling interest that

gives the power to direct, or cause the direction of, the management and material

business decisions of the controlled entity.

4. Bids may be submitted by:

a) a single person/ entity (called sole bidder);

b) a newly formed incorporated joint venture (JV) which has not completed 3

financial years from the date of commencement of business;

c) a consortium (including an unincorporated JV) having a maximum of 3 (three)

members;

d) an Indian arm of a foreign company.

5. Fulfillment of Eligibility criteria and certain additional conditions in respect of

each of the above 4 types of bidders is stated below, respectively:

a) The sole bidder (including an incorporated JV which has completed 3 financial

years after date of commencement of business) shall fulfil each eligibility

criteria.

b) In case the bidder is a newly formed and incorporated joint venture and which

has not completed three financial years from the date of commencement of

business, then either the said JV shall fulfil each eligibility criteria or any one

constituent member/ promoter of such a JV shall fulfil each eligibility criteria.

If the bid is received with the proposal that one constituent member/ promoter

fulfils each eligibility criteria, then this member/promoter shall be clearly

identified and he/it shall assume all obligations under the contract and provide

such comfort letter/guarantees as may be required by Owner. The guarantees

shall cover inter alia the commitment of the member/ promoter to complete the

entire work in all respects and in a timely fashion, being bound by all the

obligations under the contract, an undertaking to provide all necessary

technical and financial support to the JV to ensure completion of the contract

when awarded, an undertaking not to withdraw from the JV till completion of

the work, etc.

c) In case the bidder(s) is/are a consortium (including an unincorporated JV), then

the following conditions shall apply:



1) Each member in a consortium may only be a legal entity and not an

individual person;

2) the Bid shall specifically identify and describe each member of the

consortium;

3) the consortium member descriptions shall indicate what type of legal

entity the member is and its jurisdiction of incorporation (or of

establishment as a legal entity other than as a corporation) and provide

evidence by a copy of the articles of incorporation (or equivalent

documents);

4) One participant member of the consortium shall be identified as the

“Prime member” and contracting entity for the consortium;

5) this prime member shall be solely responsible for all aspects of the Bid/

Proposal including the execution of all tasks and performance of all

consortium obligations;

6) the prime member shall fulfil each eligibility criteria;

7) a commitment shall be given from each of the consortium members in the

form of a letter signed by a duly authorized officer clearly identifying the

role of the member in the Bid and the member’s commitment to perform

all relevant tasks and obligations in support of the Prime/lead member of

the Consortium and a commitment not to withdraw from the consortium;

8) No change shall be permitted in the number, nature or share holding

pattern of the Consortium members after pre-qualification, without the

prior written permission of the Owner.

9) No change in project plans, timetables or pricing will be permitted as a

consequence of any withdrawal or failure to perform by a consortium

member;

10) No consortium member shall hold less than 25% stake in a consortium;

11) Entities which are affiliates of one another are allowed to bid either as a

sole bidder or as a consortium only;

12) Any person or entity can bid either singly or as a member of only one

consortium.

d) In case the bidder is an Indian arm (subsidiary, authorized agent, branch office

or affiliate) of a foreign bidder, then the foreign bidder shall have to fulfill each

eligibility criteria. If such foreign company desires that the contract be entered

into with the Indian arm, then a proper back to back continuing (parent

company) guarantee shall be provided by the foreign company clearly stating

that in case of any failure of any supply or performance of the equipment,

machinery, material or plant or completion of the work in all respects and as

per the warranties/ guarantees that may have been given, then the foreign

company shall assume all obligations under the contract. Towards this purpose,

it shall provide such comfort letter/guarantees as may be required by Owner.

The guarantees shall cover inter alia the commitment of the foreign company

to complete the entire work in all respects and in a timely fashion, being bound



by all the obligations under the contract, an undertaking to provide all

necessary technical and financial support to the Indian arm or to render the

same themselves so as to ensure completion of the contract when awarded, an

undertaking not to withdraw from the contract till completion of the work, etc.

GENERAL INFORMATION

i) EMD shall be accepted in the form of demand draft or Bank Guarantee on any

nationalised or scheduled bank (other than cooperative bank). Amount of EMD is

indicated above. In case EMD is submitted in form of Bank Guarantee, it should

be made on non-judicial stamp paper of appropriate value (denomination) and

should be valid for four months from due date / extended due date of the tender.

Cheque / FDR or EMD in any other form shall be treated as offer without EMD

and shall not be acceptable. Public sector undertaking (Declaration required) and

Units registered with NSIC (Copy of valid registration upto specified volumes) are

exempted from submission of EMD.

EMD (original instrument) should be kept in separate envelope (superscribed with

tender number, job & due date) and should be deposited by tender due date / time

mentioned above, in the tender box provided in the office of Chief Manager -

Procurement (P&P) at Hindustan Bhawan, 8, Shoorji Vallabhdas Marg, Mumbai

400 001. While submitting the bid on-line, bidders would be required to upload

the scanned copy of EMD instrument (DD / pay order / banker’s cheque or bank

guarantee) OR EMD exemption document ( self declaration in case of Public

sector undertaking OR copy of valid registration certificate in case of units

registered with NSIC) at the place provided for the same. Public sector undertaking

and Units registered with NSIC may also send the hard copy of EMD exemption

document by post to Chief Manager - Procurement (P&P) at the address mentioned

above. HPCL shall not be responsible for any postal delays or non-receipt of EMD

by tender due date / time, reasons whatsoever.

Offer received without requisite amount of EMD as above shall be rejected.

ii) The bidders would be required to pay tender document cost of Rs 5000/- (non-

transferable) by crossed demand draft/ pay order/ banker’s cheque in favour of

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd., payable at Mumbai issued by any

Nationalised / Scheduled bank (other than cooperative bank). Units registered

with NSIC (Valid certificate copy required) are exempted from payment of tender

document cost. The crossed demand draft/ pay order/ banker’s cheque should be

kept in EMD envelope (superscribed with tender number, job & due date) and

should be deposited by tender due date / time mentioned above, in the tender box

provided in the office of Chief Manager - Procurement (P&P) at Hindustan

Bhawan, 8, Shoorji Vallabhdas Marg, Mumbai 400 001. While submitting the bid

on-line, bidders would be required to upload the scanned copy of crossed demand

draft/ pay order/ banker’s cheque towards tender document cost OR exemption

document ( copy of valid registration certificate in case of units registered with

NSIC) at the place provided for the same. Units registered with NSIC may also

send the hard copy of exemption document by post to Chief Manager -



Procurement (P&P) at the address mentioned above. HPCL shall not be

responsible for any postal delays or non-receipt of tender document cost by tender

due date / time, reasons whatsoever.

(iii) Bidder can view the tender Document at HPCL website

http://www.hindustanpetroleum.com however bidders are not allowed to quote on

the basis of such downloaded document from website and such offers shall not be

considered.

(iv) Bid document is non-transferable.

(v) For submitting the bid on-line it would be mandatory for bidders to obtain digital

certificate (which will enable data encryption as well as digital signing). For

information regarding digital certificate, bidders may visit http://www.cca.gov.in.

For submitting the bid online, bidders are advised to follow the step by step

procedure given under the link “Vendor Instruction Manual” at website

http://eproc.hpcl.co.in . In case bidders are unable to access the site

http://eproc.hpcl.co.in they may contact at 2263 7481, 7468 or 7452 at Mumbai on

all working days during office hours.

The on-line bidding would comprise broadly following steps –

• Enrollment by vendor at http://eproc.hpcl.co.in (can be done without digital

certificate) by clicking the link “Supplier Registration”.

• The system generated challenge phrase will be sent to vendor at e-mail

address provided by him during enrollment.

• The vendor would be required to login at http://eproc.hpcl.co.in with this

challenge phrase along with his user id & password. The vendor has to

complete 2 page registration form.

• As soon as vendor fills two page registration form, he should put a request

letter on letterhead (giving tender number) to HPCL for approving his

enrollment. The request may be sent through fax at 022 22613576. No

request for enrollment approval shall be considered within 72 hours of

tender due date / time.

• After enrollment, vendor would be required to login and register his digital

certificate ( to be obtained by vendor) at website.

• After registering digital certificate vendor can participate in the public

tender.

The vendors who are already enrolled at website : http://eproc.hpcl.co.in need

not to enroll again and vendors who have already got valid digital certificate

(enabling data encryption as well as digital signing) are not required to procure

another digital certificate.

(vi) HPCL will not be responsible for the cost incurred in preparation and submission

of bids including the cost of digital certificate, regardless of the conduct of

outcome of the biding process.



(vii) Completion period : 6 months from date of LOI.

(viii) HPCL shall not be responsible for any expenses incurred by bidders in connection

with the preparation & submission of their bids, site visit and other expenses

incurred during bidding process.

(ix) Fax/e-mail bids shall not be accepted.

(x) HPCL reserves the right to accept or reject any one or all the tenders without

assigning any reason.

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Ltd ( HPCL ) has developed the " Grievance

Redressal Mechanism" to deal with references / grievances if any that are received from

parties who participated/ intends to participate in the Corporation Tenders. The details

of the same are available on this website.

Completed Tenders in all respect should be submitted on-line at website

http://eproc.hpcl.co.in by the tender due date/ time. Unpriced (Technical) bids shall be

opened on-line and participating bidders can view / witness the same on-line by logging

in at website http://eproc.hpcl.co.in. Bidders would not be allowed to submit their bid

after stipulated tender due date and time. For details, please refer “INSTRUCTION TO

BIDDERS”.

HPCL will follow the purchase preference and price preference policy as per prevalent

guidelines of Govt. of India.

Chief Manager - Procurement Projects & Pipelines



SECTION - 2

INSTRUCTION TO

BIDDERS



PART A (INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS)

1) This is only a Tender Enquiry and not an order.

2) The tender should be submitted online at website http://eproc.hpcl.co.in only, by

the due date and time, as specified in the tender. Late / delayed tenders submitted

on line after the due date and time, for whatsoever reasons will not be considered.

The Server Date & Time as appearing on the HPCL website

(http://eproc.hpcl.co.in) shall only be considered for the cut-off date and time for

receipt of tenders. Offers sent through post, telegram, fax, telex, e-mail, courier

will not be considered.

3) Partially completed / incomplete tenders shall not be considered.

4) All communication regarding the tender including queries, if any, and submission

of offers shall be done online within the e-Procurement system at website

http://eproc.hpcl.co.in

5) Two Bid System

Bidders are required to submit offer in Two parts, namely “Unpriced” & “Priced”.

6) Validity

Quoted prices shall be valid for a period of 120 days from the due date / extended

due date for the placement of order.

7) Bidders shall be required to arrange all resources, including Digital IDs and

Internet Connections at their own cost, for participating in online tenders at HPCL

e-Procurement site.

8) HPCL shall not be responsible for any delays reasons whatsoever in receiving as

well as submitting offers, including connectivity issues. HPCL shall not be

responsible for any postal or other delays in submitting EMD / tender cost

wherever applicable.

9) Request for extension of tender submission due date, if any, received from bidders

within 48 hours of tender submission due date / time, shall not be considered.

10) Tender opening (unpriced bid as well as priced bid) will be done online at the time

and dates specified in the tender. Vendors who have responded to the tender are

requested to login at the specified date and time at HPCL e-procurement website

(http://eproc.hpcl.co.in) for witnessing the tender opening (unpriced bid as well as

priced bid in case of technically accepted vendors).

11) HPCL reserves the right to accept any tender in whole or in part or reject any or all

tenders without assigning any reason. HPCL reserves right to accept any or more



tenders in part. Decision of HPCL in this regard shall be final and binding on the

bidder.

12) HPCL shall follow Purchase Preference / Price Preference as per prevailing

guidelines of Government of India.

13) Grievance Redressal Mechanism :

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) has developed a “Grievance

Redressal Mechanism” to deal with references / grievances if any that are received

from parties who participated / intend to participate in the Corporation Tenders.

The details of the same are available on our website

www.hindustanpetroleum.com.

PART B (INSTRUCTION TO BIDDERS)

1.0 INTRODUCTION

M/s Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL), invites sealed bids under

two bid system from Bidders for the Design, Engineering, Supply, Erection,

Testing and Commissioning and System Stabilisation of the Instrumentation and

Automation requirements for Terminal Automation System for Mundra –Delhi

Pipeline Terminal located at Jaipur (Rajasthan State) in India.

1.1 SCOPE OF WORK

Terminal Automation System ( TAS ) designing and engineering for complete

Tank Truck loading control, Plant Control and Tank Farm Management ( TFM ).

Supply of complete hardware and software development for Terminal Automation

System including factory testing, packaging, shipping, custom clearance,

insurance, installation, commissioning, site testing, trial run and stabilisation of the

complete system. The complete requirements shall be executed on turnkey basis

with single point responsibility. The prospective bidders are requested to

thoroughly read and comprehend the various sections of this tender document and

visit the sites before quoting for the tender.

2.0 SITE VISIT

2.1 The bidder is advised to visit and examine the site of works at all locations and

their surrounding and obtain for himself on his own responsibility all information

that may be necessary for preparing of the bid and entering into the contract. The

cost of visiting the sites shall be at bidder’s own expenses. No extra claim on

account of non-familiarity of site conditions shall be entertained during execution

of works.

2.2 The bidder and any of his personnel or agents will be granted permission by the

Owner to enter upon his premises and lands for the purpose of such inspection, but

only upon the explicit condition that the bidder, his personnel or agents will release

and indemnify the Owner and his personnel and agents from and against all



liability in respect thereof and will be responsible for personnel injury (whether

fatal or otherwise), loss of or damage and expenses incurred as a result hereof.

3.0 INFORMATION REQUIRED WITH BIDS

The following details are required to be submitted in one original + 01 (One)

copies along with offer:

a) Checklist/Commercial Questionnaire duly filled in as per Form PF-1.

b) Following documents required as per form PF-2:

i) PAN Number with scanned documentary proof.

ii) Power of Attorney in the name of person who has signed the bid.

c) Details of similar works done during past seven years with name & postal

address of clients as per Form PF-6. Similar works for this purpose implies

Terminal Automation job comprising of tank truck Loading, Plant Control

and Tank Farm Management system including supply of hardware and

software in any hydrocarbon sector.

d) Site organization proposed to be deployed at the terminal sites separately

for execution of the work with bio-data of site-in-charge & key personnel

as per form PR-3/3A.

f) List of Equipment, Tools and Tackles proposed to be deployed as per Form

PF-7.

g) List of Exception & Deviation, if any, as per Form PF-4. In case of no

deviation the bidder shall furnish Form PF-4 duly signed & stamped.

h) Confirmation of Compliance to Bid Requirement as per PF-5.

i) Quality Assurance / Quality Control Plan.

j) Work completion Schedule in the form of Bar chart separately site wise.

k) Schedule of Rates, duly signed & stamped keeping rates & amount blank.

l) Technical details / documents as specified elsewhere in bidding document

– particulars & catalogues of various bought out items mentioned in this

Tender document or proposed to be used by the prospective bidders.

m) Any other document sought any where in the tender document but not

expressly listed herein.

n) Copies of EPF Registration and ESIC Registration.



4.0 SUBMISSION AND OPENING OF BID

4.1 This is only a Price Enquiry (Invitation to Offer) and not an Order.

4.2 The bidder shall take utmost care of the following:

The Bid shall be submitted in two parts namely, UNPRICED and PRICED Part,

respectively.

4.3 Earnest Money Deposit in a sealed envelope (sealed envelope-3) as specified in

NIT.

4.4 Technical and Unpriced Part of the Offer will be opened by HPCL as per the due

date and time mentioned in the NIT (Notice Inviting Tender) in the on -line

presence of Bidders. The Priced part of the Offer of technically qualified bidders

will be subsequently opened on-line as per date specified in the tender/ advised

subsequently.

4.5 Cost of bidding

The bidder shall bear all costs associated with the preparation and submission of

the bid, and Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL), will in no case, be

responsible or liable for these costs, regardless of the conduct or outcome of the

bidding process.

4.6 The clarifications sought / queries received from bidders / vendors / parties within

last seven days of bid due date shall not be entertained by HPCL.

5.0 VALIDITY OF EMD

5.1 Earnest Money Deposit shall be in the form of Original Bank Guarantee for the

amount given in the NIT and drawn on any Nationalized / Scheduled bank (Other

than Co-Operative Bank). Proforma of BG for EMD is given in this tender

document. Cheque/ FDR/EMD in any other form will be treated as Offer without

EMD. No adjustment shall be made with EMD submitted earlier with other tenders

of HPCL or any outstanding amount with HPCL. Earnest Money Deposit

furnished by the Bidder (in the form of BG) shall be valid for a period of 04

(FOUR) MONTHS from the date of submission of PART-I i.e. TECHNO-

COMMERCIAL PART of the bid.

6.0 VALIDITY OF OFFER

6.1 Bid submitted by Bidder shall remain valid for a minimum period of 04 (four)

MONTHS from the date of submission of Bids. Bidders shall not be entitled

during the said period of six months, without the consent in writing of the Owner,

to revoke or cancel their Bid or to vary the Bid given or any term thereof. In case

of Bidders revoking or canceling their Bid or varying any of the terms in regard



thereof without the consents of Owner in writing, Owner shall reject such Offers

and forfeit Earnest Money paid by them along with their offers.

6.2 Bidders are advised to refrain from contacting by any means HPCL and/or their

employees / representatives on their own, on matters related to Bids under

consideration. HPCL, if necessary, will obtain clarification on the Bid by

requesting for such information/clarifications from any or all Bidders, either in

writing or through personnel contact. Bidders will not be permitted to change the

substance of Bids after opening of Bids.

6.3 Notwithstanding sub-clauses 7.1 and 7.2 above, HPCL may solicit the bidder’s

consent to an extension of the period of validity of offer. The request and the

response there to shall be made in writing. If the bidders agree to the extension

request, the validity of Bank Guarantee towards Earnest money shall also be

suitably extended. Bidders may refuse the request without forfeiting his EMD.

However, bidders agreeing to the request for extension of validity of offer will

neither be permitted to revise the price nor to modify the offer.

7.0 BID CLARIFICATIONS/AMENDMENTS BY HPCL

7.1 HPCL may issue clarifications/amendments in the form of addendum/corrigendum

during the bidding period and may also issue amendments subsequent to receiving

the bids. For the addendum/corrigendum issued during the bidding period, bidders

shall confirm the inclusion of addendum/corrigendum in their bid. Bidder shall

follow the instructions issued along with addendum/corrigendum.

7.2 Bidders shall examine the Bidding Document thoroughly and submit to HPCL any

apparent conflict, discrepancy or error. HPCL shall issue appropriate clarifications

or amendments, if required. Any failure by Bidder to comply with the aforesaid

shall not excuse the Bidder from performing the Services in accordance with the

contract if subsequently awarded.

8.0 CONFIDENTIALITY OF DOCUMENTS

Bidder shall treat the Bidding Document and contents therein as private and

confidential and shall not use the Bidding Document for any other purposes.

9.0 APPLICABLE LANGUAGE

The bid prepared by the bidder, all correspondences and documents related to this

bid shall be written in English language only. For document submitted in any other

language, an English translation shall also be submitted, in which case, for the

purpose of interpretation of the bid, the English translation shall govern.

10.0 CAUTION AND DISCLAIMER

Transfer of Bid document by the bidder is not permitted.



Bidder shall make his own interpretation of any and all information provided in the

Bidding Document. HPCL shall not be responsible for the accuracy or

completeness of such information and/or interpretation.

Although certain information’s are provided in the Bidding Document, however,

bidder shall be responsible for obtaining and verifying all necessary data and

information as required by him.

HPCL reserves the right to accept or reject any/all tender in whole or in part

without assigning any reason whatsoever.

HPCL shall not be bound to accept the lowest tender and reserves the right to

accept any or more tenders in part. Decision of HPCL in this regard shall be final.

11.0 EVALUATION OF UNPRICED BIDS

The bids shall be evaluated on the basis of the following criteria:

11.1 RECEIPT OF BID

Bids received late i.e. after due date and time, due to any reason (s) whatsoever

shall be rejected.

11.2 DEVIATIONS TO TENDER REQUIREMENTS

11.2.1 The bidders are required to submit offers strictly as per the terms and

conditions/specifications given in the Bidding Document and not to

stipulate any deviations. The offer of bidders stipulating deviations to any

of the following terms/conditions of the Bidding Document shall not be

considered for price opening.

i) Security Deposit [Clause No. 4 (b) of GCC]

ii) Defect Liability period (Clause No. 5.n of GCC)

iii) Suspension & Termination (Clause No.5e & 12 of GCC)

iv) Liquidated Damages (Clause No. 10 of GCC)

v) Force Majeure (Clause No. 13 of GCC)

vi) Scope of work & Scope of Supply

vii) Schedule of Rates

viii) Validity of offer

ix) Retention Money (Clause No. 7.c of GCC)

x) Arbitration (Clause No 14 of GCC)

xi) Deviation in payment terms

11.2.2 In case Bidders wish to stipulate any deviation to Bidding Document

requirements other than those stated above, they shall indicate the same as

per the proforma enclosed in the Bidding Document. Bidder shall note that

clarification/queries/deviations mentioned elsewhere in the offer shall not



be given any cognizance. However HPCL reserves their right to reject bids

containing deviations to any of the Bidding Document stipulations.

11.3 UNSOLICITED POST BID MODIFICATION

Bidders are advised to quote strictly as per terms and conditions of the Bidding

Document and not to stipulate any deviation / exceptions. Once, quoted the bidders

shall not make any subsequent price changes, whether resulting or arising out of

any technical / commercial clarifications sought/allowed on any deviations or

exceptions mentioned in the bid unless discussed and agreed by HPCL in writing.

11.4 DETERMINATION OF RESPONSIVENESS

i) Prior to the financial evaluation of bids, the HPCL will determine whether

each bid is substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding

Document.

ii) For the purpose of this Clause, a substantially responsive bid is one which

conforms to all the terms and conditions and specifications of the Bidding

Document without material deviation or reservation. A material deviation

or reservation is one which affects in any substantial way the scope,

quality, or performance of the works or which limits in any substantial

way, inconsistent with the Bidding Document, the HPCL’s rights or

Bidder’s obligation under the Contract and retention of which deviation or

reservation would affect unfairly the competitive position of other bidders

presenting substantially responsive bids.

iii) If a bid is not substantially responsive to the requirements of the Bidding

Document, it may be rejected by the HPCL. Such rejection may be

intimated to the Bidder.

12.0 EVALUATION OF PRICE BIDS

12.1 The “PRICE BIDS” of only substantially responsive bidders and techno –

commercially accepted shall be considered for opening.

12.2 Bidders shall quote the prices in Indian Rupees only.

12.3 The quoted prices shall be checked to determine the arithmetical correctness of the

same. (Ref. clause no. 3.19 of GTC)

12.4 HPCL reserves their right to extend purchase/price preference to NSIC/Public

Sector Enterprises as admissible under the existing policies of Government of

India as on the date of opening unpriced bids.

12.5 HPCL reserves their right to negotiate the quoted prices with lowest bidder.



12.6 HPCL reserves the right to delete any of the items in the Schedule of Rates at the

time of placement of Fax of Intent/Purchase Order. The decision of HPCL shall be

final and binding.

12.7 The Contractor shall quote for all the items of the Schedule of Rates. It may be

noted that if any item is left unquoted, then such a quotation will be loaded with

the highest quoted rate for that particular item for evaluation purpose.

12.8 The bids shall be evaluated on a consolidated basis for both Part-A and Part-B and

will not be split further on the basis of the two parts.

12.9 Bids will be evaluated taking into account the charges toward the AMC for 5

years but will not be part of purchase order. However HPCL reserves the

right to award the AMC contract subsequently at the end of the warranty

period as per the rates quoted which will have to be valid till end of the five

years starting from completion of 24 months warranty period .

13.0 REBATE

No suo-moto reduction in prices quoted by bidder shall be permitted after opening

of the bid. If any bidder unilaterally reduces the prices quoted by him in his bid

after opening of bids, the bid (s) of such bidder(s) will be liable to be rejected.

Such reduction shall not be considered for comparison of prices but shall be

binding on the bidder in case he happens to be a successful bidder for award of

work.

14.0 PURCHASE ORDER (PO)

14.1 Purchase Order shall be prepared for award of works. Successful bidder shall be

intimated regarding award of works through Fax/Letter of Intent. Until the final

PO is prepared and executed, this Bidding Document together with the annexed

documents, modification, deletions agreed upon by the HPCL and Bidder’s

acceptance thereof shall constitute a binding contract between the successful

bidder and the HPCL based on terms contained in the aforesaid documents and the

finally submitted and accepted prices.

14.2 The Purchase Order shall consist of the following:

a) Original Bidding Document along with its enclosures issued.

b) Addendum/Corrigendum to Bidding Document issued, if any.

c) Fax/Letter of Intent.

d) The detailed Letter of Award/Acceptance along with Statement of Agreed

Variations (if any) and enclosures attached therewith.



14.3 The statement of agreed variations shall be prepared based on the finally retained

deviations, if any, by the Bidder and accepted by HPCL. All other correspondences

between HPCL and the Bidder prior to issue of Fax/Letter of Intent shall be treated

as Null & Void. Any deviations or stipulations made and accepted by HPCL after

award of the job shall be treated as amendments to the contract document as above.



SECTION - 3

DECLARATION



DECLARATION

(to be submitted along with unpriced bid)

M/s________________________________________hereby declare/clarify that we have

not been banned or delisted by any Government or quasi Government agencies or Public

Sector Undertakings.

Stamp & Signature of the Bidder

NOTE: If a bidder has been banned by any Government or Quasi Government agencies

or PSU’s, this fact must be clearly stated with details. If this declaration is not given along

with the unpriced bid, the tender will be rejected as non-responsive.

CONTACT PARTICULARS

NAME OF PERSON

TEL NO. OFFICE

TEL NO. RES.

MOBILE NO.

E-MAIL ID



SECTION - 4

GENERAL TERMS &

CONDITIONS



GENERAL TERMS & CONDITIONS OF WORKS CONTRACT

1 PRELIMINARY

1.1 This is a Contract for execution of __________________ work at

_______________________. (please fill up the blanks)

1.2 The tenderer for the abovementioned item of work is

____________________________. (please give the name and address of the

tenderer)

1.3 The terms and conditions mentioned hereunder are the terms and conditions of the

Contract for the execution of the work mentioned under item 1.1 above.

1.4 It is the clear understanding between Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited

and the tenderer ______________________________________ that (name and

address of the tenderer) in case the tender of

______________________________________________________________ is

(name and address of the tenderer) accepted by Hindustan Petroleum Corporation

Limited and an intimation to that effect is so issued and also a Purchase Order is

placed with (name and address of the tenderer) this document will be termed as a

Contract between the parties and terms and conditions hereunder would govern the

parties interest.

1.5 Interpretation of Contract Documents: All documents forming part of the Contract

are to be taken mutually explanatory. Should there be any discrepancy,

inconsistency, error or omission in the contract, the decision of the

Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall be the final and the contractor

shall abide by the decision. The decision shall not be arbitrable. Works shown

upon the drawings but not mentioned in the specification or described in the

specifications without being shown on the drawings shall nevertheless be deemed

to be included in the same manner as if they are shown in the drawings and

described in the specifications.

1.6 Special conditions of Contract : The special conditions of contract, if any provided

and whenever and wherever referred to shall be read in conjunction with General

Terms and Conditions of contract, specifications, drawings, and any other

documents forming part of this contract wherever the context so requires.

Notwithstanding the subdivision of the documents into separate sections, parts

volumes, every section, part or volume shall be deemed to be supplementary or

complementary to each other and shall be read in whole. In case of any

misunderstanding arising the same shall be referred to decision of the Owner/

Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and their decision shall be final and binding

and the decision shall not be arbitrable.

It is the clear understanding that wherever it is mentioned that the Contractor shall

do/perform a work and/or provide facilities for the performance of the work, the

doing or the performance or the providing of the facilities is at the cost and

expenses of the work not liable to be paid or reimbursed by the Owner.



2. DEFINITIONS

In this contract unless otherwise specifically provided or defined and unless a

contrary intention appears from the contract the following words and expressions

are used in the following meanings;

2.1 The term "Agreement" wherever appearing in this document shall be read as

"Contract".

2.2 The "Authority" for the purpose of this Contract shall be the Chairman and

Managing Director or any other person so appointed or authorised.

2.3 The "Chairman and Managing Director" shall mean the Chairman and Managing

Director of HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED or any

person so appointed, nominated or designated and holding the office of Chairman

& Managing Director.

2.4 The "Change Order" means an order given in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge or

by Owner to effect additions to or deletion from or alterations into the Work.

2.5 The "Construction Equipment" means all appliances and equipment of whatsoever

nature for the use in or for the execution, completion, operation or maintenance of

the work except those intended to form part of the Permanent Work.

2.6 The "Contract" between the Owner and the Contractor shall mean and include all

documents like enquiry, tender submitted by the contractor and the purchase order

issued by the owner and other documents connected with the issue of the purchase

order and orders, instruction, drawings, change orders, directions issued by the

Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for the execution, completion and

commissioning of the works and the period of contract mentioned in the Contract

including such periods of time extensions as may be granted by the owner at the

request of the contractor and such period of time for which the work is continued

by the contractor for purposes of completion of the work.

2.7 "The Contractor" means the person or the persons, firm or Company whose tender

has been accepted by the Owner and includes the Contractor's legal heirs,

representative, successor(s) and permitted assignees.

2.8 The "Drawings" shall include maps, plans and tracings or prints thereof with any

modifications approved in writing by the Engineer-in-Charge and such other

drawings as may, from time to time, be furnished or approved in writing by the

Engineer-in-Charge.

2.9 The "Engineer-in-Charge or Site-in-Charge" shall mean the person appointed or

designated as such by the Owner and shall include those who are expressly

authorised by the owner to act for and on its behalf.



2.10 "The Owner" means the HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION

LIMITED incorporated in India having its Registered office at PETROLEUM

HOUSE, 17, JAMSHEDJI TATA ROAD, BOMBAY -400020 and Marketing

office at ____________________________________________ or their successors

or assignees.

2.11 The "Permanent Work" means and includes works which form a part of the work

to be handed over to the Owner by the Contractor on completion of the contract.

2.12 The "Project Manager" shall mean the Project Manager of HINDUSTAN

PETROLEUM CORPORATION LIMITED, or any person so appointed,

nominated or designated.

2.13 The "Site" means the land on which the work is to be executed or carried out and

such other place(s) for purpose of performing the Contract.

2.14 The "Specifications" shall mean the various technical and other specifications

attached and referred to in the tender documents. It shall also include the latest

editions, including all addenda/corrigenda or relevant Indian Standard

Specifications and Bureau of Indian Standards.

2.15 The "Sub-Contractor" means any person or firm or Company (other than the

Contractor) to whom any part of the work has been entrusted by the Contractor

with the prior written consent of the Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- Charge

and their legal heirs, representatives, successors and permitted assignees of such

person, firm or Company.

2.16 The "Temporary Work" means and includes all such works which are a part of the

contract for execution of the permanent work but does not form part of the

permanent work confirming to practices, procedures applicable rules and

regulations relevant in that behalf.

2.17 The "Tender" means the document submitted by a person or authority for carrying

out the work and the Tenderer means a person or authority who submits the tender

offering to carry out the work as per the terms and conditions.

2.18 The "Work" shall mean the works to be executed in accordance with the Contract

or part thereof as the case may be and shall include extra, additional, altered or

substituted works as maybe required for the purposes of completion of the work

contemplated under the Contract.

3. SUBMISSION OF TENDER

3.1 Before submitting the Tender, the Tenderer shall at their own cost and expenses

visit the site, examine and satisfy as to the nature of the existing roads, means of

communications, the character of the soil, state of land and of the excavations, the

correct dimensions of the work facilities for procuring various construction and

other material and their availability, and shall obtain information on all matters and



conditions as they may feel necessary for the execution of the works as intended

by the Owners and shall also satisfy of the availability of suitable water for

construction of civil works and for drinking purpose and power required for

fabrication work etc. Tenderer, whose tender may be accepted and with whom the

Contract is entered into shall not be eligible and be able to make any claim on any

of the said counts in what so ever manner for what so ever reasons at any point of

time and such a claim shall not be raised as a dispute and shall not be arbitrable.

A pre-bid meeting may be held as per the schedule mentioned in the tender.

3.2 The Tenderer shall be deemed to have satisfied fully before tendering as to the

correctness and sufficiency of his tender for the works and of the rates and prices

quoted in the schedule of quantities which rates and prices shall except as

otherwise provided cover all his obligations under the contract.

3.3 It must be clearly understood that the whole of the conditions and specifications

are intended to be strictly enforced and that no work will be considered as extra

work and allowed and paid for unless they are clearly outside the scope, spirit,

meaning of the Contract and intent of the Owner and have been so ordered in

writing by Owner and/or Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge, whose decision shall

be final and binding.

3.4 Before filling the Tender the Contractor will check and satisfy all drawings and

materials to be procured and the schedule of quantities by obtaining clarification

from the Owner on all the items as may be desired by the Tenderer. No claim for

any alleged loss or compensation will be entertained on this account, after

submission of Tender by the Tenderer/Contractor and such a claim shall not be

arbitrable.

3.5 Unless specifically provided for in the tender documents or any Special

Conditions, no escalation in the Tender rates or prices quoted will be permitted

throughout the period of contract or the period of actual completion of the job

whichever is later on account of any variation in prices of materials or cost of

labour or due to any other reasons. Claims on account of escalation shall not be

arbitrable.

3.6 The quantities indicated in the Tender are approximate. The approved schedule of

rates of the contract will be applicable for variations upto plus or minus 25% of the

contract value. No revision of schedule of rates will be permitted for such

variations in the contract value, including variations of individual quantities,

addition of new items, alterations, additions/deletions or substitutions of items, as

mentioned above. Quantities etc. mentioned and accepted in the joint measurement

sheets shall alone be final and binding on the parties.

3.7 Owner reserve their right to award the contract to any tenderer and their decision

in this regard shall be final. They also reserve their right to reject any or all tenders

received. No disputes could be raised by any tenderer(s) whose tender has been

rejected.



3.8 The Rates quoted by the Tenderer shall include Costs and expenses on all counts

viz. cost of materials, transportation of machine(s), tools, equipments, labour,

power, Administration charges, price escalations, profits, etc. etc. except to the

extent of the cost of material(s), if any, agreed to be supplied by Owner and

mentioned specifically in that regard in condition of Contract, in which case, the

cost of such material if taken for preparation of the Contractor's Bill(s) shall be

deducted before making payment of the Bill(s) of the Contractor. The description

given in the schedule of quantities shall unless otherwise stated be held to include

wastage on materials, carriage and cartage, carrying in and return of empties,

hoisting, setting, fitting and fixing in position and all other expenses necessary in

and for the full and complete execution and completion of works and in

accordance with good practice and recognised principles in that regard.

3.9 Employees of the State and Central Govt. and employees of the Public Sector

Undertakings, including retired employees are covered under their respective

service conditions/rules in regard to their submitting the tender. All such persons

should ensure compliance to the respective/applicable conditions, rules etc. etc.

Any person not complying with those rules etc. but submitting the tender in

violation of such rules, after being so noticed shall be liable for the forfeiture of the

Earnest Money Deposit made with the tender, termination of Contract and

sufferance on account of forfeiture of Security Deposit and sufferance of damages

arising as a result of termination of Contract.

3.10 In consideration for having a chance to be considered for entering into a contract

with the Owner, the Tenderer agrees that the Tender submitted by him shall remain

valid for the period prescribed in the tender conditions, from the date of opening of

the tender. The Tenderer shall not be entitled during the said validity period, to

revoke or cancel the tender without the consent in writing from the Owner.

In case the tenderer revokes or cancels the tender or varies any of terms of the

tender without the Consent of the Owner, in writing, the Tenderer forfeits the right

to the refund of the Earnest Money paid along with the tender.

3.11 The prices quoted by the Tenderer shall be firm during the validity period of the

bid and Tenderer agrees to keep the bid alive and valid during the said period. The

Tenderers shall particularly take note of this factor before submitting their

tender(s).

3.12 The works shall be carried out strictly as per approved specifications. Deviations,

if any, shall have to be authorised by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge in

writing prior to implementing deviations. The price benefit, if any, arising out of

the accepted deviation shall be passed on to the Owner. The decision of Engineer-

in-Charge shall be final in this matter.

3.13 The contractor shall make all arrangements at his own cost to transport the

required materials outside and inside the working places and leaving the premises

in a neat and tidy condition after completion of the job to the satisfaction of



Owner. All materials except those agreed to be supplied by the Owner shall be

supplied by the contractor at his own cost and the rates quoted by the Contractor

should be inclusive of all royalties, rents, taxes, duties, octroi, statutory levies, if

any, etc. etc.

3.14 The Contractor shall not carry on any work other than the work under this Contract

within the Owners premises without prior permission in writing from the Engineer-

in-Charge/Site-in-charge.

3.15 The Contractor shall be bound to follow and ensure compliance to all the safety

and security regulations and other statutory rules applicable to the area. In the

event of any damage or loss or sufference caused due to non-observance of such

rules and regulations, the contractor shall be solely responsible for the same and

shall keep the Owner indemnified against all such losses and claims arising from

the same.

3.16 At any time after acceptance of tender, the Owner reserves the right to add, amend

or delete any work item, the bill of quantities at a later date or reduce the scope of

work in the overall interest of the work by prior discussion and intimation to the

Contractor. The decision of Owner, with reasons recorded therefor, shall be final

and binding on both the Owner and the Contractor. The Contractor shall not have

right to claim compensation or damage etc. in that regard. The Owner reserves the

right to split the work under this contract between two or more contractors without

assigning any reasons.

3.17 Contractor shall not be entitled to sublet, sub contract or assign, the work under

this Contract without the prior consent of the Owner obtained in writing.

3.18 All signatures in tender document shall be dated as well as all the pages of all

sections of the tender documents shall be initialled at the lower position and

signed, wherever required in the tender papers by the Tenderer or by a person

holding Power of Attorney authorising him to sign on behalf of the tenderer before

submission of tender.

3.19 The tender should be quoted in English, both in figures as well as in words. The

rates and amounts tendered by the Tenderer in the Schedule of rates for each item

and in such a way that insertion is not possible. The total tendered amount should

also be indicated both in figures and words with the signature of tenderer.

If some discrepancies are found between the rates given in words and figures of

the amount shown in the tender, the following procedure shall be applied:

(a) When there is a difference between the rates in figures and words, the rate which

corresponds to the amount worked out by the tenderer shall be taken as correct.

(b) When the rate quoted by the tenderer in figures and words tallies but the amount is

incorrect, the rate quoted by the tenderer shall be taken as correct.



(c) When it is not possible to ascertain the correct rate in the manner prescribed above

the rate as quoted in words shall be adopted.

3.20 All corrections and alterations in the entries of tender paper will be signed in full

by the tenderer with date. No erasures or over writings are permissible.

3.21 Transfer of tender document by one intending tenderer to the another one is not

permissible. The tenderer on whose name the tender has been sent only can quote.

3.22 The Tender submitted by a tenderer if found to be incomplete in any or all manner

is liable to be rejected. The decision of the Owner in this regard is final and

binding. In case of any error/discrepancy in the amount written in words and

figures, the lower amount between the two shall prevail.

4. DEPOSITS

a) EARNEST MONEY DEPOSIT (EMD)

The tenderer will be required to pay a sum as specified in the covering letter, as

earnest money deposit alongwith the tender either thru a crossed demand draft or a

non-revokable Bank Guarantee in favour of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation

Limited, from any Scheduled Bank (other than a Co-Operative Bank) payable at

Mumbai in favour of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited, Mumbai in the

proforma enclosed. The earnest money deposit will be refunded after finalisation

of the contract.

Note: Public sector enterprises and small scale units registered with National Small

Scale Industries are exempted from payment of Earnest Money Deposit. Small

scale units registered with National Small Scale Industries should enclose a

photocopy of their registration certificate with their quotation to make their

quotation eligible for consideration. The Registration Certificate should remain

valid during the period of the contract that may be entered into with such

successful bidder. Such tenderers should ensure validity of the Registration

Certificate for the purpose.

b) SECURITY DEPOSIT:

The tenderer, with whom the contract is decided to be entered into and intimation

is so given will have to make a security deposit of one percent (1%) of the total

contract value in the form of account payee crossed demand draft drawn in favour

of the Owner, within 15 days from the date of intimation of acceptance of their

tender, failing which the Owner reserves the right to cancel the Contract and forfeit

the EMD.

1% of PO/Contract value as Security deposit will be acceptable in the form of

Demand draft upto Rs. 50,000/- and in the form of Demand draft / Bank guarantee

beyond Rs. 50,000/-.



Composite PBG for 10% of PO value towards Security Deposit and Performance

bank guarantee shall be accepted; which shall be valid upto a period of 3 months

beyond the expiry of Defect liability period.

Demand Draft should be drawn on Scheduled Banks, other than co-operative bank.

5. EXECUTION OF WORK

All the works shall be executed in strict conformity with the provisions of the

contract documents and with such explanatory details, drawings, specifications and

instructions as may be furnished from time to time to the Contractor by the

Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge, whether mentioned in the Contract or not.

The Contractor shall be responsible for ensuring that works throughout are

executed in the most proper and workman- like manner with the quality of material

and workmanship in strict accordance with the specifications and to the entire

satisfaction of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

The completion of work may entail working in monsoon also. The contractor must

maintain the necessary work force as may be required during monsoon and plan to

execute the job in such a way the entire project is completed within the contracted

time schedule. No extra charges shall be payable for such work during monsoon.

It shall be the responsibility of the contractor to keep the construction work site

free from water during and off the monsoon period at his own cost and expenses.

For working on Sundays/Holidays, the contractor shall obtain the necessary

permission from Engineer Incharge/Site Incharge in advance. The contractor shall

be permitted to work beyond the normal hours with prior approval of Engineer-In-

Charge/Site-In-Charge and the contractors quoted rate is inclusive of all such

extended hours of working and no extra amount shall be payable by the owner on

this account.

5.a. SETTING OUT OF WORKS AND SITE INSTRUCTIONS

5.a.1. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall furnish the Contractor with only the

four corners of the work site and a level bench mark and the Contractor shall set

out the works and shall provide an efficient staff for the purpose and shall be solely

responsible for the accuracy of such setting out.

5.a.2. The Contractor shall provide, fix and be responsible for the maintenance of all

necessary stakes, templates, level marks, profiles and other similar things and shall

take all necessary precautions to prevent their removal or disturbance and shall be

responsible for consequences of such removal or disturbance should the same take

place and for their efficient and timely reinstatement. The Contractor shall also be

responsible for the maintenance of all existing survey marks, either existing or

supplied and fixed by the Contractor. The work shall be set out to the satisfaction

of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge. The approval thereof or joining in

setting out the work shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibility.



5.a.3. Before beginning the works, the Contractor shall, at his own cost, provide all

necessary reference and level posts, pegs, bamboos, flags ranging rods, strings and

other materials for proper layout of the work in accordance with the scheme, for

bearing marks acceptable to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge. The Centre

longitudinal or face lines and cross lines shall be marked by means of small

masonary pillars. Each pillar shall have distinct marks at the centre to enable

theodolite to be set over it. No work shall be started until all these points are

checked and approved by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge in writing. But

such approval shall not relieve the contractor of any of his responsibilities. The

Contractor shall also provide all labour, materials and other facilities, as necessary,

for the proper checking of layout and inspection of the points during construction.

5.a.4. Pillars bearing geodetic marks located at the sites of units of works under

construction should be protected and fenced by the Contractor.

5.a.5. On completion of works, the contractor shall submit the geodetic documents

according to which the work was carried out.

5.a.6. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall communicate or confirm his

instructions to the contractor in respect of the executions of work in a "work site

order book" maintained in the office having duplicate sheet and the authorised

representative of the contractor shall confirm receipt of such instructions by

signing the relevant entries in the book.

5.a.7. All instructions issued by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall be in

writing. The Cntractor shall be liable to carry out the instructions without fail.

5.a.8. If the Contractor after receipt of written instruction from the Engineer-in-Charge/

Site-in-Charge requiring compliance within seven days fails to comply with such

drawings or 'instructions' or both as the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may

issue, owner may employ and pay other persons to execute any such work

whatsoever that may be necessary to give effect to such drawings or `instructions'

and all cost and expenses incurred in connection therewith as certified by the

Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge shall be borne by the contractor or may be

deducted from amounts due or that may become due to the contractor under the

contract or may be recovered as a debt.

5.a.9. The Contractor shall be entirely and exclusively responsible for the horizontal and

vertical alignment, the levels and correctness of every part of the work and shall

rectify effectually any errors or imperfections therein. Such rectifications shall be

carried out by the Contractor, at his own cost.

5.a.10. In case any doubts arise in the mind of the Contractor in regard to any expressions,

interpretations, statements, calculations of quantities, supply of material rates, etc.

etc., the contractor shall refer the same to the Site-in-Charge/ Engineer-in-Charge

for his clarification, instructions, guidance or clearing of doubts.



The decision of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall be final and the

contractor shall be bound by such a decision.

5.a.11. "The Contractor shall take adequate precautions, to ensure that his operations do

not create nuisance or misuse of the work space that shall cause unnecessary

disturbance or inconvenience to others at the work site".

5.a.12. "All fossils, coins articles of value of antiquity and structure or other remains of

geological or archaeological discovered on the site of works shall be declared to be

the property of the Owner and Contractor shall take reasonable precautions to

prevent his workmen or any other persons from removing or damaging any such

articles or thing and shall immediately inform the Owner/ Engineer-in-

Charge/Site-in-Charge."

5.a.13. "Contractor will be entirely and exclusively responsible to provide and maintain at

his expenses all lights, guards, fencing, etc. when and where even necessary or/as

required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for the protection of works or

safety and convenience to all the members employed at the site or general public."

5.b. COMMENCEMENT OF WORK

The contractor shall after paying the requisite security deposit, commence work

within 15 days from the date of receipt of the intimation of intent from the Owner

informing that the contract is being awarded. The date of intimation shall be the

date/day for counting the starting day/date and the ending day/date will be

accordingly calculated. Penalty, if any, for the delay in execution shall be

calculated accordingly.

Contractor should prepare detailed fortnightly construction programme for

approval by the Engineer-in-Charge within one month of receipt of Letter Of

Intent. The work shall be executed strictly as per such time schedule. The period of

Contract includes the time required for testing, rectifications, if any, re-testing and

completion of work in all respects to the entire satisfaction of the Engineer-in-

Charge.

A Letter of Intent is an acceptance of offer by the Owner and it need not be

accepted by the contractor. But the contractor should acknowledge a receipt of the

purchase order within 15 days of mailing of Purchase Order and any delay in

acknowledging the receipt will be a breach of contract and compensation for the

loss caused by such breach will be recovered by the Owner by forfeiting earnest

money deposit/bid bond.

5.c. SUBLETTING OF WORK

5.c.1. No part of the contract nor any share or interest thereof shall in any manner or

degree be transferred, assigned or sublet, by the Contractor, directly or indirectly to

any firm or corporation whatsoever, without the prior consent in writing of the

Owner.



5.c.2. At the commencement of every month the Contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-

in-charge/Site-in-Charge list of all sub-contractors or other persons or firms

engaged by the Contractor.

5.c.3 The contract agreement will specify major items of supply or services for which

the Contractor proposes to engage sub-Contractor/sub-Vendor. The contractor may

from time to time propose any addition or deletion from any such list and will

submit the proposals in this regard to the Engineer-in-charge/Designated officer-

in-charge for approval well in advance so as not to impede the progress of work.

Such approval of the Engineer-in-charge/Designated officer-in-charge will not

relieve the contractor from any of his obligations, duties and responsibilities under

the contract.

5.c.4. Notwithstanding any sub-letting with such approval as resaid and notwithstanding

that the Engineer-in-Charge shall have received copies of any sub-contract, the

Contractor shall be and shall remain solely to be responsible for the quality and

proper and expeditious execution of the works and the performance of all the

conditions of the contract in all respects as if such subletting or sub-contracting

had not taken place and as if such work had been done directly by the Contractor.

5.c.5 Prior approval in writing of the Owner shall be obtained before any change is

made in the constitution of the contractor/Contracting agency otherwise contract

shall be deemed to have been allotted in contravention of clause entitled “sub-

letting of works” and the same action may be taken and the same consequence

shall ensue as provided in the clause of “subletting of works”.

5.d EXTENSION OF TIME

1) If the Contractor anticipates that he will not be able to complete the work within

the contractual delivery/ completion date (CDD), then the Contractor shall make a

request for grant of time extension clearly specifying the reasons for which he

seeks extension of time and demonstrating as to how these reasons were beyond

the control of the contractor or attributable to the Owner. This request should be

made well before the expiry of the Contractual Delivery/ Completion Date (CDD).

2) If such a request for extension is received with a Bank Guarantee for the full

Liquidated Damages amount calculated on the Total Contract Value, the concerned

General Manager of the Owner shall grant a Provisional extension of time, pending

a decision on the request.

3) The concerned General Manager of the Owner shall expeditiously decide upon the

request for time extension and in any case not later than 6 months from the CDD

or date of receipt of the request, whichever is later.

4) Grant of any extension of time shall be by means of issuance of a Change Order.



5) In order to avoid any cash crunch to the Contractor, a Bank Guarantee could be

accepted against LD, as stated above. Once a decision is taken, the LD shall be

recovered from any pending bills or by encashment of the BG. Any balance sum of

Contractor or the BG (if LD is fully recovered from the bills) shall be promptly

refunded/returned to the Contractor.

5.e. SUSPENSION OF WORKS

5.e.1. Subject to the provisions of this contract, the contractor shall if ordered in writing

by the Engineer- in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for reasons recorded suspend the works

or any part thereof for such period and such time so ordered and shall not, after

receiving such, proceed with the work therein ordered to uspended until he shall

have received a written order to re-start. The Contractor shall be entitled to claim

extension of time for that period of time the work was ordered to be suspended.

Neither the Owner nor the Contractor shall be entitled to claim compensation or

damages on account of such an extension of time.

5.e.2. In case of suspension of entire work, ordered in writing by Engineer-in-

Charge/Site-in-Charge, for a period of 30 days, the Owner shall havethe option to

terminate the Contract as provided under the clause fortermination. The Contractor

shall not be at liberty to remove from the site of the works any plant or materials

belonging to him and the Employer shall have lien upon all such plant and

materials.

5.e.3. The contract shall, in case of suspension have the right to raise a dispute and have

the same arbitrated but however, shall not have the right to have the work stopped

from further progress and completion either by the owner or through other

contractor appointed by the owner.

5.f. OWNER MAY DO PART OF WORK

Not withstanding anything contained elsewhere in this contract, the owner upon

failure of the Contractor to comply with any instructions given in accordance with

the provisions of this contract, may instead of Contract and undertaking charge of

entire work, place additional labour force, tools, equipment and materials on such

parts of the work, as the Owner may decide or engage another Contractor to

carryout the balance of work. In such cases, the Owner shall have the right to

deduct from the amounts payable to the Contractor the difference in cost of such

work and materials with ten percent overhead added to cover all departmental

charges. Should the total amount thereof exceed the amount due to the contractor,

the Contractor shall pay the difference to the Owner within 15 days of making

demand for payment failing which the Contractor shall be liable to pay interest at

24% p.a. on such amounts till the date of payment.

5.g. INSPECTION OF WORKS

5.g.1. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and Officers from Central or State

Government will have full power and authority to inspect the works at any time



wherever in progress, either on the site or at the Contractor's premises/workshops

of any person, firm or corporation where work in connection with the contract may

be in hand or where the materials are being or are to be supplied, and the

Contractor shall afford or procure for the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge every

facility and assistance to carryout such inspection. The Contractor shall, at all

times during the usual working hours and at all other times at which reasonable

notice of the intention of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge or his

representative to visit the works shall have been given to the Contractor, either

himself be present to receive orders and instructions, or have a responsible agent,

duly accredited in writing, present for the purpose. Orders given to the Contractor's

agent shall be considered to have the same force as if they had been given to the

Contractor himself. The Contractor shall give not less than seven days notice in

writing to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge before covering up or otherwise

placing beyond reach of inspection and measurement any work in order that the

same may be inspected and measured. In the event of breach of above, the same

shall be uncovered at Contractor's expense for carrying out such measurement

and/or inspection.

5.g.2. No material shall be removed and despatched by the Contractor from the site

without the prior approval in writing of the Engineer-in-charge. The contractor is

to provide at all times during the progress of the work and the maintenance period

proper means of access with ladders, gangways, etc. and the necessary attendance

to move and adapt as directed for inspection or measurements of the works by the

Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

5.h. SAMPLES

5.h.1. The contractor shall furnish to the Engineer-in-charge/Site-in-Charge for approval

when requested or required adequate samples of all materials and finishes to be

used in the work.

5.h.2. Samples shall be furnished by the Contractor sufficiently in advance and before

commencement of the work so as the Owner can carry out tests and examinations

thereof and approve or reject the samples for use in the works. All material

samples furnished and finally used/applied in actual work shall fully be of the

same quality of the approved samples.

5.i. TESTS FOR QUALITY OF WORK

5.i.1. All workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the contract

documents and in accordance with the instructions of the Engineer-in-Charge /

Site-in- Charge and shall be subjected from time to time to such tests at

Contractor's cost as the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may direct at the place

of manufacture or fabrication or on the site or at all or any such places. The

Contractor shall provide assistance, instruments, labour and materials as are

normally required for examining, measuring and testing any workmanship as may

be selected and required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.



5.i.2. All the tests that will be necessary in connection with the execution of the work as

decided by the Engineer-in- charge/Site-in-Charge shall be carried out at the

contractors cost and expenses.

5.i.3. If any tests are required to be carried out in connection with the work or materials

or workmanship to be supplied by the owner, such tests shall be carried out by the

Contractor as per instructions of Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and expenses

for such tests, if any, incurred by the contractor shall be reimbursed by the Owner.

The contractor should file his claim with the owner within 15 (fifteen) days of

inspection/test and any claim made beyond that period shall lapse and be not

payable.

5.j. ALTERATIONS AND ADDITIONS TO SPECIFICATIONS, DESIGNS AND

WORKS

5.j.1. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall have powers to make any alterations,

additions and/or substitutions to the schedule of quantities, the original

specifications, drawings, designs and instructions that may become necessary or

advisable or during the progress of the work and the Contractor shall be bound to

carryout such altered/extra/new items of work in accordance with instructions

which may be given to him in writing signed by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site- in-

Charge. Such alterations, omissions, additions or substitutions shall not invalidate

the contract. The altered, additional or substituted work which the Contractor may

be directed to carryon in the manner as part of the work shall be carried out by the

Contractor on the same conditions in all respects on which he has agreed to do the

work. The time for completion of such altered added and/or substituted work may

be extended for that part of the particular job. The rates for such additional altered

or substituted work under this Clause shall, be worked out in accordance with the

following provisions:

5.j.2. If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are specified in the

contract for similar class of work, the Contractor is bound to carryout the

additional, altered or substituted work at the same rates as are specified in the

contract.

5.j.3. If the rates for the additional, altered or substituted work are not specifically

provided in the contract for the work, the rates will be derived from the rates for

similar class of work as are specified in the contract for the work. In the opinion of

the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge as to whether or not the rates can be

reasonably so derived from the items in this contract, will be final and binding on

the Contractor.

5.j.4. If the rates for the altered, additional or substituted work cannot be determined in

the manner specified above, then the Contractor shall, within seven days of the

date of receipt of order to carry out the work, inform the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-

in-Charge of the rate at which he intends to charge for such class of work,

supported by analysis of the rate or rates claimed and the Engineer-In-Charge/

Site-in-Charge shall determine the rates on the basis of the prevailing market rates



for both material and labour plus 10% to cover overhead and profit of labour rates

and pay the Contractor accordingly. The opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-

in-Charge as to current market rates of materials and the quantum of labour

involved per unit of measurement will be final and binding on the contractor.

5.j.5. The quantities indicated in the Tender are approximate. The approved schedule of

rates of the contract will be applicable for variations of upto +25% of the estimated

contract value. No revision of schedule of rates will be permitted for such

variations in the contract value, even for variations of individual quantities,

addition of new items, alterations, additions/deletions or substitutions of items, as

mentioned above.

5.j.6. In case of any item of work for which there is no specification supplied by the

Owner and is mentioned in the tender documents, such work shall be carried out in

accordance with Indian Standard Specifications and if the Indian Standard

Specifications do not cover the same, the work should be carried out as per

standard Engineering Practice subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-Charge/

Site-in-Charge.

5.k. PROVISIONAL ACCEPTANCE

Acceptance of sections of the works for purposes of equipment erection, piping,

electrical work and similar usages by the Owner and payment for such work or

parts of work shall not constitute a waiver of any portion of this contract and shall

not be construed so as to prevent the Engineer from requiring replacement of

defective work that may become apparent after the said acceptance and also shall

not absolve the Contractor of the obligations under this contract. It is made clear

that such an acceptance does not indicate or denote or establish to the fact of

execution of that work or the Contract until the work is completed in full in

accordance with the provisions of this Contract.

5.l. COMPLETION OF WORK AND COMPLETION CERTIFICATE

As soon as the work is completed in all respects, the contractor shall give notice of

such completion to the site in charge or the Owner and within thirty days of receipt

of such notice the site in charge shall inspect the work and shall furnish the

contractor with a certificate of completion indicating:

a) defects, if any, to be rectified by the contractor

b) items, if any, for which payment shall be made in reduced rates

c) the date of completion.

5.m. USE OF MATERIALS AND RETURN OF SURPLUS MATERIALS

5.m.1. Notwithstanding anything contained to the contrary in any or all of the clauses of

this contract, where any materials for the execution of the contract are procured

with the assistance of Government either by issue from Government stocks or

purchase made under orders or permits or licences issued by Government, the



contractor shall use the said materials economically and solely for the purpose of

the contract and shall not dispose them of without the permission of the Owner.

5.m.2. All surplus(serviceable) or unserviceable materials that may be left over after the

completion of the contract or at its termination for any reason whatsoever, the

Contractor shall deliver the said product to the Owner without any demur. The

price to be paid to the Contractor, if not already paid either in full or in part,

however, shall not exceed the amount mentioned in the Schedule of Rates for such

material and in cases where such rates are not so mentioned, shall not exceed the

CPWD scheduled rates. In the event of breach of the aforesaid condition the

contractor shall become liable for contravention of the terms of the Contract.

5.m.3. The surplus (serviceable) and unserviceable products shall be determined by joint

measurement. In case where joint measurement has failed to take place, the Owner

may measure the same and determine the quantity.

5.m.4. It is made clear that the Owner shall not be liable to take stock and keep possession

and pay for the surplus and unserviceable stocks and the Owner may direct the

Contractor to take back such material brought by the Contractor and becoming

surplus and which the Owner may decide to keep and not to pay for the same.

5.n. DEFECT LIABILITY PERIOD

The contractor shall guarantee the work executed for a period of 12 months from

the date of completion of the job. Any damage or defect that may arise or lie

undiscovered at the time of completion of the job shall be rectified or replaced by

the contractor at his own cost. The decision of the Engineer In-charge/Site-

Incharge/Owner shall be the final in deciding whether the defect has to be rectified

or replaced.

Equipment or spare parts replaced under warranty/guarantees shall have further

warranty for a mutually agreed period from the date of acceptance.

The owner shall intimate the defects noticed in writing by a Registered A.D. letter

or otherwise and the contractor within 15 days of receipt of the intimation shall

start the rectification work and complete within the time specified by the owner

failing which the owner will get the defects rectified by themselves or by any other

contractor and the expenses incurred in getting the same done shall be paid by the

Contractor under the provision of the Contract.

Thus, defect liability is applicable only in case of job/works contract (civil,

mechanical, electrical, maintenance etc.) where any damage of defect may arise in

future (i.e. within 12 months from the date of completion of job) or lie

undiscovered at the time of completion of job.

In other words, in case of service contracts (like car hire etc.) where there is no

question of damage or defect arising in future, the defect liability clause is not

applicable.



5.o. DAMAGE TO PROPERTY

5.o.1. Contractor shall be responsible for making good to the satisfaction of the Owner

any loss of and any damage to all structures and properties belonging to the Owner

or being executed or procured by the Owner or of other agencies within the

premises of the work of the Owner, if such loss or damage is due to fault and/or

the negligence or willful acts or omission of the Contractor, his employees, agents,

representatives or sub-contractors.

5.o.2. The Contractors shall indemnify and keep the Owner harmless of all claims for

damage to Owner's property arising under or by reason of this contract.

6. DUTIES AND RESPONSIBILITIES OF CONTRACTOR

6.a. EMPLOYMENT LIABILITY TOWARDS WORKERS EMPLOYED BY THE

CONTRACTOR

6.a.1 The Contractor shall be solely and exclusively responsible for engaging or

employing persons for the execution of work. All persons engaged by the

contractor shall be on Contractor's payroll and paid by Contractor. All disputes or

differences between the Contractor and his/their employees shall be settled by

Contractor.

6.a.2. Owner has absolutely no liability whatsoever concerning the employees of the

Contractor. The Contractor shall indemnify Owner against any loss or damage or

liability arising out of or in the course of his/their employing persons or relation

with his/their employees. The Contractor shall make regular and full payment of

wages and on any complaint by any employee of the Contractor or his sub

contractor regarding non-payment of wages, salaries or other dues, Owner reserves

the right to make payments directly to such employees or sub- contractor of the

Contractor and recover the amount in full from the bills of the Contractor and the

contractor shall not claim any compensation or reimbursement thereof. The

Contractor shall comply with the Minimum Wages Act applicable to the area of

work site with regard to payment of wages to his employees and also to employees

of his sub contractor.

6.a.3. The Contractor shall advise in writing or in such appropriate way to all of his

employees and employees of sub-contractors and any other person engaged by him

that their appointment/employment is not by the Owner but by the Contractor and

that their present appointment is only in connection with the construction contract

with Owner and that therefore, such an employment/appointment would not enable

or make them eligible for any employment/appointment with the Owner either

temporarily or/and permanent basis.

6.b. NOTICE TO LOCAL BODIES

The contractor shall comply with and give all notices required under any

Government authority, instruction, rule or order made under any act of parliament,



state laws or any regulations or by-laws of any local authority relating to the

works.

6.c. FIRST AID AND INDUSTRIAL INJURIES

6.c.1 Contractor shall maintain first aid facility for his employees and those of his sub-

contractors.

6.c.2. Contractor shall make arrangements for ambulance service and for the treatment of

all types of injuries. Names and telephone numbers of those providing such

services shall be furnished to Owner prior to start of construction and their name

board shall be prominently displayed in Contractor's field office.

6.c.3. All industrial injuries shall be reported promptly to owner and a copy of

contractor's report covering each personal injury requiring the attention of a

physician shall be furnished to the Owner.

6.d. SAFETY CODE

6.d.1. The Contractor shall at his own expenses arrange for the Safety provisions as may

be necessary for the execution of the work or as required by the Engineer-in-

Charge in respect of all labours directly or indirectly employed for performance of

the works and shall provide all facilities in connections therewith. In case the

contractor fails to make arrangements and provide necessary facilities as aforesaid,

the Owner shall be entitled to do so and recover the cost thereof from the

Contractor.

6.d.2. From the commencement to the completion of the works, the contractor shall take

full responsibility for the care thereof and of all the temporary works (defined as

meaning all temporary works of every kind required in or for the execution,

completion or maintenance of the works). In case damage, loss or injury shall

happen to the works or to any part thereof or to temporary works or to any cause

whatsoever repair at his (Contractor's) own cost and make good the same so that at

the time of completion, the works shall be in good order and condition and in

conformity in every respect with the requirement of the contract and Engineer-in-

Charge's instructions.

6.d.3. In respect of all labour, directly or indirectly employed in the work for the

performance of the Contractor's part of this agreement, the contractor shall at his

own expense arrange for all the safety provisions as per relevant Safety Codes of

C.P.W.D Bureau of Indian Standards, the Electricity Act/I.E. Rules. The Mines

Act and such other Acts as applicable.

6.d.4. The Contractor shall observe and abide by all fire and safety regulations of the

Owner. Before starting construction work, the Contractor shall consult with

Owner's Safety Engineer or Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and must make

good to the satisfaction of the Owner any loss or damage due to fire to any portion

of the work done or to be done under this agreement or to any of the Owner's

existing property.



6.d.5. The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with all relevant provisions

of the Contract Labour Act and shall pay rates of Wages and observe hours of

work/conditions of employment according to the rules in force from time to time.

6.d.6. The Contractor will be fully responsible for complying with the provision

including documentation and submission of reports on the above to the concerned

authorities and shall indemnify the Corporation from any such lapse for which the

Government will be taking action against them.

6.d.7. Owner shall on a report having been made by an inspecting Office as defined in

the Contract Labour Regulations have the power to deduct from the money due to

the Contractor any sum required or estimated to be required for making good the

loss suffered by a worker(s) by reasons of non-fulfillment of conditions of contract

for the benefit of workers no-payment of wages or of deductions made from his or

their wages which are not justified by the terms of contract or non observance of

the said contractor's labour Regulation.

6.e. INSURANCE AND LABOUR

Contractor shall at his own expense obtain and maintain an insurance policy with a

Nationalised Insurance Company to the satisfaction of the Owner as provided

hereunder.

6.e.1. EMPLOYEES STATE INSURANCE ACT

i. The Contractor agrees to and does hereby accept full and exclusive liability for the

compliance with all obligations imposed by Employees State Insurance Act, 1948,

and the Contractor further agrees to defend indemnify and hold Owner harmless

from any liability or penalty which may be imposed by the Central, State or local

authority by reason of any asserted violation by Contractor, or sub-contractor of

the Employees' State Insurance Act, 1948 and also from all claims, suits or

proceedings that may be brought against the Owner arising under, growing out of

or by reason of the work provided for by this contract whether brought by

employees of the Contractor, by third parties or by Central or State Government

authority or any political sub-division thereof.

ii. The Contractor agrees to file with the Employees State Insurance Corporation, the

Declaration forms and all forms which may be required in respect of the

Contractor's or sub-contractor's employee whose aggregate emuneration is within

the specified limit and who are employed in the work provided or those covered by

ESI Act under any amendment to the Act from time to time. The Contractor shall

deduct and secure the agreement of the sub-contractor to deduct the employee's

contribution as per the first schedule of the Employee's State Insurance Act from

wages and affix the employee's contribution cards at wages payment intervals. The

Contractor shall remit and secure the agreement of the sub contractor to remit to

the State Bank of India, Employee's State Insurance Corporation Account, the

Employee's contribution as required by the Act.



iii. The Contractor agrees to maintain all records as required under the Act in respect

of employees and payments and the Contractor shall secure the agreement of the

sub contractor to maintain such records. Any expenses incurred for the

contributions, making contribution or maintaining records shall be to the

Contractor's or sub-contractor's account.

iv. The Owner shall retain such sum as may be necessary from the total contract value

until the Contractor shall furnish satisfactory proof that all contributions as

required by the Employees State Insurance Act, 1948, have been paid.

v. WORKMAN'S COMPENSATION AND EMPLOYEE'S LIABILITY

INSURANCE

Provide Insurance for all the Contractor's employees engaged in the performance

of this contract. If any of the work is sublet, the Contractor shall ensure that the

sub contractor provides workmen's compensation and Employer's Liability.

Insurance for the latter's employees who are not covered under the Contractor's

insurance.

vi. AUTOMOBILE LIABILITY INSURANCE

Contractor shall take out an Insurance to cover all risks to Owner for each of his

vehicles plying on works of this contract and these insurances shall be valid for the

total contract period. No extra payment will be made for this insurance. Owner

shall not be liable for any damage or loss not made good by the Insurance

Company, should such damage or loss result from unauthorised use of the vehicle.

The provisions of the Motor Vehicle Act would apply.

vii. FIRE INSURANCE

Contractor shall within two weeks after award of contract insure the Works, Plant

and Equipment and keep them insured until the final completion of the Contract

against loss or damage by accident, fire or any other cause with an insurance

company to be approved by the Employer/Consultant in the joint names of the

Employer and the Contractor (name of the former being placed first in the Policy).

Such Policy shall cover the property of the Employer only.

6.e.2. ANY OTHER INSURANCE REQUIRED UNDER LAW OR REGULATION OR

BY OWNER

i. Contractor shall also provide and maintain any and all other insurance which may

be required under any law or regulations from time to time. He shall also carry and

maintain any other insurance which may be required by the Owner.

ii. The aforesaid insurance policy/policies shall provide that they shall not be

cancelled till the Engineer-in-Charge has agreed to their cancellation.



iii. The Contractor shall satisfy to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge from time to

time that he has taken out all insurance policies referred to above and has paid the

necessary premium for keeping the policies alive till the expiry of the defects

liability period.

iv. The contractor shall ensure that similar insurance policies are taken out by his sub-

contractor (if any) and shall be responsible for any claims or losses to the Owner

resulting from their failure to obtain adequate insurance protections in connection

thereof. The contractor shall produce or cause to be proceed by his sub-contractor

(if any) as the case may be, the relevant policy or policies and premium receipts as

and when required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

6.e.3. LABOUR AND LABOUR LAWS

i. The contractor shall at his own cost employ persons during the period of contract

and the persons so appointed shall not be construed under any circumstances to be

in the employment of the Owner.

ii. All payments shall be made by the contractor to the labour employed by him in

accordance with the various rules and regulations stated above. The contractor

shall keep the Owner indemnified from any claims whatsoever inclusive of

damages/costs or otherwise arising from injuries or alleged injuries to or death of a

person employed by the contractor or damages or alleged damages to the property.

iii. No labour below the age of eighteen years shall be employed on the work. The

Contractor shall not pay less than what is provided under the provisions of the

contract labour (Regulations and Abolition) Act, 1970 and the rules made

thereunder and as may be amended from time to time. He shall pay the required

deposit under the Act appropriate to the number of workman to be employed by

him or through sub contractor and get himself registered under the Act. He shall

produce the required Certificates to the Owner before commencement of the work.

The Owner recognises only the Contractor and not his sub contractor under the

provisions of the Act. The Contractor will have to submit daily a list of his

workforce. He will also keep the wage register at the work site or/and produce the

same to the Owner, whenever desired. A deposit may be taken by the Owner from

the Contractor to be refunded only after the Owner is satisfied that all workmen

employed by the Contractor have been fully paid for the period of work in Owner's

premises at rates equal to or better than wages provided for under the Minimum

Wages Act. The contractor shall be responsible and liable for any complaints that

may arise in this regard and the consequences thereto.

iv. The Contractor will comply with the provisions of the Employee's Provident Fund

Act and the Family Pension Act as may be applicable and as amended from time to

time.

v. The Contractor will comply with the provisions of the payment of Gratuity Act,

1972, as may be applicable and as amended from time to time.



vi. IMPLEMENTATION OF APPRENTICES ACT, 1961

The Contractor shall comply with the provisions of the Apprentices Act, 1961 and

the Rules and Orders issued thereunder from time to time. If he fails to do so, his

failure will be a breach of the contract and the Engineer-in-Charge may, at his

discretion, cancel the contract. The Contractor shall also be liable for any

pecuniary liability arising on account of any violation by him of the provision of

the Act.

vii. MODEL RULES FOR LABOUR WELFARE

The Contractor shall at his own expenses comply with or cause be complied with

Model rules for Labour Welfare as appended to those conditions or rules framed

by the Government from time to time for the protection of health and for making

sanitary arrangements for worker employed directly or indirectly on the works. In

case the contractor fails to make arrangements as aforesaid the Engineer-in-

Charge/Site-in-Charge shall be entitled to do so and recover the cost thereof from

the contractor.

6.f. DOCUMENTS CONCERNING WORKS

6.f.1. All documents including drawings, blue prints, tracings, reproducible models,

plans, specifications and copies, thereof furnished by the Owner as well as all

drawings, tracings, reproducibles, plans, specifications design calculations etc.

prepared by the contractor for the purpose of execution of works covered in or

connected with this contract shall be the property of the Owner and shall not be

used by the contractor for any other work but are to be delivered to the Owner at

the completion or otherwise of the contract.

6.f.2. The Contractor shall keep and maintain secrecy of the documents, drawings etc.

issued to him for the execution of this contract and restrict access to such

documents, drawings etc. and further the Contractor shall execute a SECRECY

agreement from each or any person employed by the Contractor having access to

such documents, drawings etc. The Contractor shall not issue drawings and

documents to any other agency or individual without the written approval by the

Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in- Charge.

6.f.3. Contractor will not give any information or document etc. concerning details of the

work to the press or a news disseminating agency without prior written approval

from Engineer-in-charge/Site-in-Charge. Contractor shall not take any pictures on

site without written approval of Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

7. PAYMENT OF CONTRACTOR'S BILLS

7.1. Payments will be made against Running Accounts bills certified by the Owner's

Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge within 15 days from the date of receipt of the

certified bill by the Disbursement Section of the Owner.



7.2. Running Account Bills and the final bill shall be submitted by the Contractor

together with the duly signed measurements sheet(s) to the Engineer-in-Charge/

Site-in-Charge of the Owner in quadruplicate for certification. The Bills shall also

be accompanied by quantity calculations in support of the quantities contained in

the bill along with cement consumption statement, actual/theoretical, wherever

applicable duly certified by the Engineer-in-Charge/ Site-in-Charge of the Owner.

7.3. All running account payments shall be regarded as on account payment(s) to be

finally adjusted against the final bill payment. Payment of Running Account Bill(s)

shall not determine or affect in any way the rights of the Owner under this Contract

to make the final adjustments of the quantities of material, measurements of work

and adjustments of amounts etc.etc. in the final bill.

7.4. The final bill shall be submitted by the Contractor within one month of the date of

completion of the work fully and completely in all respects. If the Contractor fails

to submit the final bill accordingly Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may make

the measurement and determine the total amount payable for the work carried out

by the Contractor and such a certification shall be final and binding on the

Contractor.

The Owner/Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge may take the assistance of an

outside party for taking the measurement, the expenses of which shall be payable

by the Contractor.

7.5. Payment of final bill shall be made within 45 days from the date of receipt of the

certified bill by the Disbursement Section of the owner.

7.a. MEASUREMENT OF WORKS

7.a.1. All measurements shall be in metric system. All the works will be jointly measured

by the representative of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and the Contractor

or their authorised agent progressively. Such measurement will be recorded in the

Measurement Book/Measurement Sheet by the Contractor or his authorised

representative and signed in token of acceptance by the Owner or their authorised

representative.

7.a.2. For the purpose of taking joint measurement, the Contractor/representative shall be

bound to be present whenever required by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge.

If, however, they are absent for any reasons whatsoever, the measurement will be

taken by the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge or his representative and the same

would be deemed to be correct and binding on the Contractor.

7.a.3. In case of any dispute as to the mode of measurement for any item of work, the

latest Indian Standard Specifications shall be followed. In case of any further

dispute on the same the same shall be as per the certification of an outside

qualified Engineer/ Consultant. Such a measurement shall be final and binding on

the Owner and the Contractor.



7.b. BILLING OF WORKS EXECUTED

The Contractor will submit a bill in approved proforma in quadruplicate to the

Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge of the work giving abstract and detailed

measurement for the various items executed during a month, before the expiry of

the first week of the succeeding month. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge

shall take or cause to be taken the requisite measurements for the purpose of

having the bill verified and/or checked before forwarding the same to the

disbursement office of the Owner for further action in terms of the Contract and

payment thereafter. The Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge shall verify the bills

within 7 days of submission of the Bill by the Contractor.

7.c. RETENTION MONEY

10% of the total value of the Running Account and Final Bill will be deducted and

retained by the Owner as retention money on account of any damage/defect

liability that may arise for the period covered under the defect liability period

clause of the Contract free of interest. Any damage or defect that may arise or lie

undiscovered at the time of issue of completion certificate connected in any way

with the equipment or materials supplied by contractor or in workmanship shall be

rectified or replaced by the contractor at his own expense failing which the Owner

shall be entitled to rectify the said damage/defect from the retention money. Any

excess of expenditure incurred by the Owner on account of damage or defect shall

be payable by the Contractor. The decision of the Owner in this behalf shall not be

liable to be questioned but shall be final and binding on the Contractor.

Thus, deduction towards retention money is applicable only in case of job/works

contracts (civil, mechanical, electrical, maintenance etc.) where any damage or

defect may arise in future (i.e. within 12 months from the date of completion of

job) or lie undiscovered at the time of issue of completion certificate.

7.d. STATUTORY LEVIES

7.d.1 The Contractor accepts full and exclusive liability for the payment of any and all

taxes, duties, octroi, rates, cess, levies and statutory payments payable under all or

any of the statutes etc.

Variations of taxes and duties arising out of the amendments to the Central / State

enactments, in respect of sale of goods / services covered under this bid shall be to

HPCL’s account, so long as :

• They relate to the period after the opening of the price bid, but before the

contracted completion period ( excluding permitted extensions due to delay on

account of the contractors, if any) or the actual completion period, whichever is

earlier; and



• The vendor furnishes documentary evidence of incurrence of such variations, in

addition to the invoices/documents for claiming Cenvat /Input Tax credit,

wherever applicable.

All contributions and taxes for unemployment compensation, insurance and old

age pensions or annuities now or hereafter imposed by Central or State

Governmental authorities which are imposed with respect to or covered by the

wages, salaries or other compensations paid to the persons employed by the

Contractor and the Contractor shall be responsible for the compliance with all

obligations and restrictions imposed by the Labour Law or any other law affecting

employer-employee relationship and the Contractor further agrees to comply and

to secure the compliance of all sub-contractors with all applicable Central, State,

Municipal and local laws, and regulations and requirements of any Central, State

or Local Government agency or authority.

Contractor further agrees to defend, indemnify and hold harmless from any

liability or penalty which may be imposed by the Central, State or Local

authorities by reason of any violation by Contractor or sub-contractor of such laws,

regulations or requirements and also from all claims, suits or proceedings that may

be brought against the Owner arising under, growing out of, or by reasons of the

work provided for by this contract by third parties, or by Central or State

Government authority or any administrative sub-division thereof. The Contractor

further agrees that in case any such demand is raised against the Owner, and

Owner has no way but to pay and pays/makes payment of the same, the Owner

shall have the right to deduct the same from the amounts due and payable to the

Contractor. The Contractor shall not raise any demand or dispute in respect of the

same but may have recourse to recover/receive from the concerned authorities on

the basis of the Certificate of the Owner issued in that behalf.

7.d.2. The rates quoted should be inclusive of all rates, cess, taxes and sales tax on works

contracts wherever applicable. However, wherever the sales tax on works contract

is applicable and is to be deducted at source, the same will be deducted from the

bills of the Contractor and paid to the concerned authorities. The proof of such

payments of sales tax on works contract will be furnished to the contractor.

7.d.3. Income tax will be deducted at source as per rules at prevailing rates, unless

certificate, if any, for deduction at lesser rate or nil deduction is submitted by the

Contractor from appropriate authority.

7.e. MATERIALS TO BE SUPPLIED BY CONTRACTOR

7.e.1. The Contractor shall procure and provide the whole of the materials required for

construction including tools, tackles, construction plant and equipment for the

completion and maintenance of the works except the materials viz. steel and

cement which may be agreed to be supplied as provided elsewhere in the contract.

The contractor shall make arrangement for procuring such materials and for the

transport thereof at their own cost and expenses.



7.e.2. The Owner may give necessary recommendation to the respective authority if so

desired by the Contractor but assumes no responsibility of any nature. The

Contractor shall procure materials of ISI stamp/certification and supplied by

reputed suppliers borne on DGS&D list.

7.e.3. All materials procured should meet the specifications given in the tender

document. The Engineer-in-charge may, at his discretion, ask for samples and test

certificates for any batch of any materials procured. Before procuring, the

Contractor should get the approval of Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge for any

materials to be used for the works.

7.e.4. Manufacturer's certificate shall be submitted for all materials supplied by the

Contractor. If, however, in the opinion of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge

any tests are required to be conducted on the material supplied by the Contractor,

these will be arranged by the Contractor promptly at his own cost.

7.f. MATERIALS TO BE SUPPLIED BY THE OWNER

7.f.1. Steel and Cement maybe supplied by the Owner to the contractor against payment

by Contractor from either godown or from the site or within work premises itself

and the contractor shall arrange for all transport to actual work site at no extra cost.

7.f.2. The contractor shall bear all the costs including loading and unloading, carting

from issue points to work spot storage, unloading, custody and handling and

stacking the same and return the surplus steel and cement to the Owner's storage

point after completion of job.

7.f.3. The contractor will be fully accountable for the steel and cement received from the

Owner and contractor will give acknowledgement/receipt for quantity of steel and

cement received by him each time he uplifts cement from Owner's custody.

7.f.4. For all computation purposes, the theoretical cement consumption shall be

considered as per CPWD standards.

7.f.5. Steel and Cement as received from the manufacturer/stockists will be issued to the

contractor. Theoretical weight of cement in a bag will be considered as 50 Kg.

Bags weighing upto 4% less shall be accepted by the contractor and considered as

50 Kg. per bag. Any shortage in the weight of any cement bag by more than 4%

will be to the Owner's account only when pointed out by the Contractor and

verified by Engineer-in-Charge/Site in Charge at the time of Contract or taking

delivery.

7.f.6. The contractor will be required to maintain a stock register for receipt, issuance

and consumption of steel and cement at site. Cement will be stored in a warehouse

at site. Requirement of cement on any day will be taken out of the warehouse.

Cement issued shall be regulated on the basis of FIRST RECEIPT to go as FIRST

ISSUE.



7.f.7. Empty cement bag shall be the property of the Contractor. Contractor shall be

penalised for any excess/under consumption of cement. The penal rate will be

twice the rate of issue of cement for this work.

7.f.8. All the running bills as well as the final bills will be accompanied by cement

consumption statements giving the detailed working of the cement used, cement

received and stock-on-hand.

7.f.9. The Contractor will be fully responsible for safe custody of cement once it is

received by him and during transport. Owner will not entertain any claims of the

contractor for theft, loss or damage to cement while in their custody.

7.f.10. The contractor shall not remove from the site any cement bags at any time.

7.f.11. The Contractor shall advise Engineer-in-charge/Site-in-charge in writing atleast 21

days before exhausting the Cement stocks already held by Contractor to ensure

that such delays do not lead to interruptions in the progress of work.

7.f.12. Cement shall not be supplied by the Owner for manufacturing of mosaic tiles,

precast cement jali and any other bought out items which consume cement and for

temporary works.

7.f.13. Cement in bags and in good usable condition left over after the completion of work

shall be returned by the contractor to the Owner. The Owner shall make payment

to the Contractor at the supply rate for such stocks of cement they accept and

receive. Any refused stock of cement shall be removed by the Contractor from the

site at his cost and expenses within 15 days of completion of the work.

8. PAYMENT OF CLAIMS AND DAMAGES

8.1. Should the Owner have to pay money in respect of claims or demands as aforesaid

the amount so paid and the costs incurred by the Owner shall be charged to and

paid by the Contractor and the Contractor shall not be entitled to dispute or

question the right of the Owner to make such payments notwithstanding the same

may have been without his consent or authority or in law or otherwise to the

contrary.

8.2. In every case in which by virtue of the provisions of Workmen's Compensation

Act, 1923, or other Acts, the Owner is obliged to pay Compensation to a Workman

employed by the Contractor in execution of the works, the Owner will recover

from the Contractor the amount of compensation so paid and without prejudice to

the rights of Owner under the said Act. Owner shall be at liberty to recover such

amount or any part thereof by deducting it from the security deposit or from any

sum due to the Contractor whether under this contract or otherwise. The Owner

shall not be bound to contest any claim made under Section 12 sub section (1) of

the said Act, except on the written request of the Contractor and upon his giving to

the Owner full security for all costs for which the owner might become liable in

consequence of contesting such claim.



8.a. ACTION AND COMPENSATION IN CASE OF BAD WORK

If it shall appear to the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge that any work has been

executed with bad, imperfect or unskilled workmanship, or with materials, or that

any materials or articles provided by the Contractor for execution of the work are

not of standards specified/inferior quality to that contracted for, or otherwise not in

accordance with the contract, the CONTRACTOR shall on demand in writing

from the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge or his authorised representative

specifying the work, materials or articles complained of, notwithstanding that the

same may have been inadvertently passed, certified and paid for, forthwith rectify

or remove and reconstruct the work so specified and at his own charge and cost

and expenses and in the event of failure to do so within a period of 15 days of such

intimation/ information/knowledge, the Contractor shall be liable to pay

compensation equivalent to the cost of reconstruction by the Owner. On expiry of

15 days period mentioned above, the Owner may by themselves or otherwise

rectify or remove and re-execute the work or remove and replace with others, the

materials or articles complained of as the case may be at the risk and expenses in

all respects of the Contractor. The decision of the Engineer-in- Charge/ Site-in-

Charge as to any question arising under this clause shall be final and conclusive

and shall not be raised as a dispute or shall be arbitrable.

8.b. INSPECTION AND AUDIT OF CONTRACT AND WORKS

This project is subject to inspection by various Government agencies of

Government of India. The contractor shall extend full cooperation to all the

Government and other agencies in the inspection of the works, audit of the

Contract and the documents of Contract Bills, measurements sheets etc. etc. and

examination of the records of works and make enquiries interrogation as they may

deem fit, proper and necessary. Upon inspection etc. by such agencies if it is

pointed out that the contract work has not been carried out according to the

prescribed terms and conditions as laid down in the tender documents and if any

recoveries are recommended, the same shall be recovered from the contractors

running bills/final bill/from ordered/suggested Security Deposit/retention money.

The Contractor shall not rise any dispute on any such account and the same shall

not be arbitrable.

9. CONTRACTOR TO INDEMNIFY THE OWNER

The Contractor shall indemnify the Owner and every member, officer and

employee of the Owner, also the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge and his staff

against all the actions, proceedings, claims, demands, costs, expenses, whatsoever

arising out of or in connection with the works and all actions, proceedings, claims,

demands, costs, expenses which may be made against the Owner for or in respect

of or arising out of any failure by the Contractor in the performance of his

obligations under the contract. The Contractor shall be liable for or in respect of or

in consequence of any accident or injury to any workmen or other person in the



employment of the Contractor or his sub contractor and Contractor shall indemnify

and keep indemnified the Owner against all such damages, proceedings, costs,

charges and expenses whatsoever in respect thereof or in relation thereto.

10. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES

i) In case of any delay in completion of the work beyond the CDD, the Owner shall

be entitled to be paid Liquidated Damages by the Contractor. The liquidated

damages shall be initially at the rate of 0.5% (half percent) of the total contract

value for every week of the delay subject to a maximum of 5% of the total contract

value. The liquidated damages shall be recovered by the Owner out of the amounts

payable to the Contractor or from any Bank Guarantees or Deposits furnished by

the Contractor or the Retention Money retained from the Bills of the Contractor,

either under this contract or any other contract.

ii) The Contractor shall be entitled to give an acceptable unconditional Bank

Guarantee in lieu of such a deduction if Contractor desires any decision on a

request for time extension.

iii) Once a final decision is taken on the request of the Contractor or otherwise, the LD

shall be applicable only on the basic cost of the contract and on each full

completed week(s) of delay (and for part of the week, a pro-rata LD amount shall

be applicable).

iv) This final calculation of LD shall be only on the value of the unexecuted

portion/quantity of work as on the CDD.

v) Contractor agrees with the Owner, that the above represents a genuine pre-estimate

of the damages which the Owner will suffer on account of delay in the

performance of the work by Contractor. The Contractor further agrees that the LD

amount is over and above any right which owner has to risk purchase under Clause

12.4 and any right to get the defects in the work rectified at the cost of the

contractor.

11. DEFECTS AFTER TAKING OVER OR TERMINATION OF WORK

CONTRACT BY OWNER

The Contractor shall remain responsible and liable to make good all losses or

damages that may occur/appear to the work carried out under this Contract within

a period of 12 months from date of issue of the Completion Certificate and/or the

date of Owner taking over the work, which ever is earlier. The Contractor shall

issue a Bank

Guarantee to the Owner in the sum of 10% of the work entrusted in the Contract,

from any nationalised Bank acceptable to the Owner and if however, the

Contractor fails to furnish such a Bank Guarantee the Owner shall have right to

retain the Security Deposit and Retention Money to cover the 10% of the



Guarantee amount under this clause and to return/refund the same after the expiry

of the period of 12 months without any interest thereon.

12. TERMINATION OF CONTRACT

12.1 The owner may terminate the contract at any stage of the construction for reasons

to be recorded in the letter of termination.

12.2 The Owner inter alia may terminate the Contract for any or all of the following

reasons that the contractor

a) has abandoned the work/Contract.

b) has failed to commence the works, or has without any lawful excuse under these

conditions suspended the work for 15 consecutive days.

c) has failed to remove materials from the site or to pull down and replace the work

within 15 days after receiving from the Engineer written notice that the said

materials or work were condemned and/or rejected by the Engineer under specified

conditions.

d) has neglected or failed to observe and perform all or any of the terms acts, matters

or things under this Contract to be observed and performed by the Contractor.

e) has to the detriment of good workmanship or in defiance of the Engineer's

instructions to the contrary sub-let any part of the Contract.

f) has acted in any manner to the detrimental interest, reputation, dignity, name or

prestige of the Owner.

g) has stopped attending to work without any prior notice and prior permission for a

period of 15 days.

h) has become untraceable.

i) has without authority acted in violation of the terms and conditions of this contract

and has committed breach of terms of the contract in best judgement of the owner.

j) has been declared insolvent/bankrupt.

k) in the event of sudden death of the Contractor.

12.3 The owner on termination of such contract shall have the right to appropriate the

Security Deposit, Retention Money and invoke the Bank Guarantee furnished by

the contractor and to appropriate the same towards the amounts due and payable by

the contractor as per the conditions of Contract and return to the contractor excess

money, if any, left over.

12.4 In case of Termination of the contract, Owner shall have the right to carry out the

unexecuted portion of the work either by themselves or through any other

contractor(s) at the risk and cost of the Contractor. In view of paucity of time,

Owner shall have the right to place such unexecuted portion of the work on any

nominated contractor(s). However, the overall liability of the Contractor shall be

restricted to 100 % of the total contract value.



12.5 The contractor within or at the time fixed by the Owner shall depute his authorised

representative for taking joint final measurements of the works executed thus far

and submit the final bill for the work as per joint final measurement within 15 days

of the date of joint final measurement. If the contractor fails to depute their

representative for joint measurement, the owner shall take the measurement with

their Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge or any other outside representatives. Such

a measurement shall not be questioned by the Contractor and no dispute can be

raised by the Contractor for purpose of Arbitration.

12.6 The Owner may enter upon and take possession of the works and all plant, tools,

scaffoldings, sheds, machinery, power operated tools and steel, cement and other

materials of the Contract at the site or around the site and use or employ the same

for completion of the work or employ any other contractor or other person or

persons to complete the works. The Contractor shall not in any way object or

interrupt or do any act, matter or thing to prevent or hinder such actions, other

Contractor or other persons employed for completing and finishing or using the

materials and plant for the works. When the works shall be completed or as soon

thereafter the Engineer shall give a notice in writing to the Contractor to remove

surplus materials and plant, if any, and belonging to the Contractor except as

provided elsewhere in the Contract and should the Contractor fail to do so within a

period of 15 days after receipt thereof the Owner may sell the same by public

auction and shall give credit to the contractor for the amount realised. The Owner

shall thereafter ascertain and certify in writing under his hand what (if anything)

shall be due or payable to or by the Owner for the value of the plant and materials

so taken possession and the expense or loss which the Owner shall have been put

to in procuring the works, to be so completed, and the amount if any, owing to the

Contractor and the amount which shall be so certified shall thereupon be paid by

the Owner to the Contractor or by the Contractor to the Owner, as the case may,

and the Certificate of the Owner shall be final and conclusive between the parties.

12.7 When the contract is terminated by the Owner for all or any of the reasons

mentioned above the Contractor shall not have any right to claim compensation on

account of such termination.

13. FORCE MAJEURE

13.1. Any delay in or failure of the performance of either part hereto shall not constitute

default hereunder or give rise to any claims for damage, if any, to the extent such

delays or failure of performance is caused by occurrences such as Acts of God or

an enemy, expropriation or confiscation of facilities by Government authorities,

acts of war, rebellion, sabotage or fires, floods, explosions, riots, or strikes. The

Contractor shall keep records of the circumstances referred to above and bring

these to the notice of the Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge in writing

immediately on such occurrences. The amount of time, if any, lost on any of these

counts shall not be counted for the Contract period. One decision of the Owner

arrived at after consultation with the Contractor, shall be final and binding. Such a



determined period of time be extended by the Owner to enable the Contractor to

complete the job within such extended period of time.

13.2. If Contractor is prevented or delayed from the performing any of its obligations

under this Agreement by Force Majeure, then Contractor shall notify Owner he

circumstances constituting the Force Majeure and the obligations performance of

which is thereby delayed or prevented, within seven days of the occurrence of the

events.

14. ARBITRATION

14.1 All disputes and differences of whatsoever nature, whether existing or which shall

at any time arise between the parties hereto touching or concerning the agreement,

meaning, operation or effect thereof or to the rights and liabilities of the parties or

arising out of or in relation thereto whether during or after completion of the

contract or whether before after determination, foreclosure, termination or breach

of the agreement (other than those in respect of which the decision of any person

is, by the contract, expressed to be final and binding) shall, after written notice by

either party to the agreement to the other of them and to the Appointing Authority

hereinafter mentioned, be referred for adjudication to the Sole Arbitrator to be

appointed as hereinafter provided.

14.2 The appointing authority shall either himself act as the Sole Arbitrator or nominate

some officer/retired officer of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (referred

to as owner or HPCL) or any other Government Company, or any retired officer of

the Central Government not below the rank of a Director, to act as the Sole

Arbitrator to adjudicate the disputes and differences between the parties. The

contractor/vendor shall not be entitled to raise any objection to the appointment of

such person as the Sole Arbitrator on the ground that the said person is/was an

officer and/or shareholder of the owner, another Govt. Company or the Central

Government or that he/she has to deal or had dealt with the matter to which the

contract relates or that in the course of his/her duties, he/she has/had expressed

views on all or any of the matters in dispute or difference.

14.3 In the event of the Arbitrator to whom the matter is referred to, does not accept the

appointment, or is unable or unwilling to act or resigns or vacates his office for any

reasons whatsoever, the Appointing Authority aforesaid, shall nominate another

person as aforesaid, to act as the Sole Arbitrator.

14.4 Such another person nominated as the Sole Arbitrator shall be entitled to proceed

with the arbitration from the stage at which it was left by his predecessor. It is

expressly agreed between the parties that no person other than the Appointing

Authority or a person nominated by the Appointing Authority as aforesaid, shall

act as an Arbitrator. The failure on the part of the Appointing Authority to make an

appointment on time shall only give rise to a right to a Contractor to get such an

appointment made and not to have any other person appointed as the Sole

Arbitrator.



14.5 The Award of the Sole Arbitrator shall be final and binding on the parties to the

Agreement.

14.6 The work under the Contract shall, however, continue during the Arbitration

proceedings and no payment due or payable to the concerned party shall be

withheld (except to the extent disputed) on account of initiation, commencement or

pendency of such proceedings.

14.7 The Arbitrator may give a composite or separate Award(s) in respect of each

dispute or difference referred to him and may also make interim award(s) if

necessary.

14.8 The fees of the Arbitrator and expenses of arbitration, if any, shall be borne

equally by the parties unless the Sole Arbitrator otherwise directs in his award with

reasons. The Award of the Sole Arbitrator shall be final and binding on both the

parties.

14.9 Subject to the aforesaid, the provisions of the Arbitration and Conciliation Act,

1996 or any statutory modification or re-enactment thereof and the rules made

thereunder, shall apply to the Arbitration proceedings under this Clause.

14.10 The Contract shall be governed by and constructed according to the laws in force

in India. The parties hereby submit to the exclusive jurisdiction of the Courts

situated at _______ (say Mumbai*) for all purposes. The Arbitration shall be held

at ________ say Mumbai*) and conducted in English language.

14.11 The Appointing Authority is the Functional Director of Hindustan Petroleum

Corporation Limited.

15. GENERAL

15.1. Materials required for the works whether brought by the or supplied by the Owner

hall be stored by the contractor only at places approved by Engineer-in-

Charge/Site-in-Charge. Storage and safe custody of the material shall be the

responsibility of the Contractor.

15.2. Owner and/or Engineer-in-Charge/Site-in-Charge connected with the contract,

shall be entitled at any time to inspect and examine any materials intended to be

used in or on the works, either on the site or at factory or workshop or at other

place(s) manufactured or at any places where these are laying or from which these

are being obtained and the contractor shall give facilities as may be required for

such inspection and examination.

15.3. In case of any class of work for which there is no such specification supplied by

the owner as is mentioned in the tender documents, such work shall be carried out

in accordance with Indian Standard Specifications and if the Indian Standard

Specifications do not cover the same the work should be carried out as per



standard Engineering practice subject to the approval of the Engineer-in-

Charge/Site-in-Charge.

15.4. Should the work be suspended by reason of rain, strike, lockouts or other cause the

contractor shall take all precautions necessary for the protection of the work and at

his own expense shall make good any damages arising from any of these causes.

15.5 The contractor shall cover up and protect from injury from any cause all new work

also for supplying all temporary doors, protection to windows and any other

requisite protection for the whole of the works executed whether by himself or

special tradesmen or sub-contractors and any damage caused must be made good

by the contractors at his own expense.

15.6 If the contractor has quoted the items under the deemed exports, then it will be the

responsibility of the contractor to get all the benefits under deemed exports from

the Government. The Owner’s responsibility shall only be limited to the issuance

of required certificates. The quotation will be unconditional and phrases like

“subject to availability of deemed exports benefit” etc. will not find place in it.

16. Integrity Pact :

Effective 1st September, 2007, all tenders and contracts shall comply with the

requirements of the Integrity Pact (IP) if the value of such tenders or contracts

exceed Rs.1 crore. Failure to sign the Integrity Pact shall lead to outright rejection

of bid.



Annexure -16

AGREEMENT No. Dated

To,


Sub: Purchase of Bidding Documents

Ref. Tender no.

HPCL and the Bidder agree that the Notice Inviting Tender (NIT) is an offer made on the

condition that the bidder will sign the Integrity Pact and the Bid would be kept open in its

original form without variation or modification for a period of (state the number of days

from the last date for the receipt of tenders stated in the NIT) ………. days and the

making of the bid shall be regarded as an unconditional and absolute acceptance of this

condition of the NIT.

We confirm acceptance and compliance with the Integrity Pact in letter and spirit. We

further agree that the contract consisting of the above conditions of NIT as the offer and

the submission of Bid as the Acceptance shall be separate and distinct from the contract

which will come into existence when bid is finally accepted by HPCL.

The consideration for this separate initial contract preceding the main contract is that

HPCL is not agreeable to sell the NIT to the Bidder and to consider the bid to be made

except on the

condition that the bid shall be kept open for ……… days after the last date fixed for the

receipt of the bids and the Bidder desires to make a bid on this condition and after entering

into this separate initial contract with HPCL.

HPCL promises to consider the bid on this condition and the Bidder agrees to keep the bid

open for the required period. These reciprocal promises form the consideration for this

separate initial contract between the parties.

If Bidder fails to honour the above terms and conditions , HPCLshall have unqualified ,

absolute and unfettered right to encash / forfeit the bid security submitted in this behalf.

Yours faithfully, Yours faithfully

(BIDDER) (PURCHASER)

(One copy of this agreement duly signed must be returned alongwith offer).



Annexure - 17

(To be executed on plain paper and applicable for all tenders of value above Rs.1 crore)

INTEGRITY PACT

Between

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) hereinafter referred to as “The

Principal”,

and

…………………………………………. hereinafter referred to as “The

Bidder/Contractor”

Preamble

The Principal intends to award, under laid down organization procedures, contract/s for

………………………………………… The Principle values full compliance with all

relevant laws and regulations, and the principles of economic use of resources, and of

fairness and transparency in its relations with its Bidders/s and Contractor/s.

In order to achieve these goals, the Principal cooperates with the renowned international

Non-Governmental Organisation “Transparency International” (TI). Following TI’s

national and international experience, the Principal will appoint an external independent

Monitor who will monitor the tender process and the execution of the contract for

compliance with the principles mentioned above.

Section 1 – Commitments of the Principal

(1) The Principal commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent corruption

and to observe the following principles:

1. No employee of the Principal, personally or through family members, will in

connection with the tender for, or the execution of a contract, demand, take a

promise for or accept, for him/herself or third person, any material or immaterial

benefit which he/she is not legally entitled to.

2. The principal will, during the tender process treat all Bidders with equity and

reason. The Principal will in particular, before and during the tender process,

provide to all Bidders the same information and will not provide to any Bidder

confidential / additional information through which the Bidder could obtain an

advantage in relation to the tender process or the contract execution.

3. The principal will exclude from the process all known prejudiced persons.



(2) If the Principal obtains information on the conduct of any of its employees which

is a criminal offence under the relevant Anti-Corruption Laws of India, or if there

be a substantive suspicion in this regard, the Principal will inform its Vigilance

Office and in addition can initiate disciplinary actions.

Section 2 – Commitments of the Bidder / Contractor

(1) The Bidder / Contractor commits itself to take all measures necessary to prevent

corruption. He commits himself to observe the following principles during his

participation in the tender process and during the contract execution.

1. The Bidder / Contractor will not, directly or through any other person or firm,

offer, promise or give to any of the Principal’s employees involved in the tender

process or the execution of the contract or to any third person any material or

immaterial benefit which he/she is not legally entitled to, in order to obtain in

exchange any advantage of any kind whatsoever during the tender process or

during the execution of the contract.

2. The Bidder / Contractor will not enter with other Bidders into any undisclosed

agreement or understanding, whether formal or informal. This applies in particular

to prices, specifications, certifications, subsidiary contracts, submission or non-

submission of bids or any other actions to restrict competitiveness or to introduce

cartelisation in the bidding process.

3. The Bidder / Contractor will not commit any offence under the relevant Anti-

corruption Laws of India; further the Bidder / Contractor will not use improperly,

for purposes of competition or personal gain, or pass on to others, any information

or document provided by the Principal as part of the business relationship,

regarding plans, technical proposals and business details, including information

contained or transmitted electronically.

4. The Bidder / Contractor will, when presenting his bid, disclose any and all

payment he has made, is committed to or intends to make to agents, brokers or any

other intermediaries in connection with the award of the contract.

(2) The Bidder / Contractor will not instigate third persons to commit offences

outlined above or be an accessory to such offences.

Section 3-Disqualification from tender process and exclusion from future contracts

If the Bidder, before contract award has committed a transgression through a

violation of Section 2 or in any other form such as to put his reliability or

credibility as Bidder into question, the Principal is entitled to disqualify the Bidder

from the tender process or to terminate the contract, if already signed, for such

reason.

(1) If the Bidder/Contractor has committed a transgression through a violation of

Section 2 such as to put his reliability or credibility into question, the Principal is



entitled also to exclude the Bidder / Contractor from future contract award

processes. The imposition and duration of the exclusion will be determined by the

severity of the transgression. The severity will be determined by the circumstances

of the case, in particular the number of transgressions, the position of the

transgressors within the company hierarchy of the Bidder and the amount of the

damage. The exclusion will be imposed for a minimum of 6 months and maximum

of 3 years.

(2) A transgression is considered to have occurred if the Principal after due

consideration of the available evidence, concludes that no reasonables doubt is

possible.

(3) The Bidder accepts and undertakes to respect and uphold the Principal’s absolute

right to resort to and impose such exclusion and further accepts and undertakes not

to challenge or question such exclusion on any ground, including the lack of any

hearing before the decision to resort to such exclusion is taken. This undertaking is

given freely and after obtaining independent legal advice.

(4) If the Bidder / Contractor can prove that he has restored / recouped the damage

caused by him and has installed a suitable corruption prevention system, the

Principal may revoke the exclusion prematurely.

Section 4 – Compensation for Damages

(1) If the Principal has disqualified the Bidder from the tender process prior to the

award according to Section 3, the Principal is entitled to demand and recover from

the Bidder liquidated damages equivalent to Earnest Money Deposit/Bid Security.

(2) If the Principal has terminated the contract according to Section 3, or if the

Principle is entitled to terminate the contract according to Section 3, the Principal

shall be entitled to demand and recover from the Contractor liquidated damages

equivalent to Security Deposit / Performance Bank Guarantee.

(3) The bidder agrees and undertakes to pay the said amounts without protest or demur

subject only to condition that if the Bidder / Contractor can prove and establish

that the exclusion of the Bidder from the tender process or the termination of the

contract after the contract award has caused no damage or less damage than the

amount of the liquidated damages, the Bidder / Contractor shall compensate the

Principal only to the extent of the damage in the amount proved.

Section 5 – Previous Transgression

(1) The Bidder declares that no previous transgression occurred in the last 3 years with

any other Company in any country conforming to the TI approach or with any

other Public Sector Enterprise in India that could justify his exclusion from the

tender process.



(2) If the Bidder makes incorrect statement on this subject, he can be disqualified from

the tender process or the contract, if already awarded, can be terminated for such

reason.

Section 6 – Equal treatment of all Bidders / Contractors / Subcontractors

(1) The Bidder / Contractor undertakes to demand from all subcontractors a

commitment in conformity with this Integrity Pact, and to submit it to the Principal

before contract signing.

(2) The Principal will enter into agreements with identical conditions as this one with

all

Bidders, Contractors and Subcontractors.

(3) The Principal will disqualify from the tender process all bidders who do not sign

this Pact or violate its provisions.

Section 7 – Criminal charges against violating Bidders/Contractors/Subcontractors

If the Principal obtains knowledge of conduct of a Bidder, Contractor or

Subcontractor, or of an employee or a representative or an associate of a Bidder,

Contractor or Subcontractor which constitutes corruption, or if the Principal has

substantive suspicion in this regard, the Principal will inform the Vigilance Office.

Section 8 – External Independent Monitor / Monitors (three in number depending on

the size of the contract) (to be decided by the Chairperson of the Principal)

(1) The Principal appoints competent and credible external independent Monitor for

this Pact. The task of the Monitor is to review independently and objectively,

whether and to what extent the parties comply with the obligations under this

agreement.

(2) The Monitor is not subject to instructions by the representatives of the parties and

performs his functions neutrally and independently. He reports to the Chairperson

of the Board of the Principal.

(3) The Contractors accepts that the Monitor has the right to access without restriction

to all Project documentation of the Principal including that provided by the

Contractor. The Contractor will also grant the Monitor, upon his request and

demonstration of a valid interest, unrestricted and unconditional access to this

project documentation. The same is applicable to Subcontractors. The Monitor is

under contractual obligation to treat the information and documents of the Bidder /

Contractor / Subcontractor with confidentiality.

(4) The Principal will provide to the Monitor sufficient information about all meetings

among the parties related to the Project provided such meetings could have an

impact on the contractual relations between the Principal and the Contractor. The

parties offer to the Monitor the option to participate in such meetings.



(5) As soon as the Monitor notices, or believes to notice, a violation of this agreement,

he will so inform the Management of the Principal and request the Management to

discontinue or heal the violation, or to take other relevant action. The Monitor can

in this regard submit non-binding recommendation. Beyond this, the Monitor has

no right to demand from the parties that they act in a specific manner, refrain from

action or tolerate action. However, the Independent External Monitor shall give an

opportunity to the bidder / contractor to present its case before making its

recommendations to the Principal.

(6) The Monitor will submit a written report to the Chairperson of the Board of the

Principal within 8 to 10 weeks from the date of reference or intimation to him by

the ‘Principal’ and, should the occasion arise, submit proposals for correcting

problematic situations.

(7) Monitor shall be entitled to compensation on the same terms as being extended to /

provided to Outside Expert Committee members / Chairman as prevailing with

Principal.

(8) If the Monitor has reported to the Chairperson of the Board a substantiated

suspicion of an offence under relevant Anti-Corruption Laws of India, and the

Chairperson has not, within reasonable time, taken visible action to proceed

against such offence or reported it to the Vigilance Office, the Monitor may also

transmit this information directly to the Central Vigilance Commissioner,

Government of India.

(9) The word ‘Monitor’ would include both singular and plural.

Section 9 – Pact Duration

This Pact begins when both parties have legally signed it. It expires for the

Contractor 12 months after the last payment under the respective contract, and for

all other Bidders 6 months after the contract has been awarded.

If any claim is made / lodged during this time, the same shall be binding and

continue to be valid despite the lapse of this pact as specified above, unless it is

discharged / determined by Chairperson of the Principal.

Section 10 – Other provisions

(1) This agreement is subject to Indian Law. Place of performance and jurisdiction is

the Registered Office of the Principal, i.e. Mumbai. The Arbitration clause

provided in the main tender document / contract shall not be applicable for any

issue / dispute arising under Integrity Pact.

(2) Changes and supplements as well as termination notices need to be made in

writing. Side agreements have not been made.



(3) If the Contractor is a partnership or a consortium, this agreement must be signed

by all partners or consortium members.

(4) Should one or several provisions of this agreement turn out to be invalid, the

remainder of this agreement remains valid. In this case, the parties will strive to

come to an agreement to their original intentions.

For the Principal For the Bidder/Contractor

Place……………………………. Witness 1:

……………………

Date……………………………… Witness

2:…………………….



SECTION - 5

SPECIAL CONDITIONS

OF CONTRACT



SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

INDEX

ARTICLE SR. NO. DESCRIPTION

1.0 BRIEF SCOPE OF WORK

2.0 BID PRICES

3.0 COMPLETION PERIOD

4.0 BID SECURITY

5.0 PAYMENT TERMS

6.0 SPECIAL NOTES



SPECIAL CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

The following articles shall supplement the instructions to Bidders and General Terms and

Conditions of Works Contract. In case of any conflict between General Terms and

conditions of Works Contract and Special Conditions of Contract, the latter shall prevail

to the extent applicable.

1.0 BRIEF SCOPE OF WORK

Bidder’s scope of work shall be in strict compliance with the enclosed Technical

Specification.

2.0 BID PRICES

2.1 Prices shall be furnished strictly in the appropriate price Schedule format enclosed

with the bid document (Section - 11).

2.2 Quoted prices shall remain firm fixed, and binding without any escalation

whatsoever till complete execution of order irrespective of any change in cost of

raw materials, labour, statutory or otherwise. Regarding quantity variation

provisions as contained in clause 3.6 – Section 4 – General Terms and Conditions

of Contract shall govern.

2.3 Quoted prices shall be inclusive of all testing and inspection requirements

(including stage wise and final inspection by Owner/ Owner’s Consultant for

which no extra charges shall be paid) as specified in the bid document. However,

Personal and incidental expenses of Owner/ Owner’s Consultant’s inspectors are

not in vendor’s scope.

2.4 Bidder’s quoted prices shall be deemed to include entire scope of work and all

obligations and responsibilities to be carried out/ executed by the Bidder as per

terms of bid document.

2.5 Quoted prices must be net of discount, if any.

2.6 Owner reserves the right, at the time of award of contract, to increase or decrease

the quantity of goods as specified in the bid document without any change in the

unit prices (as well as lumpsum prices, if any) and other terms and conditions.

Bidder’s quoted prices shall be valid for such quantity variation.

2.6A. Payment shall be made based on actual quantities executed at Site.

2.7 TAXES & DUTIES:

Refer clause 7.d – General Terms and conditions of Works Contract.



2.7.1 TAXES & DUTIES IN FOREIGN COUNTRIES

The Contractor shall accept full and exclusive liability at his own cost for the

payment of any and all taxes, duties, cesses and levies howsoever designated, as

are payable to any government , local or statutory authority in any country other

than India as are now in force or as are herein after imposed , increased or

modified and as payable by Contractor , his agents, sub-contractors and its/their

respective employees for or in relation to this performance of this contract. The

contractor shall be deemed to have been fully informed with respect to all such

liabilities and considered and included the same in its bid and the price quoted

shall not be varied in any way on this account.

2.8 CUSTOM DUTY

The Contractor shall include custom duties for all materials and consumables

envisaged to be imported for incorporation in the work. It shall be clearly

understood by the Contractor that custom duty shall neither be paid nor reimbursed

by Owner. Contractors prices shall be deemed to include custom duty as

applicable. Contractor shall be fully responsible for port clearance including

stevedoring, handling, unloading, loading, storage, inland transportation and

receipt of materials at site, etc. and cost thereof shall be included in the contract

price.

2.9 CUSTOM DUTY ON CONSTRUCTION EQUIPMENTS

2.9.1 Contractor is liable to pay custom duty on the equipment brought into India for

executing the project. The Contractor shall be fully liable for observing all the

formalities in this regard as well as to pay the custom duty chargeable on the

equipment including any deposit payable for such purposes. No adjustment in

contract rates is permissible for any change in duty drawback applicable in respect of

equipment and machinery brought into India for the use in the project and for re-

export of equipment and machinery on completion of the works covered under this

contract.

2.9.2 If the Custom authorities require the Contractor to furnish a bond to secure

payment of any custom duty in respect of and import and that such Bond shall be

furnished by Owner , the Owner at the request of Contractor furnish such bond

against the Contractor furnishing a bank guarantee to Owner of the like amount in

the form and from a Bank in India approved by the Owner.

2.9.3 If for any reason the Owner is required by the Custom authorities to pay any

Custom duty due to the importation or retention by the Contractor of any imports,

the Contractor shall forthwith on demand by the Owner pay the same to Owner

with the right with the Owner ( without prejudice to any other mode of recovery or

right or Owner ) to deduct the same from the on account and other payments due/

or becoming due or payable to the Contractor from time to time. The payments

under such a case shall be subject to submission of Bank Guarantee from a bank



approved by Owner , by the Contractor in favour of Owner for an amount

equivalent to amount of Custom duty.

3.0 COMPLETION PERIOD:

3.1 The completion schedule shall be as stipulated in Section - 10 of bid document.

3.2 It may be noted that bids offering completion period beyond the completion

schedule as specified in Section - 10 will be loaded for evaluation as per the

loading criteria

3.3 The completion period shall be reckoned from the date of Fax of Acceptance.

3.4 After award of order, Vendor may improve the completion schedule when

compared to that stipulated under Section-10 of bid document.

4.0 BID SECURITY

4.1 The Bidder shall furnish, as part of his bid, a bid security in original for the amount

specified in the bid.

4.2 The bid security is required to protect the Owner against the risk of Bidder’s

conduct, which would warrant the security’s forfeiture.

4.3 The Bid Security shall be in the form of an irrevocable Bank Guarantee (in the

format at Annexure-A of Section-7) issued by any Indian Scheduled Bank (other

than Co-operative Bank). . Bid Security shall be issued in favour of “M/s

Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited”.

4.4 Unsuccessful Bidder’s bid security will be discharged/returned as promptly as

possible, but not later than 60 days after the expiry of the period of bid validity

prescribed by the Owner.

4.5 The successful Bidder’s bid security will be discharged upon the Bidder’s

accepting the Contract/ Purchase Order, and furnishing the Security Deposit.

4.6 The bid security may be forfeited:

a) If a Bidder withdraws his bid during the period of bid validity

Or

b) In the case of a successful Bidder, if the Bidder fails or refuses to:

i) Accept the Purchase Order in accordance with agreed terms and conditions.

ii) Furnish security deposit as per bid document / purchase Order.

iii) If a Bidder changes the proposed manufacturer after submission of Bid.



iv) Accept arithmetical corrections to his bid as specified in clause no. 18.2 of

Instructions to bidder.

4.7 Bid Security should be in favour of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited

(HPCL) and addressed to HPCL. However, original Bid Security should be

enclosed separately in a sealed cover and submitted along with the bid. Bid

Security must indicate the Bid Document number and the item for which the

Bidder is quoting. This is essential to have proper correlation at a later date. The

Bid Security shall be strictly in the form provided in the bid document.

4.8 Central Public Sector Undertaking of Govt. Of India are exempted from furnishing

the bid security. Firms registered with NSIC are also exempted from furnishing bid

security, provided they are registered for the tendered items and up to the monetary

limit they intend to quote. Provided further that they submit a copy of the current

and valid registration certificate for the quoted item and monetary value along with

their bid(s). Owner reserves right to verify the registration certificate provided,

with relevant authorities.

5.0 PAYMENT TERMS

5.1 Following payments shall be made to the Contractor against running bills subject to

the rate awarded to him and clause 7c regarding retention money as per the General

Terms and Conditions.

5.1.1 Equipment

On delivery of material :

5.1.1.1 80% of the supply price including all taxes, levies & freight etc., will be paid on

prorata basis as per approved billing schedule against receipt of material at site and

upon submission of following documents:

- Copies of invoices showing goods description, quantity, unit price and total

amount.

- Railway receipt/ lorry receipt/ delivery of challan duly acknolwedged by the

Consignee.

- Manufacturer’s guarantee certificate.

- Inspection certificate and despatch clearance issued by the nominated inspection

agency and supplier’s factory inspection report.

5.1.1.2 10% of the supply price including taxes, duties & levies, etc., shall be payable on

completion of erection and successful commissioning of individual terminals and

certification of the same by site engineer. However, if commissioning is delayed by

more than 3 months from the date of completion of cold trial run (to be certified by

HPCL), or scheduled completion period whichever occurs later, due to non

availability of product / reasons attributable to HPCL, the above payment shall be

released against BG of equal amount valid till the revised anticipated commissioning

period.



5.1.1.3 Last 10% of the supply price shall be paid on stabilisation of system and on and

satisfactory performance of the system for a period of 3 months after

commissioning and on acceptance individual terminals by owner. However, if

commissioning is delayed by more 9 months from the date of completion of cold

trial run (to be certified by HPCL) or scheduled completion period whichever

occurs later, due to non availability of product / reasons attributable to HPCL, the

above payment shall be released against BG of equal amount valid till the revised

anticipated stabilization period. This shall not relieve the vendor to conduct SAT

and stabilization of system thereafter after the receipt of product.

5.1.2 For the Price component of erection:

5.1.2.1 80% of the erection price will be paid progressively on prorata basis on physical

progress of work certified by Site Engineer of OWNER as per the approved billing

schedule and upon submission of the following documents :

- Copies of invocies

- Copy of certified progress of work

- Proof of payment of ESI and deposition of EPF etc.,

- Wage Sheet

- Certified Time Sheet

5.1.2.2 10% of erection price shall be payable on successful completion of erection,

successful commissioning of terminal and certification of the same by Site Engineer.

However, if commissioning is delayed by more than 3 months from the date of

completion of cold trial run (to be certified by HPCL), or scheduled completion

period whichever occurs later, due to non availability of product / reasons attributable

to HPCL, the above payment shall be released against BG of equal amount valid till

the revised anticipated commissioning period.

5.1.2.3 Last 10% of the erection price shall be paid on stabilisation of system and on and

satisfactory performance of the system for a period of 3 months after

commissioning and on acceptance individual terminals by HPCL. However, if

commissioning is delayed by more 9 months from the date of completion of cold

trial run (to be certified by HPCL) or scheduled completion period whichever

occurs later, due to non availability of product / reasons attributable to HPCL, the

above payment shall be released against BG of equal amount valid till the revised

anticipated stabilization period. This shall not relieve the vendor to conduct SAT

and stabilization of system thereafter after the receipt of product.

5.2 Annual Maintenance Contract (for 5 years)

5.2.1 100% of total charges towards maintenance shall be paid at the end of each year

of maintenance against submission of pre-receipted invoice and necessary

certification by HPCL.



5.2.2 The BG shall be submitted one month before the end of warranty period for full

AMC value. However the BG value shall be reduced each year according to the

balance AMC amount and accordingly BG shall be submitted.

Notes

(i) In line with clause 11 of General Terms and Conditions, Contractor shall furnish a

Performance bank guarantee from any Nationalised bank for the value of 10% of

the work entrusted within a period of 12 months from the date of issue of

completion certificate. The bank guarantee shall be valid till the end of the

warranty period. If however the contractor fails to provide such a bank guarantee

owner shall have the right to retain the Security deposit and Retention money to

cover the 10% of guarantee amount and to return / refund the same after the expiry

of the warranty period.

6.0 SPECIAL NOTES

6.1 The Contractor has to make his own arrangement for both construction water and

drinking water. Owner does not undertake to supply water to Contractor.

6.2 Electric power required for the construction work shall be arranged by the

Contractor. The Owner does not undertake to supply Electricity to the Contractor.

6.3 The rates quoted in the tender shall be inclusive of all existing taxes , duties like

Excise duty, Sales tax, TOT, Tax on works contract, service tax, fees, levies, etc.

as levied in connection with the contract work and shall be borne and paid by the

contractor . Any statutory variations in the above and imposition of new taxes

during the execution within the contract period shall also be borne by the

Contractor. Tax on works contract shall be deducted at source as per Govt

regulations.

6.4 The rates quoted in the tender shall include all charges for cleaning of site before

commencement as well as after completion , water , electric consumption ,

scaffolding, centering, staging, planking, timbering, and pumping out water

including fencing, plant and equipment storage sheds, watching and lighting by

night as well as day, temporary plumbing and electric supply, and the

contractor shall as occasion shall require or when ordered to do so, reinstate and

make good, all matters and things disturbed during the execution of the work, to

the satisfaction of the Owner. The rates quoted shall be deemed to be for the

finished work to be measured at site.

6.5 Unless otherwise stated the tender is on item rate basis. The quantities in the

Schedule of Quantities approximately indicates the total extent of work.

6.6 The successful tenderer shall make his own arrangement to obtain all materials

required for the work including steel and cement.



6.7 If the contract work or any portion thereof at any time be found defective or fails

to fulfill the requirements , Owner shall give Contractor notice in writing setting

forth particulars of such defects or failure and contractor shall forthwith make

good such defects or replace or alter to make it comply with the requirements. Any

materials , equipments, etc. brought to site and found to be not in accordance with

the specification shall be rejected and the Contractor shall remove the materials

from the site within the time specified by the Owner. The contractor shall not be

entitled for any extension of time or extra cost for rejection.

6.8 The contractor shall strictly follow the safety code and also the instructions issued

by the Safety department from time to time. Before starting the work the contractor

shall meet the Safety Engineer and get himself familiar with the safety measures to

be taken during execution of the job. The contractor shall be personally responsible

for the safety of his workmen and shall be liable for prosecution in case of any

accident.

6.9 All statutory approvals as required including permanent power supply, road

cutting, forest clearance, panchayat / municipality clearance , etc. shall be taken

care by the tenderer. Owner may submit necessary signed papers as required for

such clearance.

6.10 The Contract will be operated on item rate basis and the rates shall include all

taxes, duties and other costs for the defined scope of work.

7.0 In partial modification of clause No.11 and 5n of GCC the period of warranty shall

be 24 months from the date of acceptance of the system after stabilisation for each

terminal separately. During warranty period the contractor shall be liable to

replace/ rectify any item / equipment found defective. All spares and consumables

required during the warranty period shall be under the scope of the contractor.

8.0 Evaluation of Bids – The offer will be evaluated together with spares and AMC

prices. However HPCL reserves the right to award the contract for spares as well

as AMC later but before the expiry of warranty period. Tenderer shall keep the

prices of spares and AMC firm and binding till the expiry of the warranty period.

Bidders to quote basic rates for AMC and applicable Service Tax shall be

reimbursed on actuals.



SECTION – 6

PROFORMA

1. Annexure-A - EMD

2. Annexure-B - Contract Performance Bank Guarantee (CPBG)

3. Annexure-C: -Letter of Authority for attending Pre-Bid Meeting,

Unpriced and Priced Bid Opening.

4. Annexure-D - Loading Criteria



ANNEXURE-A

(SPECIMEN)

BANK GUARANTEE IN LIEU OF EARNEST MONEY

(On Non-Judicial stamp paper of appropriate value)

TO : Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited

(Address as applicable)

IN CONSIDERATION OF MESSRS. HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION

LIMITED a Government of India Company registered under the Companies Act, 1956,

having its registered office at 17, Jamshedji Tata Road, Bombay-20 (hereinafter called

"The Corporation" which expression shall include its successor in business and assigns)

issued a tender on Messrs. ................................................ a partnership firm/sole proprietor

business/a company registered under the Companies Act, 1956 having its office at

(hereinafter called "the Tenderer" which expression shall include its executors,

administrators and assigns) against Tender no............ dated .................... (hereinafter

called "the tender" which expression shall include any amendments/ alterations to "the

tender" issued by "the Corporation") for the supply of goods to/execution of services for

"the Corporation" and "the Corporation" having agreed not to insist upon immediate

payment of Earnest Money for the fulfillment of the said tender in terms thereof on

production of an acceptable Bank Guarantee for an amount of Rs....... (Rupees

...........................only).

1. We, ................................... Bank having office at .....................................................

Bombay (hereinafter referred to as "the Bank" which expression shall include its

successors and assigns) at the request and on behalf of "the Tenderer" hereby agree

to pay to the Corporation without any demur on first demand an amount not

exceeding Rs...........(Rupees................................ only) against any loss or damage,

costs, charges and expenses caused to or suffered by "the Corporation" by reason

of non performance and fulfillment or for any breach on the part of "the Tenderer"

of any of the terms and conditions of the said "tender".

2. We, ........................................ Bank further agree that "the Corporation" shall be

sole Judge whether the said "Tenderer" has failed to perform or fulfill the said

"tender" in terms thereof or committed breach of any of the terms and conditions

of "the order" and the extent of loss, damage, cost, charges and expenses suffered

or incurred or would be suffered or incurred by "the Corporation" on account

thereof and we waive in favour of "the Corporation" all the rights and defences to

which we as guarantors and/or "the Tenderer" may be entitled to.

3. We, ................................. Bank further agree that the amount demanded by "the

Corporation" as such shall be final and binding on "the Bank" as to "the Bank" 's

liability to pay and the amount demanded and "the Bank" to undertake to pay "the

Corporation" the amount so demanded on first demand and without any demur

notwithstanding any dispute raised by "the Tenderer" or any suit or other legal

proceedings including arbitration pending before any court, tribunal or arbitrator



relating thereto, our liability under this guarantee being absolute and

unconditional.

4. We, ....................................... Bank further agree with "the Corporation" that "the

Corporation" shall have the fullest liberty without our consent and without

affecting in any manner our obligations hereunder to vary any of the terms and

conditions of the said "tender"/or to extend time of performance by "the Tenderer"

from time to time or to postpone for any time to time any of the powers exercisable

by "the Corporation" against "the Tenderer" and to forbear to enforce any of the

terms and conditions relating to "the tender" and we shall not be relieved from our

liability by reason of any such variation or extension being granted to "the

Tenderer" or for any forbearance, act or omission on the part of "the Corporation"

or any indulgence by "the Corporation" to "the tenderer" or by any such matter or

things whatsoever which under the law relating to sureties would but for this

provision have the effect of relieving us.

5. NOTWITHSTANDING anything hereinbefore contained, our liability under this

Guarantee is restricted to Rs. ......... (Rupees....................................... only). Our

liability under this guarantee shall remain in force until expiration of six months

from the due date of opening of the said "tender" plus two months as claim period.

Unless a demand or claim under this guarantee is made on us in writing within said

period, that is, on or before ............................ all rights of "the Corporation" under

the said guarantee shall be forfeited and we shall be relieved and discharged from

all liabilities thereunder.

6. We, ........................................ Bank further undertake not to revoke this guarantee

during its currency except with the previous consent of "the Corporation" in

Writing.

7. We, ......................................... Bank lastly agree that "the Bank" 's liability under

this guarantee shall not be affected by any change in the constitution of "the

Tenderer".

8. "The Bank" has power to issue this guarantee in favour of "the Corporation" in

terms of the documents and/or the Agreement/Contract or MOU entered into

between "the Tenderer" and "the Bank" in this regard.

THE CONDITIONS of this obligation are:

(i) If the bidder withdraws his bid during the period of Validity, or

(ii) If the Bidder, having been notified of the acceptance of his bid by the OWNER

during the period of Bid Validity;

A) Fails or refuses to accept the Work Order or

B) Fails or refuses to furnish the Security Deposit in accordance with the

General Conditions of Contract or



IN WITNESS WHEREOF the Bank has executed this document on this ..........................

day of ......................

For ........................ Bank

(by its constituted attorney)

(Signature of a person authorised

to sign on behalf of "the Bank")



ANNEXURE-B

PROFORMA OF PERFORMANCE BANK GUARANTEE

To

Hindustan Petroleum corporation Ltd.

17. Jamshedji Tata Road,

P.O. Box 11041

Mumbai - 400 020

Dear Sirs,

In consideration of the Hindustan Petroleum Corporation ltd. (hereinafter called

'The Company' which expression Shall include. its successors and assigns) having

awarded to M/s.(Name)_______________(constitution)______address)__________

(hereinafter reffered to as "'The Contractor" which expression shall wherever the

subject or context so permits include its successors and assigns) a Works contract in

terms inter alia, of the Company(s) letter No. _____Dated____and the General

Conditions of Contract / Special Conditions of Contract of the Company and upon

the condition of Contractor furnishing security for the performance of the

Contractors obligations and / or discharge of the Contractors liability under and/or

in connection with the said Works contract up to a sum of in (in figures)(In

words)_________ Only amounting to 10% (ten percent) of the total contract value.

We, (name)_________(constitution).....................(hereinafter called "'The Bank” which

expression shall include its "Successors and assigns) hereby jointly and severally

undertake and guarantee to payment to the Company In (currency) forthwith on demand in

writing and without protest or demur of any and all moneys anywise payable by the

Contractor to the Company under, in respect of or in connection with the said works

contract inclusive of all the company's loss and expenses and other moneys anywise

payable in respect of the above as specified in any notice of demand made by the company

to the Bank with reference to this Guarantee up to an aggregated limit of (in

figures)..............(in words) .................only.

And the Bank hereby agrees with the Company that:

(i) This Guarantee/Undertaking shall be a continuing Guarantee/Undertaking and

shall remain valid and irrevocable for all claims of the Company and liabilities of

the Supplier arising up to and until midnight of.....................

(ii) This Guarantee/Undertaking shall be in addition to any other guarantee or security

whatsoever that the Company may now or have at any time anywise have in

relation to the Contractors obligation/ liabilities under and/or in connection with

the said works contract, and the Company shall have full authority to take recourse

to or reinforce this security in preference to the other security (ies) at its sole

discretion, and no failure on the part of the Company in enforcing or requiring



enforcement of any other security shall have the effect of releasing the Bank from

its full liability hereunder.

(iii) The Company shall be at liberty without reference to the Bank and without

affecting the full liability of the Bank hereunder to take any other security in

respect of the Contractors obligations and or liabilities under or in connection with

the said works contract and to vary the terms vis-a-vis the Supplier of the said

works contract or to grant time .and or indulgence to the Contractor or to reduce or

to increase of otherwise vary the prices of the total contract value or to release or

to forebear from enforcement or any of the obligation of Contractor under the said

works contract and or the remedies of _the Company under any other security (ies)

now or hereafter held by the Company and no such dealing(s). variation(s),

reduction(s). increase(s) or other indulgence(s) or arrangement(s) with the

Contractor or release or forbearance whatsoever shall have- the effect or releasing

the Bank from its full liability to the Company hereunder or of prejudicing rights

of the Company against the Bank.

(iv) This Guarantee/Undertaking shall not be determined or affected by the liquidation

or winding up dissolution, or change of constitution or insolvency of the

Contractor but shall in all respects and for all purposes be-binding and operative

until payment of all money payable to the company in terms hereof.

(v) This Bank hereby waives all rights at any time inconsistent with the terms of this

Guarantee / Undertaking and the obligations of the Bank in terms here of shall not

be anywise affected or suspended by reason or any dispute or disputes having been

raised by the supplier (whether or not pending before any Arbitrator, Officer

Tribunal, or Courts) or any denial or liability by the Contractor or any denial of

liability by the Contractor or any other order of communication whatsoever by the

Contractor stopping or preventing or purporting to stop or prevent any payment by

the Bank to the Company in terms hereof.

(vi) The amount stated in any notice of demand addressed by the Company to

Guarantor as liable to be paid to the Company by the Contractor or as suffered or

incurred by the Company on Account of any losses of damages of costs, charges

and/or expenses shall be as between the Bank and the Company be conclusive of

the amount so liable to be paid to Company or suffered or incurred by the

Company as the case may be and payable by the Guarantor to Company in terms

here of.

(vii) Notwithstanding anything contained herein before, our liability under this

guarantee is restricted to Rs.____________________ (Rupees

___________________(in words)) in aggregate and will remain in force till the ---

--------day of 20 -- unless a claim or demand in writing is made against us under

the guarantee after the expiry of 3 months from the aforesaid date, i..e. before the -

--------------day of 20--. All your rights under the said aggregates shall be forfeited

and shall be relieved and discharged from all liabilities thereafter.



(viii) "The Bank" has power to issue this guarantee in favour of "the Corporation" in

terms of the documents and/or the agreement/contract or MOU entered into

between "the supplier" and "the Bank" in this regard.

IN WITNESS Where of __________________ Bank, has executed this document at

________________ on _______________ 200 .

____________________________ Bank

(by its constituted

attorney) (signature of a

person authorized to sign

on behalf of "the Bank")



ANNEXURE-C

Proforma of Letter of Authority for Attending Pre-bid Meeting,

Opening of Unpriced & Priced Bid.

No. ............ Date:

Chief Manager-Procurement

HPCL,

Hindustan Bhavan,

8, Shoorji Vallabhdas Marg,

MUMBAI-400001

Attn: Shri V A PradeepKumar

Dear Sirs,

We........................................hereby authorise following representatives (s) to attend

the unpriced bid opening and priced bid opening against your Bid document number

No. ..........................for....................................(item Name).......................................

1. Name & Designation.........................Signature............................

2. Name & Designation........................Signature............................

We confirm that we shall be bound by all and whatsoever our representative (s) shall

commit.

Yours faithfully,

Signature...........................................

Name & Designation.........................

For & on behalf of............................

Note:

This Letter of Authority should be on the letterhead of the Bidder and should be

signed by a person competent and having the power of attorney to bind the Bidder.



ANNEXURE -D

LOADING CRITERIA FOR DEVIATIONS TO PURCHASE CONDITIONS

In the case of following specific deviations to our Tender Conditions, Loading of the

Vendor’s Price shall be done as narrated.

1. Deviation to Completion Period

- Confirmed Tender Term No Loading

- Completion Period extends beyond

the stipulated period by and upto

10 weeks.

1/2 % per week.

- Completion Period extends beyond

the stipulated period by more than

10 weeks.

Bid will be rejected.



SECTION 7

HEALTH, SAFETY &

WELFARE PLAN

DURING

CONSTRUCTION



List of Contents

Chapter-1 : Guidelines for Development of Construction HSE plan

Chapter-2 : Safety precaution recommended during Excavation and Scaffolding works

activities.

Chapter-3 : Essential checklist for most commonly hazards at

Construction sites.

Chapter- 4 : Golden rules to reduce risk at site.

Chapter- 5 : HSE Passport- A Good practice guide

Chapter - 6 Important provision under -

The building and other construction workers (regulation of employment and

conditions of service) act, 1996

The building and other construction worker’s (regulation of employment and

conditions of service) central rules, 1998.



Chapter-1 : Guidelines for Development of Construction HSE Plan

General

Not all information relating to the project may be available to fully develop the health and

safety plan before the start of construction. This could be because not all the design work

may have been completed or many of the subcontractors who will be carrying out the

work have yet to be appointed. However, site layout drawings covering the project at

different stages, completed design information and the pre-tender stage health and safety

plan will be valuable in developing the health and safety plan so that:

• The general framework is in place (including arrangements for welfare); and

• it deals with the key tasks during the initial work packages where design is

complete.

For projects where a significant amount of design work will be prepared as construction

proceeds, specific arrangements for dealing with this work may need to be set out in the

health and safety plan. This is important to ensure that the health and safety aspects of the

design work are considered and dealt with properly by designers and the planning

supervisor. This will particularly occur under the various design and build and

management contracting forms of procurement.

The health and safety plan will need to be added to, reviewed and updated as the project

develops, further design work is completed, information from the subcontractors starting

work becomes available, unforeseen circumstances or variations to planned circumstances

arise, etc.

What should the health and safety plan start with?

The health and safety plan can usefully open with:

• A description of the Project

• A general statement of health and safety principles and objectives for the project;

• Information about restrictions which may affect the work (eg, neighbouring

buildings, utility services, vehicular and pedestrian traffic flows and restrictions

from the work activities of the client).

What should be the role of contractor in HSE Plan:

Principal contractors shall co-ordinate and manage health and safety issues during the

construction work. One of the duties place don the planning supervisor is to ensure that a

pre-tender stage health and safety plan is prepared before arrangements are made for the

principal contractor to carry out or manage construction work.

The principal contractor is then required to develop the health and safety plan before work

starts on site and keep it up to date throughout the construction phase. The degree of detail



required in the health and safety plan for the construction phase and the time and effort in

preparing it should be in proportion to the nature, size and level of health and safety risks

involved in the project. Projects involving minimal risks will call for simple,

straightforward plans. Large projects or those involving significant risks will need more

detail.

What should the health and safety plan cover for the construction phase?

The health and safety plan should set out the arrangements for securing the health and

safety of everyone carrying out the construction work and all others who may be affected

by it.

It should deal with:

• The arrangements for the management of health and safety of the construction

work;

• The monitoring systems for checking that the health and safety plan is being

followed;

• Health and safety risks to those at work, and others, arising from the construction

work, and from other work in premises where construction work may be carried

out.

What arrangements should be set out in the Health and Safety plan for managing

and organising the Project?

These can include:

1 : Management

• The management structure and responsibilities of the various members of the

project team, whether based at site or elsewhere;

• Arrangements for the principal contractor to give directions and to co-ordinate

other contractors.

2 : Standard setting

• The health and safety standards to which the project will be carried out. These may

be set in terms of statutory requirements or higher standards that the client may

require in particular circumstances.

3 : Information for contractors

• Means for informing contractors about risks to their health and safety arising from

the environment in which the project is to be carried out and the construction work

itself.



4 : Selection procedures

The principal contractor has to make arrangements for ensuring that:

All contractors, the self-employed and designers to be appointed by the principal

contractor are:

• Competent and will make adequate provision for health and safety;

• Suppliers of materials to the principal contractor will provide adequate health and

safety information to support their products;

• Machinery and other plant supplied for common use will be properly selected,

used and maintained; and that operator training will be provided.

5: Communications and co-operation

• Means for communicating and passing information between the project team

(including the client and any client’s representatives) the designers, the planning

supervisor, the principal contractor, other contractors, workers on site and others

whose health and safety may be affected;

• Arrangements for securing co-operation between contractors for health and safety

purposes;

• Arrangements for management meetings and initiatives by which the health and

safety objectives of the project are to be achieved;

• Arrangements for dealing with design work carried out during the construction

phase, ensuring it complies with the duties on designers (CDM regulation 13) and

resultant information is passed to the appropriate person(s).

6: Activities with risks to Health and Safety

Arrangements need to be made for the identification and effective management of

activities with risks to health and safety, by carrying out risk assessments, incorporating

those prepared by other contractors, and also safety method statements which result. These

activities may be specific to a particular trade (eg, false work) or to site-wide issues, and

may include:

• The storage and distribution of materials;

• The movement of vehicles on site, particularly as this affects pedestrian and

vehicular safety;

• Control and disposal of waste;

• The provision and use of common means of access and places of work;



• The provision and use of common mechanical plant;

• The provision and use of temporary services (e.g. electricity);

• Temporary support structures (e.g. false work);

• Commissioning, including the use of permit-to-work systems;

• Protection from falling materials;

• Exclusion of unauthorised people.

Control measures to deal with these should be clearly set out, including protection of

members of the public.

7: Emergency procedures

• Emergency arrangements for dealing with and minimising the effects of injuries,

fire and other dangerous occurrences.

8 : Reporting of RIDDOR information

• Arrangements for passing information to the principal contractor about accidents,

ill health and dangerous occurrences that require to be notified to the Health and

Safety Executive (HSE), HQO

9: Welfare

• The arrangements for the provision and maintenance of welfare facilities.

10 : Information and training for people on site

Arrangements need to be made by which the principal contractor will check that people on

site have been provided with:

• Health and safety information;

• Health and safety training; and

• Information about the project (eg relevant parts of the health and safety plan);

Arrangements also need to be made for:

• Project specific awareness training;

• Tool-box or task health and safety talks;

• The display of statutory notices.

11: Consultation with people on site

Arrangements that have been made for consulting and co-ordinating the views of workers

or their representatives.



12: Site rules

Arrangements for making site rules and for bringing them to the attention of those

affected. The rules should be set out in the health and safety plan. There may be separate

rules for contractors, workers, visitors and other specific groups.

13: Health and safety file

• Arrangements for passing on information to the planning supervisor for the

preparation of the health and safety file.

14: Arrangements for monitoring

Arrangements should be set out for the monitoring systems to achieve compliance with:

• Legal requirements; and

• The health and safety rules developed by the principal contractor through regular

planned

• Checks, and by carrying out investigations of incidents (whether causing injury,

loss, or ‘near miss’) and complaints.

This may involve:

Co-operation and regular meetings between senior management and those who provide

health and safety advice to them.

This may also involve monitoring of:

• Procedures, eg contractor selection and the management of certain trades;

• On-site standards actually achieved compared with those set for the Project;

• Reviews throughout the project, as different trades complete their work and at its

conclusion.

This means that the lessons learnt in terms of the standards that were set and those

actually achieved can be taken forward.



Chapter- 2: Safety precaution recommended during Excavation and Scaffolding

works activities

Excavation

Introduction:

Every year, people are killed or seriously injured when working in excavations.

Excavation work has to be properly planned, managed, supervised and carried out to

prevent accidents. This information sheet provides advice for those involved in excavation

work.

Planning:

Before digging any excavations, it is important to plan against the following:

• Collapse of the sides;

• Materials falling onto people working in the excavation;

• People and vehicles falling into the excavation;

• People being struck by plant;

• Undermining nearby structures;

• Contact with underground services;.

• Access to the excavation;

• Fumes; and

• Accidents to members of the public.

Make sure the necessary equipment needed such as trench sheets, props, baulks, etc, is

available on site before work starts.

Excavation collapse

• Prevent the sides and the ends from collapsing by battering them to a safe angle or

supporting them with timber, sheeting or proprietary support systems.

• Do not go into unsupported excavations.

• Never work ahead of the support.

• Remember that even work in shallow trenches can be dangerous. You may need to

provide support if the work involves bending or kneeling in the trench.

Materials falling into excavations

• Do not store spoil or other materials close to the sides of excavations. The spoil

may fall into the excavation and the extra loading will make the sides more prone

to collapse.

• Make sure the edges of the excavation are protected against falling materials.

Provide toe boards where necessary.

• Wear a hard hat when working in excavations.



People and vehicles falling into excavations

• Take steps to prevent people falling into excavations. If the excavation is 2 m or

more deep, provide substantial barriers, eg guard rails and toe boards.

• Keep vehicles away from excavations wherever possible. Use brightly painted

baulks or barriers where necessary.

• Where vehicles have to tip materials into excavations, use stop blocks to prevent

them from over-running.

• Remember that the sides of the excavation may need extra support.

Undermining nearby structures

• Make sure excavations do not affect the footings of scaffolds or the foundations of

nearby structures.

• Walls may have very shallow foundations which can be undermined by even small

trenches.

• Decide if the structure needs temporary support before digging starts.

• Surveys of the foundations and the advice of a structural engineer may be needed.

Avoiding underground services

• Look around for obvious signs of underground services, eg valve covers or

patching of the road surface.

• Use locators to trace any services. Mark the ground accordingly.

• Make sure that the person supervising excavation work has service plans and

knows how to use them.

• Everyone carrying out the work should know about safe digging practices and

emergency procedures.

Access

• Provide good ladder access or other safe ways of getting in and out of the

excavation.

Fumes

• Exhaust fumes can be dangerous. Do not site petrol or diesel-engined equipment

such as generators or compressors in, or near the edge of, an excavation unless

fumes can be ducted away or the area can be ventilated.

Protecting the public

• Fence off all excavations in public places to prevent pedestrians and vehicles

falling into them.

• Where people might get onto a site out of hours, take precautions (eg backfilling or

securely covering excavations) to reduce the chance of them being injured.



Supervision

• A competent person must supervise the installation, alteration or removal of

excavation support.

• People working in excavations should be given clear instructions on how to work

safely.

Inspecting excavations

• A competent person must inspect excavations:

- At the start of each shift before work begins;

- After any event likely to have affected the strength or stability of the

excavation; and;

- After any accidental fall of rock, earth or other material.

• A written report should be made after most inspections. Stop work if the

Inspection shows the excavation to be unsafe.

Scaffolding

Introduction:

Falls from a height continue to be the biggest killer on construction sites. This information

sheet provides advice for users of ladders and access scaffolds. It will also help those who

select and specify equipment.

Work at height should be carried out from a platform with suitable edge protection.

Occasionally this may not be possible and a ladder may have to be used. However, ladders

are best used as a means of getting to a workplace and should only be used as a workplace

for light work of short duration.

Selecting equipment:

When deciding what equipment to use think about what the job includes, how long it will

last and where it needs to be done. It is tempting to use a ladder for all sorts of work but

you should always consider a working platform first, for example, a properly erected

mobile scaffold tower or a mobile elevated working platform (MEWP).

Jobs such as removing or installing guttering, installing replacement windows, painting or

demolition work should usually be carried out from scaffolds or mobile access equipment.

Scaffold erection

• A scaffold should be designed, erected, altered and dismantled by competent

people, with all scaffolding work under the supervision of a ‘competent person’.



• Scaffolders should always adopt a safe system of work during the erection, altering

and dismantling of scaffolds. This will usually include the use of fall arrest

equipment.

• All scaffolds require bracing to help prevent them from collapsing. The platform of

a general purpose scaffold should be at least four boards wide. All scaffolds,

including ‘independent’ scaffolds, should be securely tied, or otherwise supported.

More ties will be required if:

- The scaffold is sheeted or netted due to the increased wind loading;

- It is used as a loading platform for materials or equipment; or

- Hoists, lifting appliances or rubbish chutes are attached to it.

• System scaffolds should be erected following the manufacturer’s instructions and

may require more tying than independent scaffolds.

Safe use of scaffolds

• Do not take up boards, move handrails or remove ties to gain access for work.

• Changes should only be made by a competent scaffolder.

• Never work from platforms that are not fully boarded.

• Do not overload scaffolds. Make sure they are designed to take the loads put on

them. Store materials so the load is spread evenly.

• Make sure there is suitable stair and ladder access onto the working platform.

Ladders

• Ladders should be in good condition and examined regularly for defects. You

should have a management system in place to ensure that this is done. They should

be secured so they cannot slip, usually by tying them at the top.

• The ladder should be angled to minimise the risk of slipping outwards and as a rule

of thumb needs to be ‘one out for every four up’.

• Access ladders should extend about 1 m above the working platform. This

provides a handhold for people getting on and off.

• Do not overreach: if you are working from a ladder, make sure it is long enough

and positioned to reach the work safely.

• Do not climb or work off a ladder unless you can hold onto it.



Protecting the public:

• Contact the appropriate highway authority before erecting a scaffold on a public

highway or on any roads, pavements, paths or routes used by the public.

• Ensure the scaffold is designed to carry the load from stored materials and

equipment.

• Scaffolds should be designed to prevent materials falling. You may need to

provide brick guards, netting or sheeting. Where the risk is high, or for example

during demolition or facade cleaning, you should provide extra protection in the

form of scaffold fans or covered walkways.

• Erecting and dismantling scaffolds should preferably be undertaken during off

times. People should be prevented, with suitable barriers and signs, from walking

under the scaffold during erection or dismantling.

• Stop unauthorised access onto the scaffold, for example by removing all ladders at

ground level, whenever it is left unattended.

• Never ‘bomb’ materials from a scaffold. Use mechanical hoists or rubbish chutes

to move materials and waste.

Scaffold inspection

Scaffolds must be inspected by a competent person:

- before first use;

- after substantial alteration;

- after any event likely to have affected their stability, for example, following strong

winds; and

- at regular intervals not exceeding seven days.

Any faults found must be put right before contractors allow their workers to use someone

else’s scaffold they must make sure it is safe.

The reports which have to be made following certain inspections. Those in control of

workplaces should ensure inspections are carried out by a competent person.

All employers and people in control of construction work should make sure that

places of work are safe before they allow their workers to use them for the first time.

Stop work if the inspection shows it is not safe to continue.



Reports

The competent person must complete the inspection report before the end of the working

period and provide the report or a copy to the person for whom the inspection was carried

out, within 24 hours.

Reports must be kept on site until the work is complete. Reports should then be kept for

three months at an office of the person for whom the inspections were carried out.

A report is only needed for a tower scaffold if it stays in the same place for seven days or

more and where an inspection of a working platform or any personal suspension

equipment is carried out before being used for the first time; or – after any substantial

addition, dismantling or other alteration;

Only one report is needed for any 24-hour period; where an inspection of an excavation is

carried out and only one written report is needed in any seven day period unless something

happens to affect its strength or stability.

Your record must include the following information:

– Name and address of person on whose behalf the inspection was carried out;

– Location of the workplace inspected;

– Description of workplace or part of workplace

– Inspected (including any plant and equipment and materials, if any);

– Date and time of inspection;

– Details of any matter identified that could lead to a risk to the health and

safety of anyone;

– Details of any action taken as a result of any matter identified in the last

point;

– Details of any more action considered necessary; and

– The name and position of the person making the report.

Cement

Introduction

Cement is widely used in construction. Anyone who uses cement (or anything containing

cement, such as mortar, plaster and concrete) or is responsible for managing its use should

be aware that it presents a hazard to health.



Health effects

Cement can cause ill health mainly by skin contact, inhalation of dust; and manual

handling.

Skin contact Contact with wet cement can cause both dermatitis and burns.

Dermatitis Skin affected by dermatitis feels itchy and sore, and looks red, scaly and cracked. Cement

is capable of causing dermatitis by two mechanisms - irritancy and allergy.

Irritant dermatitis is caused by the physical properties of cement that irritate the skin

mechanically. The fine particles of cement, often mixed with sand or other aggregates to

make mortar or concrete, can abrade the skin and cause irritation resulting in dermatitis.

With treatment, irritant dermatitis will usually clear up. But if exposure continues over a

longer period the condition will get worse and the individual is then more susceptible to

allergic dermatitis.

Allergic dermatitis is caused by sensitisation to the hexavalent chromium chromate)

present in cement. The way this works is quite distinct from that of irritancy. Sensitisers

penetrate the barrier layer of the skin and cause an allergic reaction. Hexavalent chromium

is known to be the most common cause of allergic dermatitis in men.

Research has shown that between 5%and 10%of construction workers may be

sensitised to cement and that plasterers, concreters and bricklayers are particularly at risk.

Once someone has become sensitised to hexavalent chromium, any future exposure may

trigger dermatitis.

Some skilled tradesmen have been forced to change their trade because of this. The longer

the duration of skin contact with a sensitiser, the more it will penetrate the skin, and the

greater the risk of sensitisation will become.

Therefore, if cement is left on the skin throughout the working day, rather than being

washed off at intervals, the risk of contact sensitisation to hexavalent chromium will be

increased. Both irritant and allergic dermatitis can affect a person at the same time.

Cement burns

Wet cement can cause burns. The principal cause is thought to be the alkalinity of the wet

cement. If wet cement becomes trapped against the skin, for example

by kneeling in it or if cement falls into a boot or glove, a serious burn or ulcer can rapidly

develop. These often take months to heal, and in extreme cases will need

skin grafts or can even lead to amputation. Serious chemical burns to the eyes can also be

caused following a splash of cement.

Inhalation of dust

High levels of dust can be produced when cement is handled, for example when emptying

or disposing of bags. In the short term, exposure to high levels of cement dust irritates the



nose and throat. Scabbling or concrete cutting can also produce high levels of dust which

may contain silica.

Manual handling Working with cement also poses risks such as sprains and strains, particularly to the back,

arms and shoulders from lifting and carrying cement bags, mixing mortar etc. More

serious damage to the back can be caused in the long term if workers are continually

lifting heavy weights.

Health prevention and health surveillance

Skin contact You should first consider using elimination or substitution to prevent the possibility of

contact with cement. Otherwise, you should apply control measures which minimise

contact with the skin either directly or indirectly from contaminated surfaces in the

working environment.

An important way of controlling cement dermatitis is by washing the skin with warm

water and soap, or other skin cleanser, and drying the skin afterwards. Sinks should be

large enough to wash the forearms and have both hot and cold (or warm) running water.

Soap and towels should be provided. Facilities for drying clothes and changing clothes

should also be available.

Gloves may help to protect skin from cement, but they may not be suitable for all aspects

of construction site work. Caution is advised when using gloves as cement trapped against

the skin inside the glove can cause a cement burn. You should provide protective

clothing, including overalls with long sleeves and long trousers. Employers are required to

arrange for employees to receive suitable health surveillance where there is exposure to a

substance known to be associated with skin disease and where there is a reasonable

likelihood that the disease may occur. This means you should provide health surveillance

for workers who will be working with wet cement on a regular basis.

Health surveillance is needed to protect individuals and identify as early as possible any

indicators of skin changes related to exposure, so that steps can be taken to treat their

condition and to advise them about the future and give early warning of lapses in control.

Health surveillance must never be regarded as reducing the need to control exposure or to

wash cement off the skin.

Simple health surveillance will usually be sufficient. Skin inspections should be done at

regular intervals by a competent person, and the results recorded. Employers will probably

need the help of an occupational health nurse or doctor to devise a suitable health

surveillance regime and they will need to train a ‘responsible person’, for instance a

supervisor, to carry out the skin inspections.

A responsible person is someone appointed by the employer who, following instruction

from an occupational health physician or nurse, is competent to recognise the signs and



symptoms of cement-related dermatitis. The responsible person should report any findings

to the employer, and will need refer cases to a

suitably qualified person (eg an occupational health nurse).

Inhalation of dust

Exposure to dust should be eliminated where possible, for example, by purchasing ready

mixed concrete. Where this is not possible, the risk should be assessed and appropriate

control measures implemented.

Manual handling

Manual handling of heavy loads should be avoided. In particular, cement should be

supplied in 25 kg bags or ordered in bulk supply. Where manual handling does take place,

you should assess the risks and adopt appropriate risk control measures.



Chapter-3 : Essential checklist for most commonly hazards at Construction sites

General Safety Guidelines:

When we employ or control people doing work for us, directly or thru a contract, we must

ensure that:

• Workers & Supervisors should use the safety helmet and other requisite Personal

Protective Equipment according to job & site requirement. They should be trained

to use personal protective equipment.

• Ensure the usage of correct and tested tools and tackles. Don't allow the make shift

tools and tackles.

• No loose clothing should be allowed while working near rotating equipment or

working at heights.

• Ensure that workers are trained and competent to do the job safely and without

putting their health at risk.

• Ensure that workers are informed about the work before they start and they are

given clear instructions by supervisors.

• Ensure that workers have the right tools, equipment, plant and protective clothing.

• Areas which are likely to pose danger to workers are clearly indicated.

• Check the health and past safety performance of the people we plan to use.

• Give them the health and safety information they need for the work.

• Ensure that workers have access to washing and toilet facilities.

• Make sure that you have provided everything you agreed e.g. safe scaffolds, the

right plant, access to welfare, etc.

Essential Checklist:

The following will provide an essential checklist of some of the most common hazards

which are found at construction sites.

The questionnaire will help to decide whether the site is a safe and healthy place to work.

Please note that this is not a full list.

1. Housekeeping

• Ensure proper storage of materials & equipment at work place and removal of

scrap, inflammable material, waste and debris etc. from site at appropriate intervals

to ensure proper house keeping.



• Loose materials, which are not required for use, to be removed from work place.

• Workplaces and passageways, that are slippery owing to oil, grease or other

causes, should be cleaned up or strewn with sand, sawdust, ash etc.

2. Excavation

• All excavation work should be planned and the method of excavation and the type

of support work required should be decided considering the stability of the ground

and ensuring that the excavation will not affect adjoining buildings, structures or

roadways.

• Sites of excavations should be thoroughly inspected on daily basis, prior to each

shift and after interruption in work of more than one day, after every blasting

operation, after an unexpected fall of ground, after substantial damage to supports,

after a heavy rain, frost or snow, and boulder formations are encountered.

• Safe angle of repose while excavating trenches, based on site conditions, to be

provided of excavation in all soils except hard rock or provide proper shoring and

strutting to prevent cave-in or slides.

• As far as possible, excavated earth should not be placed within one meter of the

edge of the trench or depth of trench whichever is greater.

• Don't allow vehicles to operate too close to excavated area. Maintain proper

distance from edge of excavation. No load, plant or equipment should be placed or

moved near the edge of any excavation where it is likely to cause its collapse and

thereby endanger any person unless precautions such as the provision of shoring or

piling are taken to prevent the sides from collapsing.

• If any excavation is likely to affect the stability of a structure on which persons are

working, precautions should be taken to protect the structure from collapse.

• Necessary precautions should be taken for underground utility lines like cables,

sewers etc. and necessary approvals/clearances from the concerned authorities

shall be obtained before commencement of the excavation job.

• During rains, the soil becomes loose. Take additional precaution against collapse

of side wall.

• In case of mechanised excavation, precaution shall be taken to not to allow

anybody to come near the extreme reach of the mechanical shovel. The

mechanised excavator shall be operated by a well-trained experienced operator.

The excavator should be kept on firm leveled ground with mechanical shovel

resting on ground, when not in use. Suitable precautions should also be taken for

dozers, graders and other heavy machines, as per manufacturer guidelines

3. Scaffolding

• Every scaffold should be constructed, erected and maintained so as to prevent

collapse or accidental displacement when in use.

• All scaffolds should be provided with safe means of access, such as stairs, ladders

or ramps. Ladders should be secured against inadvertent movement.



• Boards and planks used for scaffolds should be protected against splitting.

Materials used in the construction of scaffolds should be stored under good

conditions and apart from any material unsuitable for scaffolds.

• Scaffolds should be inspected and certified before being taken into use, at periodic

intervals thereafter as prescribed for different types of scaffolds and after any

alteration, interruption in use, exposure to weather or seismic conditions or any

other occurrence likely to have affected their strength or stability.

• Every scaffold should be maintained in good and proper condition, and every part

should be kept fixed or secured so that no part can be displaced in consequence of

normal use.

• Double guard rails and toe boards, or other suitable protection should be provided

at every edge to prevent falling.

• Additional brick guards should be provided to prevent materials falling from

scaffolds.

• Effective barriers or warning notices should be kept in place to stop people using

an incomplete scaffold, e.g. where working platforms are not fully boarded.

4. Reinforcement

• Ensure that workers use Personnel Protective equipment like safety helmet, safety

shoes, gloves etc.

• Ensure proper safety procedures/precautions to carry out welding/cutting of

reinforcement steel rods.

• For supplying of rods at heights, proper staging and/or bundling to be provided.

• Ensure barricading and staging for supplying and fixing of rods at height.

• For short distance carrying of materials on shoulders, suitable pads to be

provided.

5. Concreting

• Ensure stability of shuttering work before allowing concreting.

• Barricade the concreting area while pouring at height/depths.

• Keep vibrator hoses, pumping concrete accessories in healthy conditions and

mechanically locked.

• Pipelines in concrete pumping system shall not be attached to temporary

structures such as scaffolds and formwork support as the forces and movements

may affect their integrity.

• Check safety cages & guards around moving motors/parts etc. provided in

concreting mixers.

• Use Personal Protective Equipment like gloves, safety shoes etc. while dealing

with concrete and wear respirators for dealing with cement.



• Earthing of electrical mixers, vibrators, etc. should be done and verified.

• Cleaning of rotating drums of concrete mixers shall be done from outside.

Lockout devices shall be provided where workers need to enter.

• Where concrete mixers are driven by internal combustion engine, exhaust points

shall be located away from the worker's workstation so as to eliminate their

exposure to obnoxious fumes.

• Ensure adequate lighting arrangements for carrying out concrete work during

night.

• Don't allow the workers to work on concrete job for more than 12 hours. Insist on

shift pattern.

• During concrete pouring, shuttering and its supports should be continuously

watched for defects.

6. Road work

• Site shall be barricaded and provided with warning signs, including night warning

lamps at appropriate locations for traffic diversion, if any.

• Filled and empty bitumen drums shall be stacked separately at designated places.

• Mixing aggregate with bitumen shall preferably be done with the help of bitumen

batch mixing plant, unless operationally non-feasible.

• Workers handling hot bitumen sprayers or spreading bitumen aggregate mix or

mixing bitumen with aggregate, shall be provided with PVC hand gloves and

rubber shoes with legging up to knee joints.

• If bitumen accidentally falls on ground, it shall be immediately covered by

sprinkling sand, to prevent anybody stepping on it. Then it shall be removed with

the help of spade.

• For cement concrete roads, besides site barricading and installation of warning

signs for traffic diversion, safe practices mentioned in the chapter on "Concreting",

shall also be applicable.

7. Cutting / Welding

Common hazards involved in welding/cutting are sparks, molten metal, flying

particles, harmful light rays, electric shocks etc. Following precautions should be

taken while doing job of cutting and welding:

• Ensure that only approved and well-maintained apparatus, such as torches,

manifolds, regulators or pressure reducing valves, and acetylene generators, be

used.

• The welding receptacles shall be rated for 63 A suitable for 415V, 3-Phase system

with a scraping earth. Receptacles shall have necessary mechanical interlocks and

earthing facilities.

• All covers and panels shall be kept in place, when operating an electric Arc

welding machine.



• All cables, including welding and ground cables, shall be checked for any worn out

or cracked insulation before starting the job. Ground cable should be separate

without any loose joints.

• All gas cylinders shall be properly secured in upright position.

• Acetylene cylinder shall be turned and kept in such a way that the valve outlet

points away from oxygen cylinder.

• Acetylene cylinder key for opening valve shall be kept on valve stem, while

cylinder is in use, so that the acetylene cylinder could be quickly turned off in case

of emergency. Use flash back arrestors to prevent back-fire in acetylene/oxygen

cylinder.

• When not in use, valves of all cylinders shall be kept closed. All types of cylinders,

whether full or empty, shall be stored at cool, dry place under shed.

• Store acetylene and oxygen cylinders separately.

• Ensure that hoses are free from burns, cuts and cracks and properly clamped.

• During cutting/welding, use proper type goggles/face shields and fire

extinguishers.

8. Ladders

• Ensure that ladders are in good condition and rest against a solid surface and not

on fragile or insecure materials.

• Ensure that ladders are secured to prevent them slipping sideways or outwards.

• Ensure that ladders rise a sufficient height above their landing place? If not, make

sure that other hand-holds available.

• Ensure that the ladders are properly positioned so that users don’t have to over-

stretch.

• On average approx. 24 % of total construction accidents 24 % accounts towards

falls and a third of those who died were painters and decorators. A construction

worker was killed when he fell from an unsecured ladder while trying to climb

onto a flat garage roof.

9. Roof work

• During industrial roofing work ensure that nets have been provided to stop people

falling from the leading edge of the roof and from partially fixed sheets.

• When work is being carried out on sloping roofs, sufficient and suitable crawling

boards or roof ladders should be provided and firmly secured in position.

• During extensive work on the roof, strong barriers or guardrails and toe-boards

should be provided to stop a person from falling off the roof.



• Where workers are required to work on or near roofs or other places covered with

fragile material, through which they are liable to fall, they should be provided with

suitable roof ladders or crawling boards strong enough and when spanning across

the supports for the roof covering to support those workers.

• A minimum of two boards should be provided so that it is not necessary for a

person to stand on a fragile roof to move a board or a ladder, or for any other

reason.

• Ensure that people are kept away from the area below the roof work.

• Over 50% of fatal injuries to roofers are falls through fragile materials and over

30% are falls from edges and openings. A roofer was killed when he fell through

an unprotected fragile roof light while stripping and re-sheeting an industrial

pitched

10. Manual Handling

• If there are heavy materials such as roof trusses, concrete lintels, kerb stones or

bagged products which could cause problems if they have to be moved by hand,

ensure to use wheelbarrows, hoists, telehandlers, and other plant or equipment so

that manual lifting of heavy objects is kept to a minimum.

• Avoid the repetitive laying of heavy building blocks weighing more than 20 kg and

train people on how to lift safely.

11. Demolition

• Structural details and builders' drawings should be obtained wherever possible,

before demolition operations begin and the work should be planned and

undertaken only under the supervision of a competent person.

• Details of the previous use should be obtained to identify any possible

contamination and hazards from chemicals, flammables, etc.

• Necessary precautions, methods and procedures should be adopted, including those

for the disposal of waste or residues, when the demolition of any building or

structure may pose danger to workers or to the public.

• Any structural problems and risks associated with flammable substances and

substances hazardous to health to be identified and a method of demolition should

be formulated after the survey and recorded in a method statement having taken all

the various considerations into account and identifying the problems and their

solutions;

• As far as practicable, the danger zone round the building should be adequately

fenced off and sign posted. To protect the public a fence should be erected

enclosing the demolition operations and the access gates should be secured outside

working hours.



• Where plant has contained flammable materials, special precautions should be

taken to avoid fire and explosion.

• The plant to be demolished should be isolated from all other plant that may contain

flammable materials. Any residual flammable material in the plant should be

rendered safe by cleaning, purging or the application of an inert atmosphere as

appropriate.

• Care should be taken not to demolish any parts, which would destroy the stability

of other parts.

• Structures should not be left in a condition in which they could be brought down

by wind pressure or vibration.

• When equipment such as power shovels and bulldozers are used for demolition,

due consideration should be given to the nature of the building or structure, its

dimensions, as well as to the power of the equipment being used.

• All precautions should be taken to prevent danger from any sudden twist, spring or

collapse of steelwork, ironwork or reinforced concrete when it is cut or released.

12. Traffic, Vehicles and Plant

• An experienced ground worker was crushed and killed by a slewing 360 excavator

as it moved into position. He tried to pass between the machine and a trench box.

• A person was struck and killed by a van reversing at a road works site. The turning

area in the site was blocked by parked cars and the driver reversed without

assistance.

• Ensure that vehicles and plant are properly maintained, e.g. steering, lights,

handbrake and footbrake are working properly.

• Ensure that drivers have received proper training and they are competent for the

vehicles or plant they are operating.

• All loads should be properly secured and also make sure that plant and vehicles are

not used on dangerous slopes.

13. Tools and Machinery

• Ensure that the right tools or machinery are being used for the job and all

dangerous parts are guarded, e.g. gears, chain drives, projecting engine shafts.

• All tools and machinery should be maintained in good condition and all safety

devices to be ensure for operating correctly.

14. Emergencies

• Ensure that workers at site are aware of the procedures for evacuating the site in

case of any emergency at work place.



• Nos. of contacting the emergency services shall be displayed at site?

• Provision of first aid shall be ensure at site.

15. Hazardous substances

• All harmful substances and materials, such as asbestos, lead, solvents, paints,

cement and dust should be identified at work place.

• Workers should the information and training so they know what the risks are from

the hazardous substances used and produced on site, and what they need to do to

avoid those risks.

• Health surveillance for people using certain hazardous substances (eg lead) should

be arranged.

16. Noise

• Workers should have information and training so they know what the risks are

from noise on site, and what they need to do to avoid those risks.

• Suitable hearing protection should be provided and worn in noisy areas.

• Health surveillance for people exposed to high levels of noise should be arranged.

17. Hand –Arm Vibration

• Workers should have information and training so they know what the risks are

from hand-arm vibration (HAV) on site, and what they need to do to avoid those

risks.

• Risks to workers from prolonged use of vibrating tools such as concrete breakers,

angle grinders or hammer drills should be identified and assessed.

• Health surveillance for people exposed to high levels of hand-arm vibration,

especially when exposed for long periods should be arranged.

18. Electricity and other services

• All tools and equipment should be checked by users, visually examined on site and

regularly inspected and tested by a competent person.

• All necessary services should be provided at work place before work begins and

existing services present on site shall be identified (e.g. electric cables or gas

mains) and effective steps should be taken to prevent any danger from them, if

necessary.



• Low voltage tools and equipment should be used for work.

19. Welfare:

• Ensure the availability of toilets and that are they kept clean & properly lit.

• Place to change, dry and store clothing should be arranged near work place for

workers.

• Drinking water facility should be provided for the workers at work place.

• A place shall be identified where workers can sit and take rest during their recess

hours.



Chapter-4 : Golden rules to reduce risk at site

Construction is a high-risk activity. This chapter covers the ‘5 Golden rules’ that will help

you keep safe and healthy.

Remember to:

. Plan and organize what you do

. Make sure you’re trained and competent and know the special risks in your trade

. Raise problems with your supervisor or safety representative.

Rule # 1: THE BASICS

Tidy sites and decent welfare

Tidy sites and decent welfare are the basics of a good site. Slips and trips are the most

common cause of injuries at work.

An untidy site is a poorly managed site.

All sites need decent welfare facilities. The minimum welfare requirements are:

.Clean toilets

.Running hot and cold water with soap and towels

.Basins large enough to immerse your arms up to the elbows

.Drinking water

.Some where warm, dry and clean to sit and eat

Poor welfare facilities can lead to ill health

Rule # 2: PROTECTION TO AVOID FALLS FROM HEIGHT

Falls from height are the biggest cause of fatal and serious injuries in construction. They

account for 50% of all deaths. Many accidents involve falls from roofs, through fragile

materials, from ladders and from leading edges.

Generally, make sure you:

.Work from a safe and secure place or platform with proper edge protection

.Use scaffolds and scaffold towers that are competently erected

.Use powered access equipment safely

.Protect holes and leading edges, e.g. with guardrails and toe boards



When working on roofs never:

. Work in poor weather

. Work on sloping roofs without edge protection

. Throw down waste or equipment

Take care when working on or near fragile material - you can fall through as well

as off it.

Ladders:

.Only use ladders for light work of short duration if there’s no safer alternative

.Angle and secure them to prevent slipping (1 out for 4up)

.Always make sure ladders are properly maintained

Never over-reach

Rule # 3: PROPER MANUAL HANDLING

Manual handling injuries from working with heavy, awkward materials, often in wet

conditions, are one of the most common reasons why workers leave construction. Injuries

are made worse by repetitive jobs, such as laying heavy blocks.

.Use mechanical means, e.g. hoists, teleporters and chutes

.Choose equipment suitable for the job and keep it maintained

.Change to lighter materials, bags etc.

.Avoid repetitive handling

.Avoid awkward movements

Protect yourself and reduce the strain

Rule # 4: PROPER TRANSPORT ARRANGEMENTS

Workplace transport incidents are the second most common cause of fatalities after falls

from height.

.Use barriers and warning signs to separate vehicles and people

.Create clearance around slewing vehicles

.Avoid reversing – where you can’t, use trained banks men

.Make sure loads are secure

.Don’t use plant and vehicles on dangerous slopes



.Only take passengers on vehicles designed to take them

.Make sure vehicles are maintained and operators are trained

When people and vehicles collide, people come off worse - so keep them apart!

Rule # 5: PRECUATION WHILE WORKING ON ASBESTOS

If you’re thinking of working in a building that was built or renovated up until the 1980s,

you should assume it contains asbestos until proved otherwise.

The main asbestos-containing materials (ACMs) are lagging, asbestos insulating board,

sprayed insulation, decorative coatings and asbestos cement.

.Check if there is any ACM

.Find out what you need to do to work safely

If in any doubt, leave it to the experts!



Chapter-5 : HSE Passport - A Good practice guide

This chapter on good practice guide describes that what a HSE Passport scheme is and

also answers to some basic information about it and gives advice on good practice

including a suggested core syllabus.

HSE Passport scheme ensure that workers have basic health and safety awareness training

and are a way of improving health and safety performance. They also help promote good

practice and can help reduce accidents and ill health caused by work. They are especially

useful for workers and contractors who work in more than one industry or firm.

What are health, safety and environment Passports?

� HSE Passport shows that a worker has up-to-date basic health and safety or health,

safety and environment awareness training. Some cover other subjects too.

� HSE Passports are a way of controlling access to work sites – only workers with

valid Passports are allowed to work.

� They shall be of credit card size and made of strong plastic with a photograph and

signature.

� Workers can hold more than one HSE Passport if they have been trained for work

in more than one industry.

� They are a very simple way for workers who move from one industry to another,

or work in more than one industry, to show employers they have basic training.

� A HSE Passport belongs to the worker not the employer.

� Some Certification Schemes operate like Passports.

� HSE Passport is a starting point for workers training for health, safety and

environment qualifications.

What should HSE Passport training cover?

A HSE Passport holder should know about:

� The hazards and risks they may face;

� The hazards or risks they can cause for other people;

� How to identify relevant hazards and potential risks;

� How to assess what to do to eliminate the hazard and control the risk;

� How to take steps to control the risk to themselves and others;



� Their safety and environmental responsibilities, and those of the people they work

with;

� Where to find any extra information they need to do their job safely; and

� How to follow a safe system of work.

How HSE Passport scheme will work?

An industry or group of companies decide they want a way of ensuring that their

employees and any suppliers, contractors, self-employed or agency workers they use

have basic health, safety and environment training.

They need to decide or consider that :

� What training is needed for workers;

� Qualifications and resources needed by trainers;

� How training will be delivered and assessed;

� How long a Passport will be valid for;

� Need for refresher training before renewal; and

� How records will be kept and checked.

� A training scheme is developed, piloted and fine-tuned.

� Courses are offered to workers. It is important to check that training has been

successful, so workers must pass a test or an assessment must be made before a

HSE Passport is issued.

� Once the scheme starts, the industry or group of companies will not allow workers

on their sites unless they hold an up-to-date and valid HSE Passport.

� Large firms often have their own ‘approved’ list of contractors. To join this list,

contractors may have to demonstrate their health, safety and environmental

performance. Having workers with Passports is one way to do this.

HSE Passports shall not be :

� A way of knowing or identifying that a worker is competent;

� A substitute for risk assessment;

� A way of showing ‘approval’ of a contractor;

� A reason to ignore giving site-specific information; or



� A substitute for effective on-site management.

Benefits and advantages of Passport schemes

� They can help reduce accidents and ill health caused by work.

� They can have a significant impact in reducing pollution incidents, minimising

waste and contributing to a cleaner environment for everyone.

� Passports save both time and money because workers need less induction training.

� They show a company’s commitment to having safe and healthy workers.

� Companies know that workers have been trained to a common, recognised and

validated standard.

� They help to promote good practice in the supply chain between contractors and

companies.

� Insurance and liability premiums may be reduced if a company can show that all

workers have basic health, safety and environment training.

� Workers are more employable as they have basic training.

Can a Passport be withdrawn?

Passports are not a way of showing a worker is competent – they only show that a worker

has basic training, so if a worker is found doing something wrong, the Passport is unlikely

to be withdrawn. But, for example, a Passport would be withdrawn if it was found to have

false information or was being misused.

Training arrangements

The length of training depends on how much needs to be covered. In some schemes half a

day may be enough but other courses take longer. Some courses mix the core syllabus

with training for the hazards in a specific industry and others separate the two. It is usual

for supervisors to have extra training. All courses end with some form of assessment. This

can be a multiple-choice questionnaire, a written test or one which involves a computer. In

some schemes training is provided by external trainers and in others it is done in-house.

Refresher training

Passports shall be normally valid for a period of three years. It is usual for a worker to be

given refresher training before a Passport is re-validated.

Recognition between different schemes

HSE is encouraging organisations to work together so that one scheme recognises the core

training of other schemes. This means that Passport holders do not have to repeat the core



syllabus if they move from one employer or contract to another, they will simply need site

specific training. If they stay in the same industry they may not need to have further sector

specific training. By producing a suggested core syllabus, HSE and the Environment

Agencies hope to encourage more mutual recognition. In some schemes arrangements

have been made to recognise any Passport which meets 80% of the suggested core

syllabus and which has been issued within the last two years.

Monitoring

It is important that contractors’ supervisors monitor Passport holders on a day-to-day basis

by:

� Asking people about their work;

� Checking whether people are following procedures; and

� Observing their work.

Any site-based checking system needs to be easy for supervisors to use, for example, one

which uses cards should include photographs and signatures. The standard of training

provided also needs to be monitored by clients but most organisations running Passport

schemes have quality assurance arrangements.

Core syllabus

Passport schemes should ideally have a common core syllabus, so that :

Passport holders won’t have to repeat core training if they move from one employer or

contract to another; and Duplicated effort and cost are reduced.

Effective HSE Passport training schemes would be expected to cover elements of the core

syllabus below.

Health and Safety core syllabus

• Introduction to Passports and their purpose

• Overview of key health and safety issues

• Responsibilities and lines of communication of employers, contractors and

individuals

• Overview of risk assessment

• The role of safety representatives and health and safety inspectors

• The workplace: Safe access and exits safety signs

• Temperature, lighting, housekeeping and welfare facilities

• Slips, trips and falls

• Reporting failures and defects



• Working at heights and falls from heights

• Plant and machinery

• Electricity

• Workplace transport

• Health

• Personal protective equipment

• Controlling harmful substances

• Manual handling

• Health surveillance or monitoring (if appropriate)

• Safe systems of work, including permit to work systems

• Emergency procedures

• Fire safety & First aid

• Reporting accidents and incidents

Environment core syllabus

• Responsibilities of employers and employees

• Environmental concerns in the workplace

• Causes of on and off site pollution

• How to prevent pollution

• Emergencies

• Emergency planning

• Emergency procedures including the use of oil absorbents

• Waste Management regulations

• Waste segregation and minimisation

• Safe and secure storage



Chapter - 6

THE BUILDING AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION WORKERS (REGULATION

OF

EMPLOYMENT AND CONDITIONS OF SERVICE) ACT, 1996

CHAPTER VII

SAFETY AND HEALTH MEASURES

38. Safety Committee and safety officers.- (1) In every establishment wherein fivee

hundred or moree building workers are ordinarily employed, the employer shall

constitute a Safety Committee consisting of such number of representatives of the

employer and the building workers as may be prescribed by the State Government:

Provided that the number of persons representing the workers, shall, in no case, be

less than the persons representing the employer.

(2) In every establishment referred to in sub-section (1), the employer shall also

appoint a safety officer who shall possess such qualifications and perform such

duties as may be prescribed.

39. Notice of certain accidents.- (1) Where in any establishment an accident occurs

which causes death or which causes any bodily injury by reason of which the

person injured is prevented from working for a period of forty-eight hours or more

immediately following the accident, or which is of such a nature as may be

prescribed, the employer shall give notice thereof to such authority, in such form

and within such time as may be prescribed.

(2) On receipt of a notice under sub-section (1) the authority referred to in that sub-

section may make such investigation or inquiry as it considers necessary.

(3) Where a notice given under sub-section (1) relates to an accident causing death of

five or more persons, the authority shall make an inquiry into such accident within

one month of the receipt of the notice.

40. Power of appropriate Government to make rules for the safety and health of

building workers.- (1) The appropriate Government may, by notification, make

rules regarding the measures to be taken for the safety and health of building

workers in the course of their employment and the equipment and appliances

necessary to be provided to them for ensuring their safety, health and protection,

during such employment.

(2) In particular, and without prejudice to the generality of the foregoing power, such

rules may provide for all or any of the following matters namely:

(a) the safe means of access to, and the safety of, any working place, including the



provision of suitable and sufficient scaffolding at various stages when work cannot

be safety done from the ground or from any part of a building or from a ladder or

such other means of support;

(b) the precautions to be taken in connection with the demolition of the whole or any

substantial part of a building or other structure under the supervision of a

competent person and the avoidance of danger from collapse of any building or

other structure while removing any part of the framed building or other structure

by shoring by otherwise;

(c) the handling or use of explosive under the control of competent persons so that there

is no exposure to the risk of injury from explosion or from flying material;

(d) the erection, installation, use and maintenance of transporting equipment, such as

locomotives, trucks, wagons and other vehicles and trailers and appointment of

competent persons to drive or operate such equipment;

(e) the erection, installation, use and maintenance of hoists, lifting appliances and

lifting gear including periodical testing and examination and heat treatment, where

necessary, precautions to be taken while raising or lowering loads restrictions on

carriage of persons and appointment of competent persons on hoists or other lifting

appliances;

(1) the adequate and suitable lighting of every workplace and approach therto, of

every place where raising or lowering operations with the use of hoists, lifting

appliances or lilfting gears are in progress and of all openings dangerous to

building workers employed;

(g) the precautions to be taken to prevent inhalation of dust, fumes, gases or vapours

during any grinding, cleaning, spraying or manipulation of any material and steps

to be taken to securee and maintain adequate ventilation of every working place or

confined space;

(h) the measures to be taken during stacking or unstacking, stowing or unstowing of

materials or goods or handling in connection therewith;

(i) the safeguarding of machinery including the fencing of every fly-wheel and every

movifng part of a prime mover and every part of transmission or other machinery,

unless it is such a position or of such construction as to be safe to every worker

working on any of the operations and as if it were securely fenced;

(j) the safe hanling and use of plant, including tools and equipment operated by

compressed air;

(k) the precaution to be taken in case of fire;

(1) the limits of weight to be lifted or moved by workers;



(m) the safe transport of workers to or from any workplace by water and provision of

means for rescue from drowning;

(n) the steps to be taken to prevent danger to workers from live electric wires or

apparatus including electrical machinery and tools and from overhead wires;

(o) the keeping of safety nets, safety sheets and safety belts where the special nature or

the circumstances of work render them necessary for the safety of the workers;

(p) the standards to be complied with regard to scaffolding, ladders and stairs, lifting

appliances, ropes, chains and accessories, earth moving equipments and floating

operational equipments;

(q) the precautions to be taken with regard to pile driving, concrete work, work with

hot asphalt, tar or other similar things, insulation work, demolition operations,

excavation, underground construction and handling materials;

(r) the safety policy, that is to say, a policy relating to steps to be taken to ensure the

safety and health of the building workers, the administartive arrangements therefor

and the matters connected therewith, to be framed by the employers and

contractors for the operations to be carried on in a building or other construction

work;

(s) the information to be furnished to the Bureau of Indian Standards established

under the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1986 (63 of 1986), regarding the use of

any article or process covered under that Act in a building or other construction

work;

(t) the provison and maintenance of medical facilities for building workers;

(u) any other matter concerning the safety and health of workers working in any

(v) of the operations being carried on in a building or other construciton work.

41. Framing of model rules for safety measures .- The Central Government may,

after considering the recommendation of the expert committee constituted under

section 5, frame model rules in respect of all or any of the matters specified in

section 40 and where any such model rules have been framed in respect of any

such matter, the appropriate Government shall, while making any rules in respect

of that matter under section 40, so far as is practicable, conform to such model

rules.



2. THE BUILDING AND OTHER CONSTRUCTION WORKER’S

(REGULATION OF EMPLOYMENT AND CONDITIONS OF SERVICE)

CENTRAL RULES, 1998.

GENERAL PROVISIONS

34. Excessive noise, vibration, etc.- An employer shall ensure at a construction site of

a building or other construction work that adequate measures are taken to protect

building workers against the harmful effects of excessive noise or vibration at such

construction site and the noise level in no case exceeds the limits laid down in

Schedule VI annexed to these rules.

35. Fire protection.- An employer shall ensure at a construction site of a building or

other construction work that,-

(a) such construction site is provided with

(i) fire extinguishing equipment sufficient to extinguish any probable fire at such

construction site;

(ii) an adequate water supply at ample pressure as per national standards;

(iii) number of tamed jpersons required to operate the fire extinguishingequipment

provided under sub-clause (i);

(b) fire extinguishing equipment provided under sub-clause (i) of clause (a) is properly

maintained and inspected at regular intervals of not less than once in a year by the

responsible person and a record of such inspections is maintained;

(c) in case of every launch or boat or other craft used for transport of building workers

and thee cabin of every lifting appliance including mobile crane adequate number

of portable fire extinguishing equipment of suitable type shall be provided at each

of such launch or boat o craft or lifting appliance.

36. Emergency action plans.- An employer shall ensure at a construction site of a

building or other construction work that in case more than five hundred building

workers are employed at such construction site emergency action plan to handle

the emergencies like-(a) fire and explosion,

(b) collapse of lifting appliances and transport equipment,

(c) collapse of building, sheds or structures etc.,

(d) gas leakage or spillage of dangerous goods or chemicals,

(e) drowning of building workers, sinking of vessels, and

(f) land slides getting building worker buried, floods, storms and other nature

calamities, is prepared and submitted for the approval of the Director General.

37. Fencing of motors, etc.- An employer shall ensure at a construction site of a

building or other construction work that.

(a) all motors cogwheels, chains and friciton gearing, flywheels, shafting, dangerous



and moving parts of machinery (whether or not driven by mechanical power) and

steam pipes are securely fenced or lagged;

(b) the fencing of dangeerous parts of machinery is not removed while such machinery

is in motion or in use;

(c) no part of any machinery which is in motion and which is not se urely fenced is

examined, lubricated, adjusted or repaired except by a person skilled for such

examination, lubrication, adjustment or repairs;

(d) machine parts are cleaned when such machine is stopped.

(e) when a machine is stopped forservicing or repairs, adequate measures are taken to

ensure that such machine does not re-start inadvertently.

38. Lifting and carrying of excessive weight.- An employer shall ensure at a

construction site of a building or other construction work that.-

(a) no building worker lifts by hand or carriess overhead or over his backd or

shoulders any material, article, tool or appliances exceeding in weight the

maximum limits set dout in the following table:

TABLE

Person Maximum Weight Load

Adult man 55 kg

Adult woman 30kg

Adolescent male 30kg

Adolescent female 20 kg

Unless aided by any other building worker or a mechanical device.

(b) no building worker aided by other building workers, lift by hand or carry overhead

or over their back or shoulders, any material, article, tool or appliance exceeding in

weight the sun total of maximum limits set out for each building worker separately

under clause (a), unless aided by a mechanical device.

39. Health and safety policy.-(l) (a) Every establishment employing fifty or more

building workers shall prepare a written statement statement of policy in respect of

safety and health of building workers and submit the same for the approval of the

Director General;

(b) the policy referred to in clause (a) shall contain the following, namely:

(i) the intentions and commitments of the extablishment regarding health, safety and

environmental protection of building workers;

(ii) organisational arrangements made to carry out the policy referred to in clause (a)

specifying the responsibility at different levels of hierarchy;



(iii) responsibilities of the principle employer, contractor, sub-contractor, transporter or

other agencies involved in the building or other construction work;

(iv) techniques and methods for assessment of risk to safety health and environment

and remedial measures thereof;

(v) arrangements for training of building workers, trainers, supervisors or other

persons engaged in the construction work;

(vi) other arrangements for making the policy referred to in clause (a), effective;

(c) the intention and commitment referred to in sub-clause (i) clause (b) shall be taken

into account in making decisions reelating to plant, machinery, equipment,

materials and placement of building workers.

(2) A copy of the policy refered to in clause (a) of sub-rule (1). Signed by an

authorised signatory shall be sent to the Central Government.

(3) The establishment shall revise the policy referred to in clause (a) of subrule (1) as

often as necessary under the following circumstances, namely:

(i) Whenever any expansion or modification having implication on safety and health

of the building workers is made in such buildding or other construction work; or

(ii) Whenever any new building or other construction work, substances, articles or

techniques are intoduced having implication on health and safety of building

workers.

(4) A copy of the policy referred to in sub-clause (a) of sub-rule (1) shall be displayed

at the conspicious places in Hindi and a local language understood by the majority

of building workers at a construction site.

40. Dangerous and harmful environment .- An employer shall ensure at a

construction site of a building site of a building or other construction work that,-

(a) When an internal combustion engine exhausts into a confined space or excavation

or tunnel or any other workplace where neither natural ventilation nor artificial

ventilation system is adequate to keep the carbon monoxide content of the

atmosphere below fifty partss per million, adequate and suitable measures are

taken at such workplace in order to avoid exposure of building workers to health

hazards;

(b) no building workers is allowed to enter any confined space or tank or trench or

excavation wherein there is given off any dust, fum,es or other impurities of such

nature and to such extent as is likeliy to be injurious or offensive to the building

worker or in which explosives, poisonous, noxious or gaseous material or other



hannful articles have been carried or stored or in which has been fumigated or in

which there is a possibility of oxygen dificiency, unless all practical steps have

been taken to remove such dust, fumes, or oother impurities and dangers which

may be present and to prevent any further ingress thereof, and such workplace or

tank or trench or excavation is certified by the responsible person to be safe and fit

for the entry of such building workers.

41. Overhead protection.-(l) The employer shall ensure at the building or other

construction work that overhead preotection is erected along the periphery of every

building under construction which shall be of fifteen metres or more in height

when complete.

(2) Over head protection referred to in sub-rule (1) shall not be less than two metres wide

and shall be erected at a height not more than five metres above the base of the

building and the outer edge of such overhead protection shall be one hundred fifty

millimeters higher than the inner edge thereof shall be erected at an angle of not more

than twenty degrees to its horizontal sloping into the building.

(3) The employer shall ensure at the building and other construction work that any

area exposed to risk of falling material, article or objects is roped off or cordoned

off or otherwise suitably guarded from inadvertent entry of persons other than

building workers at work in such area.

42. Slipping, tripping, cutting, drowning and falling hazards.- (1) All

passageways, platforms and other places of construction work at the building

or other construction work shallbe kept by the employer free from

accumulation of dust, debris or similar material and from other obstructions

that may cause tripping.

(2) Any sharp projections or protruding nails or similar projections which

may cause any cutting hazard to a building, worker at the building or other

construction work shall be remeoved or other wise made safe by taking

suitalbe measures by the employer.

(3) No employer shall allow any building worker at building workerf at

building or other construction work to use the passageway, or a scaffold,

platform or any other elevated working surface which is in a slippery and

dangerous condition and shall ensure that water, grease, oil or other similar

substances, which may cause the surface slippery, be removed or sanded, saw

dusted or covered with suitable material to make it safe from slipping hazard

at a building or other construction work.

(4) Wherever building workers at a building or other construction work are

exposed to the ( hazard of falling into water, they shall be provided by the

employer with adequate equipment

for saving themselves from drowning and rescuingg from such hazard and if

the Director General considers necessary, well-equipped boat or launch



manned with trained personnel shall be provided by the employer at the site

of such work.

(5) Every open side or opening into or through which a building worker,

vehicle or lifting appliance or other equipments may fall at a building or other

construction work shall be covered or guarded suitably by the employer to

prevent such fall except where free access is necessary by reasons of the

nature of the work.

(6) Wherever building workers at a building or other construction work are

exposed to the hazards of falling from height while emplyed on such work,

they shall be provided by the employer with adequate equipment or means for

saving them from such hazards. Such equipment or means shall be in

accordance with the national standards.

(7) Whenever there is possibility of falling of any material, equipment or building

worker at a construction site relating to a building or other construction work,

adequate and suitable safety net shall be provided by employer in accordance with

the national standards.

43. Dust, gases, fumes, etc.- An employer shall prevent concentration of dust, gases or

fumes by providing suitable means to control their concentration within the

permissible limit so that they may not cause injury or pose health hazard to a

building worker at a building or other construction work.

44. Corrosive substances .- The employer shall ensure that corrosive substances,

including alkalis and acidsf, shall be stored and used by a person dealing with such

substances at a building or other construction work in such a manner that is does not

endanger the buildifng worker and suitable protective equipment shall be provided

by the employer to a building worker during handling or use of such substances at a

building or other construction work and in case of spillage of such substances on the

buildifng worker, immediate remedial measure shall be taken by the employer.

45. Eye protection.- Suitable personal protective equipment for the protection of eyes

shall be provided by an employer and used by the building worker engaged in

operation like welding, culling, chippping,grinding or similar operations which may

cause hazard to his eyes at a building or other construction work.

46. Head protection and other preotective apparel.- (1) Every building worker

required to pass through or work within the areas at building or other construction

work where there is hazard of his being struck by falling objects or materials shall be

provided by the employer with safety helmets of type and tested in accordance will

the national standards.

(2) Every building workers required to work in water or in wet concrete or in other similar

work at a building or other construction work, shall be provided with suitable

waterproof boots by the employer.



(3) Every building worker required to work in rain or in similar wet condition at building

or other construction work, shall be provided with waterproof coat with hat by the

employer.

(4) Every building worker required to use or handle alkalies, acid or other similar

corrosive substances at a building or other construction work shall be provided with

appropriate protective equipment by an employer, in accordance with the national

standards.

(5) Every building worker engaged in handling sharp objects or materials at a building or

other construction work which may cause hand injury, shall be provided with suitable

hand-gloves by the employer, in accordance with the national standards.

47. Electrical hazards .- Before commencement of any buildings or other construction

work, the employer shall take adequate measures to preveent any worker from coming

into physical contact with any electrical equipment or apparatus, machines or live

electrical circuit which may cause electrical hazard during the course of his

employment at a building or other construction work.

(2) The emplyer shall display and maintain suitable warning wigns at conspicuous places

at a building or other construction work in Hindi and in a local language understood by

the majority of the building workers.

(3) In workplaces at a building or other construction work where the exact location of

underground electric poweer line is not known, the building workers using jack

hammers, crow bars or other hand-tools which may come in contact with a live

electrical line, shall beprovided by the employer with insulated protrective gloves and

footwear of the type in accordance with the national standards.

(4) The employer shall ensuree that, as far as practicable, no wiring , which may come in

contact with water or which may be mechanically damaged, is left on ground or floor

at a building or other construction work.

(5) The employer shall ensure that, electrical appliances and current carrying equipment

used at a building or other construction work are made of sound material and are

properly and adequately earthed.

(6) The employer shall ensure that all electrical installations at a building or other

construction work comply with the requirements of any law for the time being in

force.

48. Vehicular traffic.- (1) Whenever any building or other construction work is being

carried on, or is located in close proximity to a road or any otherr place where any

vehicular traffic may cause danger to building workers, the employer shall ensure that

such building or other construction work is barricaded and suitable warning signs and

lights displayed or erected to preveent such danger and if necessary, he may make a

request in writing to the concerned authorities to control such traffic.



(2) The employer shall ensure that all vehicles used at construction site of a building or

other construction work comply with the requirements of the Motor Vehicles Act,

1988 (59 o9f 1988) and the rules made thereunder.

(3) The employer shall ensure that a driver of a vehicle of any class or description

operating at a construction site of a building or other construction work holds a valid

drivifng licnese under the Motor Vehicles Act. 1988 (59 of 1988).

49. Stablity of structures.- The employer shall ensure that no wall, chemney or other

structure or part of a structure is left unguarded in such condition that it may fall,

collapse or weaken due to wind pressure, vibration or due to any other reason at a site

of a building or other construction work.

50. Illumination of passageways, etc.- The employer shall ensure that illumination

sufficient for maintaining safe working conditions at a site of a buildifng or other

construction work is provided where building workers are required to work or pass and

for passageways. stairways and landing, such illumination is not less than that

provided in the relevant national standards.

51. Stacking of materials.- The employer shall ensure, at a construction site of a building

or other construction work that-

(a) all building materials are stored or stacked in a safe and orderly manner to avoid

obstruction of any passageway or place of work;

(b) material piles are stored or stacked in such a manner as to ensure stability;

(c) material or equipment is not stored upon any floor or platform in such quantity as to

exceed its safe carrying capacity;

(d) material or equipment is not stored or placed so close to any edge of a floor or

platform as to endanger the safety of persons below or working in the vicinity.

52. Disposal of debris.- The employer shall ensure at a construction site of a building or

other construction work that-

(a) debris are handled and disposed of by a method which does not cause danger to the

safety of a person;

(b) debris are not allowed to accumulate so as to constdutute a hazard;

(c) debris are kept sufficiently moist to bring down the dust within the permissible limit;

(d) debris are not thrown inside or outside from any height of such buildings or other

construction work;

(e) on completion of work, left over building material, article or other substance or debris

are disposed of as soon as possible toi avoid any hazard to any traffic or person.



53. Numbering and marking of floors.- The employer shall ensure that each floor or

level of a building or other construction work is appropriately numbered or marked at

the landing of such floor or levlel.

54. Use of safety helmets and shoes.- The employer shall ensure that all persons who are

performing any work or services at a building or other construction work, wear safety

shoes and helmets conforming to the national standards.

SAFETY ORGANISATION

208. Safety Committees.-(1) Every establishment wherin five hundred or more

building workers are ordinarily employed, there shall be a Safety Committee

constituted by the employer which shall be represented by equal number of

representatives of employer and building workers employed in such establishment.

In no case the number of representatives of the employer shall be represented by

representatives of the recognised unions wherever such unions exist.

(2) The main functions of the Safety Committee shall be -

(a) to identify probable causes of accident and unsafe practices in building or other

construction work and to suggest remedial measures;

(b) to stimulate interest of employer and buildifng workers in safety by organising

safety weeks, safety competition, talks and film shows on safety, preparing posters

or taking similar other measures as and when required or as necessary

(c) to go round the construction site with a view to check unsafe practices and detect

unsafe conditions and to recommend remedial measures for their rectification

includifng First Aid Medical and Welfare Facilities;

(d) to look into the health hazrds associated wwith handling different types of

explosives, chemicals and other construction material and to suggest remedial

measures including use of proper personal protective equipment;

(e) to suggest measures for improving welfare amenities in the construction site and

other miscellaneous aspects of safety, health and welfare in building or other

construction work;

(f) to bring to the notice of the employer the hazards associated with use, handling

andd maintenance of the equipment used during the course of building and other

construction work.

(3) The Safety Committee shall meet at regular intervals at least once in a month and it

shall be chaired by the senior person having overall control over the affairs of the

construction site.



(4) The agenda and minutes of the meeting shall be circulated to all concerned and it

shall be in the language understood by majority of the building workers and shall

be produced to the Inspector on demaind for inspection.

(5) The decisions andd recommendations of the Safety Committee shall be complied

with by the employer within reasonable time limits.

209. Safety Officer.-(1) In every establishment wherein five hundred or more building

workers are ordinarily employed, the employer shall appoint Safety Officers as per

the scale laid down in Schedule VIII annexed to these rules, Such Safety Officers

May be assisted by suitable and adequate staff.

(2) Duties, qualifications and the conditions of Safety Officers appointed under sub-

rule (1) shall be as provided in Schedule VIII annexed to these rules.

(3) Wherever number of workers employed by single employer is less than five

hundred, such employers with prior permission of Director General.

210. Reporting of accidents .-(1) Notice of any accident on the construction site which

either-

(a) causes loss of life, or

(b) disables a building worker from working for a perios of forty-eight hours or more

immediately following the accident, shall forthwith be went by telegram,

telephone, fax or similar other means including special messenger within four

hours in case of fatal accidents and seventy-two hours, in case of other accidents

involving building worker, to

(i) the Regional Labour Commissioner (Central), having jurisdiction in the area in

which the establishment in which such accident or dangerous occurrence took

place is located. Such Regional Labour Commissioner (Central) shall be the

authority appointed under section 3 of the Act;

(ii) the Board with which the building worker involved in accident was registered as a

beneficiary;

(iii) the Director General, and

(iv) the next of kin or other relative of building worker involved in accident.

(2) Notice of any accident at a construciton site of a building or other construction

work which-

(a) cause loss of life; or

(b) disables such building worker from work for more than ten days following the



accident, shall also be sent to

(i) the officer incarge of the nearest police station;

(ii) the District Magistrate or if the District Magistrate by order so desires to the

Sub-Divisional Magistrate.

(3) In the case of an accident falling under clause (b) of sub-rule (1) or clause (b) of

sub-rule (2) the injured building worker shall be given first-aid and immediately

thereafter be transferred to a hospital or other place for medical treatment.

(4) Where any accident causing disablement subsequently result in death of a building

worker, notice in writing of such death shall bee communicated to the authorities

as mentioned in sub-rule (1) and sub-rule (2) within seventy-two hours of such

death.

(5) The following classes of dangerous occurrences shall bee reported to the Inspector

having jurisdiction, whether or not any death or disablenment is caused to a

building worker, in the manner prescribed ifn sub-rule (1), namely

(a) collapse or failure of lifting appliances or hoist or conveyors or other similar

equipment for handling building or construction material or breakage or failure of

rope, chain or loose gears; overturning of crane used in building or other

construction work; falling of objects from height;

(b) collapse or subsidence of soil, any wall, floor, gallery, roof or any other part of any

structure, platform, staging, scaffolding or any means of access including

formwork;

(c) contact work, excavation, collapse of transmission;

(d) explosion of receiver or vessel used for storage, at a pressure greater than

atmospheric pressure, of any gas or gases or any liquid or solid used as building

material;

(e) fire and explosion causing damage to any place on construction site where building

workers are employed;

(f) spillage or leakage of hazardous substances and damage to their container;

(g) collapse, capsizing, toppling or collision of transport equipment;

(h) leakage or releaseof harmful toxic gases at the construction site.

(6) In case of failure of a lifting appliance, loose gear, hoist or building and other

construction work machinery and transport equipment at a construction site of a

building or other construction work, such appliances gear, hoist, machinery or

equipment and the site of such appliances, gear, hoist, machinery or equipment and

the site of such occurrence shall, as far as practicable, be kept undistrubed until

inspected by the inspector having jurisdiction.

(7) Every notice given under sub-rule (1), sub-rule(2) or sub rule (4) shall be followed

by a written report to the Inspector, authority under section 39 of the Act, the



Board and the Director General in Form XIV under proper acknowledgement.

211. Procedure for enquiry into causes of accident or dangerous occurrence.- (1)

The enquiry under sub-section (2) or sub-section (3) of section39 of the Act, as the

casee may be, shall bee conducted by the authority referred to in such-clause (i) of

clause (b) of sub-rule (1) rule 210, in the following manner, namely:

(a) the enquiry shall be commenced as early as it may be, and in any case, within

fifteen days of the receipt of notice of accident or dangerous occurrence under rule

210;

(b) the enquiry may be conducted by the authority referred to in sub-clause (i) clause

(b) of sub-rule (1) of rule 210 himself or by an enquiry officer appointed by such

authority; (c) the authority or enquiry officer, as the case may be, shall serve or

cause to be served, notices in writing, informing the date, time and place of such

enquiry to all persons entitled to appear in such enquiry and whose names and

addresses are known to such authority or enquiry officer.

(d) notwithstanding the provision of clause (b), for the purpose of notifying other

persons who may in any way be concerned or be inerested in such enquiry, the

authority or enquiry officer, as the case may be,may publish notice of such

ednquiry in one or more local newspapers, informing the date, time and place of

such enquiry.

(2) The person entitled to appear at the enquiry may include-

(a) an inspector or any officer of the Central Governfment or the State Government or

an undertaking or public body concerned with the enforcement or compliance of

safety provisions of the Act and the rules in the concerned establishment;

(b) a trade union or a workers’ association oran employers’ association;

(c) the worker involved in the accident or his legal heir or authorised representative;

(d) the owner of the premises in which the accident took place;

(e) any other person, at the discreation of the authority or the enquiring officer, as the

case may be, who may be interested in or be concerned with the clause of an

accident or may have knowledge about such cause or is likely to give material

evidence or produce a relevant document in conneciton with such accident or

dangerous occurrence.

(3) In, case the entitled person referred to in sub-rule (2) is a body corporate, a

company, or any other organisation, association, group of persons such group may

be represented through an authorised representatives including a counsel or a

solicitor.

(4) Subject to the provisions of sub-rule (5) the enquiry shall be held in public.

(5) In cases where-

(a) the Central Governent is of the opinion that the matter of the enquiry or any part of

it are of such nature that it would be against the interest of national security to hold

the enquiry in public and directs thç said authority or the enquiry officer, as the



case may be, to hold the enquiry in camera;or

(b) on an application made by any party to the enquiry, the authority or the enquiry

officer, as the case may be, referred to in sub-rule (1), if it or he is of the opinion

that the holding of public enquiry will lead to disclosure of information relating to

a trade secret, decides to hold the endquiry of such part of it in camerad, such

enquiry shall not be held in public.

(6) Information disclosed by any person during the course of hearing or evidence in

the cases covered under sub-rule (5) shall not be disclosed to any person exept for

the purpose of the endquiry.

(7) The person entitled to appear unde sub-rule (2), called for evidence or

representating in an enquiry shall be entitled to make an opening statement, give

evidence, request the enquiry officer to call for specified document or evidence,

cross-examine other person or to the extent and at the stage permitted by the

authority or enquiry officer holding the enquiry.

(8) Any evidence in an enquiry may be admitted at the discreation of the authority or

enquiry officer during the enquiry, who may, also direct that documents to be

tendered in evidence may be inspected by any person entitled or permitted to

appear at such enquiry and that facilities be afforded to such person to take or

obtain copies thereof.

(9) The authority or the enquiry officer holding an enquiry may authorise any perrson,

being an officer of the central Government, to assist such authority or enquiry

officer where necessary, for the purpose of conducting the enquiry, and the officer

so authorised may enter the premises of the concerned establishment dduring

working hours, inspect the records relevant to such enquiry, investigate and take

such evidence as may be required to conduct such enquiry.

(10) The findings of the enquiry along with all evidence, in original including statments

of witnesses shall be forwarded to the authority specified under section 39 of the

Act within five days of the completio of the enquiry in cases where sub-enquiry

was not conducted by such authority itself.

(11) A copy of the findings along with a brief statement of facts relating to an enquiry

conducted under this rule shall be forwarded to the Director General and the

Central Government by the authority referred to in sub-rule (1) of rule 210



SECTION – 8

TECHNICAL

SPECIFICATIONS



CONTENTS

SL.

NO

DESCRIPTION

1. INTENT OF SPECIFICATION

2. SCOPE OF WORK

3. PROCESS DESCRIPTION, DESIGN CRITERIA & OPERATION

PHILOSOPHY

4. TERMINAL AUTOMATION SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

5. LINE MOUNTED EQUIPMENT , TAPPING POINTS

6. BATTERY LIMITS

7. APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

8. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

9. TECHNICL SPECIFICATION FOR AUTOMATION SYSTEM

10. TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ENGINEERING,

ERECTION, TESTING & COMMISSIONING

11. SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TEST

12. DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS TO BE FURNISHED

13. SUBMISSION SCHEDULE FOR SOME OF THE IMPORTANT

DOCUMENTS

14. PLANT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

15. PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

16. POST WARRANTY MAINTENANCE CONTRACT

17. ENCLOSURES



1.0 INTENT OF SPECIFICATION

M/s Hindustan Petroleum Corporation Limited (HPCL) is setting up a new

terminal at Jaipur along the route of the cross-country pipeline from Mundra to

Delhi. The terminal will receive, store and dispatch all or some of the products viz.

MS, SKO and HSD.

This document serves as technical specification for Instrumentation and

automation of the operations at the Terminal.

2.0 SCOPE OF WORK

The scope of work consists of the following at Jaipur terminal:

Design, engineering, supply, erection, testing, commissioning and system

stabilisation of the Instrumentation and Automation requirements for Terminal

Automation System (TAS) of HPCL terminal.

The major areas identified for automation are:

1. Tank farm operation

2. Tank truck loading operation

3. Tank truck entry / exit system

4. Product pump operation

5. Fire water pump operation

6. Borewell / makeup water pump operation

Broad scope of work at each terminal is given below. However the tenderer to note

that the responsibility of executing the ‘TAS’ inline with total requirements of the

detailed specification / P&ID, etc rests with him once the order is placed on him.

The product is received through pipelines from cross country pipeline stations

located near the terminal. The products handled are MS, HSD, & SKO. The

products are stored in Floating roof vertical tanks. The storage tanks shall be

provided with Radar type level measurement, multi point temperature

measurement, Water level measurement and pressure transmitter for density

measurement. The tank body valves are motor operated and these shall be

automated. Facilities are planned for Slop transfer and Tank to Tank transfer.

Pump operation shall be automated in terminal.

Truck loading Gantry consisting of 8 bays is envisaged for loading different

products. The gantry operation is fully automated. Automated Blending of MS

with Ethanol shall be possible.

Automated barrier gates shall be provided in the terminal for restricting the entry

of unauthorized personnel into the licensed area.



The details of the tanks, pumps and distribution of loading points are enclosed in

the annexure. Selected data regarding tank valve status, level of products in tanks,

fire alarm signals etc shall be made available in the pipeline control room.

2.2 INSTRUCTIONS TO THE TENDERERS

Before submitting techno-commercial bids the tenderer shall visit and study the

location. The vendor shall submit a detailed proposal in Technical Bid indicating

the quantum of works involved in automating the system.

The major activities performed by terminal are the following:

a) Receipt of product through pipeline.

b) Storage facilities for MS, SKO and HSD.

c) Road loading / unloading system

d) Sump & Slop system

e) Fire water pump system.

f) Borewell / Makeup water pump operation

Full fledged Terminal automation system (TAS) is envisaged for these units. This

includes:

a) Tank Farm management system (TFM)

b) Truck data management sub system (TDM) / JDE system

c) Bay queuing

d) Tank truck loading

e) Station control system

f) Terminal security system ( TSS)

g) Fire water system operation

h) Borewell / Makeup water pump operation

i) Integration with VFD system

Tenderer shall make sure that commissioning of all the instruments / equipment

and SAT shall be completed within six months of receiving Letter of Intent.

Stabilization period is not included in the completion period.

The automation tenderer shall carry out day to day activity after taking necessary

hot / cold work permits.

Tenderer shall deploy an qualified and experienced engineer exclusively at site

during the entire execution period.

Automation facilities have been envisaged with a view to ensure safety and ease

the operation of most critical areas of the terminals like product receipt, storage

and loading. Service requirements such as scheduling, invoicing, accounting, sales,

stock control, terminal security (restricting entry of unauthorised personnel into

licensed area), maintenance etc. to be carried out at the terminal shall be taken care

of.



The tenderer shall ensure that all the safety procedures are followed during

erection, testing and commissioning. All the safety norms as per OISD 192 shall be

followed.

Automation tenderer shall appoint a supervisor who shall be available through out

the working time and shall be responsible for taking permits and observing safety

and security regulation of the terminal.

2.3 SUPPLY

The scope of work of Tenderer shall include all the items as per enclosure

“Schedule of Quantities”, to make the system complete in all respects, to meet the

technical requirements as spelt out in this specification. Any balance items which

are not explicitly spelt out here, but are required for the completeness of the work

shall also be included under the respective items. Tenderer shall list out the same

and submit it with the offer.

Apart from the above, the following items are also included in the scope of work

of the Tenderer.

1. Erection materials including pipe fittings, perforated cable trays with cover,

cable racks, conduits, junction boxes, pull boxes, clamps, compression fitting,

cable glands, instrument supports, channels, angles, local cabinets and other

materials for completeness of erection. The erection materials shall also be

suitable to the area classification.

2. UPS Power supply, distribution cabinets / boxes, power pack units, fully wired

panels, control desks and cabinets .

3. Power supply equipment including isolation transformer, circuit breakers,

switches, fuses etc.

4. Impulse pipes, GI conduits as required.

5. Tenderer shall furnish recommendations for the grounding (Earthing) of the

system supplied by him along with the offer (Both in field and control room).

Provision of the grounding system for the entire supplied system for protective,

electronic earthing and providing suitable earth pits is in the scope of this

tender. The electronic earth shall have a resistance of less than 1 Ohm.

6. Supply and laying of cables of all types inside suitable conduits / trenches (to

be provided by the Tenderer) including dressing, ferruling, glanding and

termination. Tenderer shall also supply MCT for taking cables inside the

automation control room.

7. Design, engineering, supply, installation and termination at both ends of the

following cables shall be under the scope of work of the Tenderer.

a) All analog, digital & other signal cables from field to control room.

b) All data communication cables including special computer cables

c) Remote I/O cable between MCC room and control room PLC.

d) Communication cable between MCC room and Control room for data

exchange regarding VFDs.



e) Cabling between Local control station (of motor etc) and control room

f) All power supply cables from UPS to all Instrumentation and Automation

equipment and computer system.

g) Optical fibre along with conversion kit shall be considered for inter

building LAN cabling if the distance between the two buildings are more

than 100 M.

8. The total quantum of all types of cables required for Instrumentation and

Terminal automation system is included in the scope of work of the Tenderer

on lump-sum basis for terminal. They will be supplied and laid as per

specification.

9. The layout of the plant is enclosed to facilitate the Tenderer to estimate the

cable requirement. The Tenderer shall quote for the quantum of cables for the

terminal as lot. Any variations of the actual quantity to the estimated quantum

will be to the Tenderer's account only and no extra claim shall be entertained.

10. The plant trenches shall also be made by the tenderer and is included in the

scope. Trenching of proper size/depth along with laying of 6” thick sand

cushion below and above the cables along with covering of the entire width of

trench with approved quality of bricks shall be done.

11. Consumables (e.g. ink, papers for the printer) during commissioning and also

for 3 months thereafter. Tentative quantity for the terminal shall be as under:

a) Dot matrix printer cartridge – 20 nos.

b) Black ink for laserjet printer – 3 nos.

c) Cut sheet (A4) – 10 Quire

d) Batteries, oil and grease

e) Commissioning spares

12. Commissioning spares. List of commissioning spares shall be furnished.

13. Cost for comprehensive maintenance for 5 years including supply of spares

after warranty period of 2 years.

14. Training shall be imparted to minimum 2 HPCL personnel for 2 weeks in the

terminal connected with operation, maintenance and system engineering

aspects.

3.0 PROCESS DESCRIPTION, DESIGN CRITERIA & OPERATION

PHILOSOPHY

3.1 A computerized automation system is envisaged for HPCL Terminal. The basic

operation of the terminal is to store various types and grades of petroleum

products. The petroleum products are delivered to the Tank Farm from pipe heads

of cross-country pipeline.

The pipeline is branched off into main lines, which in turn connects to groups of

tanks. These tanks are used for storing products viz. MS, HSD , SKO and SLOP.



The details of terminal is enclosed as annexure. The details include the number of

tanks with products, distribution of products in various bays and the pump details.

The following activities shall be controlled by the terminal automation system.

a) Tank Truck Entry sub system

b) Road Dispatching Facilities / Tank truck loading

c) Truck loading Bay queuing

d) Tank Farm Management

e) Pump Automation

f) Fire water system

g) Terminal security system

3.2 DESIGN CRITERIA

3.2.1 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR ROAD DESPATCHING FACILITIES

Road loading of the products shall be on a volumetric basis and fully automated. The

products shall be dispensed using PD meters and loading arms at the respective

loading points.

The design basis is given below:

1. Top loading of the truck shall be done. A drop pipe of 3" dia shall be

considered for each truck loading arm.

2. Road loading shall be carried out by means of dedicated road loading pumps.

3. Road loading facilities shall be provided with loading arm, PD meter, Set Stop

Valve and flow cut off protection. Separate flow metering system and separate

loading arm are provided for each product at a loading point.(Note: Supply

and installation of loading arm is excluded from the scope of this tender.

However, the installation of position sensor and overfill protection unit

supplied by other vendor is included in the scope including the necessary

cabling work)

4. A dedicated batch controller shall be provided for each loading point for

controlling the loading activities of the particular loading point.

5. Ethanol blending and additive injection is considered for all MS loading points.

6. Unloading point for MS, SKO and HSD is provided at each bay for removing

the overfill quantities from the road tankers and products from sick /

contaminated tankers. The unloaded material shall be routed into the individual

underground sump / slop tanks under gravity / pump depending on their

location. The sump tank contents shall be pumped back to the respective

product tanks. No automation is involved in this activity.

7. Mobile Calibration facility with the aid of a 2000 liters capacity proving tank

along with all the accessories. Proving tank shall be mounted on a 4 wheel unit

with suitable leveling instrument etc. along with accessories required for

calibration. Mobile prover should have a flameproof pumpset of 200 LPM, 20

m total head and 30 m long armoured copper cable of suitable rating. Starter

and other accessories shall be included in the scope.



8. Two nos. of 1000 liters & 1 no. of 500 liters proving tanks shall be provided

for calibrating the tank trucks. The proving tanks shall be fixed type with top

filling facility and shall be provided with suitable pumpset and cable of

suitable rating. Starter and other accessories shall be included in the scope.

9. CRV & FRV tanks are provided with high accuracy radar gauge. Underground

tanks are also provided with lower accuracy radar gauge. Data of the

underground tank shall be available on the TAS. Volumetric data of each

product shall also be available as a part of tank farm management system.

10. All variants of particular product shall be handled by same loading arm. Same

truck shall have different variant of the same product loaded into different

compartment. The variants of the particular products could be any of the

following:

a) Base product with blending eg. MS with Ethanol for blending.

b) Base product with blending and two additives

c) Base product with blending and one additive eg. MS with ethanol and

additive for power grade MS.

d) Base product with one additive eg MS with additive for power grade MS .

e) Base product with Two additives

11. Vapour recovery system for the trucks is not envisaged.

3.2.3 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR TLF BAY ALLOCATIONS

� Generally 3 Tank Trucks (T/T) are queued up for loading at any point of time.

� When one truck is under loading, only two trucks can be waiting.

� Only if all the desired bays have one T/T under loading, second one will be

allotted as waiting truck.

� Only if the products cannot be filled by single loading bay, two bays will be

allotted for a single T/T.

3.2.4 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR TLF PUMP AUTOMATION

� Pump control is achieved through the PLC.

� Product loading pumps for TLF bay shall be started automatically.

� Pumps can be operated in local mode and remote mode.

� Operations of pumps are interlocked with the level of product in the tank.

� No. of pumps in operation is decided by the demand of the product / no. of

loading bays in operation/ Flow rate.

� Incase primary pump fails standby pump shall take over.

3.2.5 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR FIRE WATER PUMP AUTOMATION

� The fire water system is envisaged as a pressurized line (7Kg/cm2) system.

� Firewater pumps shall be diesel engine driven. Two numbers of jockey pumps

are also envisaged.

� Firewater pump automation is achieved through PLC.

� The electrical motor driven jockey pumps shall maintain the header pressure

between 5Kg/cm2 and 7Kg/cm

2



� Firewater pumps shall be activated by remote manual call points located at

various points in the terminal. Each Manual call point shall be separately wired

to PLC. Whenever a manual call point is activated, the pump shall start

automatically.

� If the pressure developed by one pump drops less than 7 Kg/cm2 second pump

shall start automatically.

� At any point of time a maximum of two pumps will be working and one shall

be standby.

� If any operational pump fails to start or develops defect the standby pump shall

come into operation.

� It shall be possible to operate the pumps manually too locally and from control

room.

3.2.5 ADDITIVE INJECTION SYSTEM

Additive dosing is envisaged for all products. Two loading points of each product

shall be provided with an additive dosing skid. The additive dosing skid shall be

dual module type capable of dosing two separate additives into the same loading

arm. Supply of additive skid unit including storage tanks, pumps, stainless steel

piping (SS 316) between pumps in the dosing shed and flowmeters inside the TT

Gantry, flowmeters, valves and necessary cables is included in the scope of this

tender. The additive blocks shall be of stainless steel (SS 316) construction. The

electrical flame proof starters for additive pumps shall be included in the scope.

3.2.6 DESIGN CRITERIA FOR MAKE UP WATER PUMP AUTOMATION

� Make up water system may be either by means of borewell pumps / make up

water pumps.

� The pumps shall start automatically whenever the level in any of the two water

tanks falls below 15 cm from the max level of the tank.

� Pumps will stop automatically when the level reaches max level.

� This operation is achieved through PLC.

� Necessary alarm logic shall be available in the control room.

It shall be possible to operate the pumps manually too, locally and from control

room.

3.3.1 OPERATION PHILOSOPHY AND LOADING OPERATION

1. All the Tank Trucks (T/T) will come to the Terminal and report at S & D

counter.

2. From the List of T/Ts in the database, TDM operator chooses the T/Ts and gets

them registered one by one. Load rack computer matches the requirement of

indents with availability of T/Ts and then searches for loading bay availability.

Operation is carried out in following order.

The commercial details of T/Ts are verified.



TDM Operator Decides:

a) Destination

Automatically decided by the system from the list of available indents and

other selection criterion. However the operator may decide / change the

destination in case of exigencies with Exception logging and approval from

authorised system administrator.

b) Product

c) Quantity

d) Seal Nos. / Abloy lock numbers

Load Rack Computer system (LRCS) downloads the information pertaining to

particular T/T from TDM, which in turn downloads the data to Tank Truck Entry

System (TTES).

TTES allocates Bay no., based on total no of T/T inside and 1 + 2 criteria for TLF

bay. TTES operator can override the bay allocation, if required. TTES operator

enters seal number on TTES screen, Card reader at TTES registers card no. on

FAN (Filling advice note). LRC sends a visual communication by means of

display on electronic display unit in T/T parking area, asking T/T to report for

filling bay. FAN is printed by TTES operator and is handed over to the driver

along with card and seals. Validity of card vis-a-vis time elapsed since time of

issue & expiry of FAN shall also be programmed.

T/T enters through main Gate of the terminal, reports at TLF entry gate Barrier.

Driver shows the card at Entry barrier gate card reader. Card validation is done by

LRC. Gate opens on command from PLC based on clearance from Load rack

computer of control room, and the T/T enters the licensed premises.

T/T reports for filling at the allocated bay. The RED lamp in the RIT is ON at

particular TLF bay. T/T driver shows the card at the card reader provided at the

bay. LRC checks its validity, sends the loading information to batch controller. If

card is not current or valid, Batch controller displays invalid card or unauthorized

card and RIT will display steady RED lamp. Upon successful completion of

identification sequences, truck registration no is displayed on batch controller.

Driver connects earthing to the T/T.

T/T driver inserts loading arm in the first compartment of T/T i.e. Starting from

T/T cabin side.

Batch controller checks for safety permissive interlocks. RIT lamp changes from

RED to YELLOW.

11. Driver prepares for loading and acknowledges by pressing yellow push button

on RIT. LRC checks for tank, which is in withdrawal mode to supply particular

product.

12. Green lamp on RIT is ON



13. Driver presses GREEN PB for actual start of loading operation. Flow of product

should not start unless all the mandatory checks are complied with.

14. (Step 9 to 13 are repeated till the loading is complete for all compartments of

T/T)

15. Batch controller uploads all other product meters of the bay and will only

permit flow of designated product. Batch controller continuously updates

present, remaining & volume loaded during loading operation. If a multiple load

is started on a multiple products bay, the driver may be allowed to fill both

products simultaneously. This should be supported as a configurable option

with LRC, which can be set for only one product active on bay.

16. After the T/T loading is complete, Supervisor at TLF checks sealing of all

chambers of the T/T, signs the FAN. T/T drives out of the bay and moves

towards TLF exit gate barrier.

16. Load rack computer will release the bay and meanwhile TDM operator prepares

the challan at the planning room

17. Supervisors will have unique card, which can be shown at the bay reader to

locally load the TT for any given quantity after setting the qty. in batch

controller. All historical data pertaining to such type of fillings will be recorded

in the LRC and at the bay, LRC will generate a report for the same i.e., the Bill

of lading (BOL)

18. T/T comes out of licensed premises, goes to security gate. Meanwhile T/T

driver collects the challan from marketing room. T/T driver hands over Gate

pass copy of challan and card to the security , who in turn shows the card to the

exit barrier card reader. LRC checks up in its database, whether the challan for

the particular truck has already been printed from the Marketing room and all

clear signal sent to PLC for opening of the exit gate at TLF. TT exists through

gate barrier.

19. Entire system will work on real time mode and will register entry, filling & exit

time of each Tank truck.

3.4 TANK FARM AUTOMATION

The tank farm management software should be developed by taking the data

directly from the tank farm and processing the raw data through the software in

such a fashion that the process control overview of the tanks are possible

simultaneously from single operator interface. The tank farm management

software shall be from the respective tank gauge manufacturers only.

Data from Tank farm

Control room should have all the information of tank , which includes:

1. Tank no., Product, Tank capacity

2. Product level and quantity. Also H, HH, L, LL levels

3. Product temperature inside the tank, at individual levels and averaged value

4. Density of the product in the tank.

5. Level of water in the tank.



6. Inventory of each product.

Tank Valves:

All Tank body valves are Motor operated. They shall be automated.

3.5 RECEIPT OF PRODUCT

All products will be received in the tanks through pipeline. Receipt module should

have following features:

Motor operated valves in the pipeline receipt manifold are automated and the valve

operation shall be interlocked to tank product level. The logic shall be made

consultation with the pipeline consultant of TAS and pipeline.

It shall be possible to operate the individual valves from control room.

3.6 MIS / Reports

All the reports shall be as per owner’s format.

a. End of Shift operations.

At the end of each business shift (As declared by the terminal operations

personnel), a number of activities occur that allow terminal personnel to reconcile

current inventory values against the shift's activities. The system shall perform an

end of shift. All transactions that occur between each end of shift process shall be

assigned a shift number.

A number of reports shall be generated at end of shift, and trial reports shall also

be generated through out the day, defined as activity from start-of-shift until time

of report generated. These reports are the following as minimum.

� Product Loading Summary Report

� Product Loading Detail Report

� Bay Loading Summary Report

� Bay Loading Detail Report

� Tank Truck Movement Report

� Tank Reconciliation Report

b. End of day Operations

At the end of each business day, a number of activities occur that allow terminal

personnel to reconcile current inventory values against the day's activities. The

system shall also allow the operator to start the end – of – day process, either

Manually or Automatically.

When the EOD is declared, the LRC system shall perform all the activities as

intended for EOD and store the product inventory data in its memory and it shall

be transmitted to TDM, as and when it is demanded by TDM system.

c. End of Month Operations



End of Month processing shall be similar to End-of Day processing, expect for

several key aspects such as:

� Month End is normally at midnight through user excersiable option on the last

day of the Month

� End of month could happen at a different time of day than normal End of Day

processing if chosen by the authorised operator.

� Pop up alarm indicating Month end

� Operator shall have the option of postponing EOM report

d. Product Inventory Management

� Stock Inventory

� Product reconciliation

� Generation of inventory reports

4.0 TERMINAL AUTOMATION SYSTEM – DESCRIPTION

4.1 System Architecture drawing is enclosed with the specification. The system

architecture drawing and description given in the specification defines the

functional requirement. There may be minor variations in the architecture

depending on the hardware of Tenderer. The Tenderer shall submit the most

suitable and economical system architecture satisfying the functional requirement

given in the specification. Also the Tenderer shall furnish the description of the

system hardware, software and functions.

Major automation equipment is housed in a control room. The control room houses

the Load Rack Computer, Gateway server, TTES computer, Operator Interface

Computers, Tank Farm Management Computer, TDM computer and Printers, the

PLC cabinets, Relay cabinets and UPS. The Control room is air-conditioned.

The marketing room houses 3 computers. One TDM computer , one Gateway

server and one TTES computer. These computers will be connected to the LRC by

means of under ground digital cables / fiber optic cables. Supply of computers,

printers, servers and their networking is in the scope of Tenderer.

4.2 TERMINAL DATA MANAGEMENT SYSTEM:

The TDM is a windows based machine. The JDE software given by M/S HPCL

performs the pre-loading operations. The interface between the TDM system and

LRC system is in the scope of the Tenderer.

One TDM machine is located in the marketing room and the other in the control

room. They are networked in hot redundancy mode. They are on LAN. They are

connected with Load Rack Computer (LRC) through Gateway Server. LRC will

act as central repository for all databases and information, used by various sub

systems. TDM shall be provided with features that facilitates all pre-loading

operations to be performed outside the licensed area in the Marketing room. The

following functions are performed by the TDM:



1. Register tank trucks which report for filling

2. Commercial verification of tank truck based on its databank

3. Recall & modify data corresponding to a truck registered earlier.

4. Transfer the truck data to the LRC server via gateway server

5. Generate FAN number

4.3 TANK TRUCK ENTRY SYSTEM:

Entry of truck into loading area shall be controlled by TTES with the help of

TDM & LRC computers. TTES shall issue a card of proximity type with the help

of TAS to the tank truck driver for the particular FAN generated by LRC to enter

the loading gantry. TTES shall also generate the invoice reports after the trucks are

filled.

The terminal shall be provided with automatic security system between licensed

loading area and non licensed area for tank truck movement in and out of these

areas. This is done through the computer controlled Card reader and automatic

barrier gates. Exit barrier gate is also automatic and is controlled from exit card

reader. After passing of each truck, the barrier gate shall close automatically based

on feedback from suitable IR sensors which shall be provided by vendor.

The tank truck driver shall show the card at the entry card reader. LRC shall read

the card label code and check to see whether it matches with that of any of the tank

trucks for which FAN slips have already been issued.

If the code matches with that of any of the tank trucks (TT) currently under

loading, then the RED lamp on the Card reader lights up to indicate, that the card

is not a valid one and the entry barrier gate remains closed.

The TTES will restrict entry to the tank truck (TT) under the following situations:

a) The card label code corresponds to a tank truck (TT) which has already been

loaded and the card is not surrendered by the driver or if a tank truck (TT) with

the same card code is already in the licensed area.

b) The card code has been invalidated by the operator.

A Card issued to a tank truck shall be valid only for the date of issue and specified

time duration from the time of issue. If the tank truck does not report at the entry

barrier gate within the specified duration, then the card shall be automatically

invalidated by the TAS and bay shall be released automatically.

The acceptance/ Rejection of the card shall be indicated in the card reader at the

entry barrier gate. A manual over ride control for opening and closing of gate shall

also be built into the system and the operation shall be possible at the gate. All

entry / exit operation shall be logged with TAS system including manual over ride

operation period shall be logged.



Functional requirements

The TTES shall cater to all pre-loading operational interaction and operator

interaction for all post loading documentation. The following operation shall be

possible from TTES Terminal, as a minimum.

� Registration of Truck which have reported for taking load at dispatch office

� Facility to create load details via suitable entry / editing screen

� Facility to cancel or modify the data corresponding to Truck registered earlier

� Facility to communicate with LRC to exchange load details and thus enabling

access control mechanism.

� To list all the pending orders registered.

� Preparation and issue of Filling Advice Note (FAN)

� Facility to manually over ride Loading Bay assigned by LRC

� Manual completion / adjustment of Load in the event of Bay or Truck

becoming sick and reauthorization of Trucks in order to move to another

loading bay, to complete filling.

� Facility to view current status of Loading Bays and Trucks under Queue or

loading.

� Facility to generate invoices / Delivery challans

� Issue of access control cards.

Single FAN is prepared for a tank truck. The FAN shall contain:

1. Tank Truck registration number

2. Product Name

3. Compartment wise capacity

4. Bay number

Following data should be displayed on TTES display.

1. Loading bay status

2. Compartment status

3. Loading arm status

4. Permissive status

4.4 BAY QUEUING SYSTEM:

LRC shall monitor the operational status of all the bays and their loading points at

the terminal. The Bay allocation logic shall ensure that not more than 3 tank trucks

are queued up for loading at a loading bay at any point of time. A maximum of 2

tank trucks can be waiting when a tank truck is already being loaded at the loading

bay.

In case of all desired bays already having one tank truck waiting in queue, the

second tank truck is allocated to the bay, which is likely to complete loading first.



The following status information about each of the loading bays at the terminal

shall be available with the LRC.

1. Number of loading bays available for filling each product.

2. Number of loading bays declared healthy for use.

3. Number of Tank Trucks already queued for each of the loading bays.

4. Current status of each loading bay.

The Bay allocation logic shall identify compartments for filling various products

according to the following guidelines:

a) Every compartment selected for filling must be completely loaded. No

compartment can be empty or partially filled.

b) Sum of the capacities of all compartments selected for filling a product must be

equal to the total quantity of the product requested.

c) Optimum utilization of all the loading bays available at the terminal. Bay

allocation logic must decide the loading bays such that the Tank truck will be

filled within the shortest possible duration with minimal movement of Tank

trucks within the licensed area.

Bay allocation logic shall attempt to assign a single loading bay so that all

compartments of the tank truck can be filled in the same bay. In case the

combination of products is such that filling cannot be completed in a single loading

bay, then the Bay allocation logic will assign appropriate Bays for filling the

Products.

4.5 TANK TRUCK LOADING:

On arrival at the loading Bay, tank truck driver shall show the identification card

allotted to him at the bay Card Reader. The encoded data is read by card Reader

and transmitted to LRC. LRC shall verify the authenticity and validity for loading

comparing with FAN particulars. If found OK, the driver is allowed to fill the

product through suitable load granting prompts with an indication on the Remote

Indication Panel (RIT).

RIT is located at the Bay. It shall have 3 push buttons Stop, Acknowledge, Start,

and 3 indicators Red, Yellow and Green. If the loading arm is not in use but is

healthy, RED lamp is ON in the RIT panel and Batch controller shall display

"PLEASE PRESENT CARD". Indication and respective function shall be as

follows:

1 RED lamp steady FAN is valid, Connect earthing relay

2 RED lamp flashing Safety interlocks failure

3 Yellow lamp steady Connect loading arm for loading and give

acknowledgment

4 Green lamp steady Ready to start loading or is loading

After verification of all interlocks and necessary safety requirements, the batch

data such as product name and compartment number with quantity to be filled shall



be displayed in the Batch controller (BC). In case of any problem, a message will

be displayed on BC. After the necessary action taken, LRC changes status

indication from 'RED' to 'YELLOW' on the RIT and loads the batch data such as

product name and compartment number with quantity to Batch controller (BC).

Driver shall position the loading arm into the compartment. Then operator will

push the acknowledge push button (PB) provided on RIT panel. Once LRC

receives acknowledge signal and turns status indication 'Yellow' to 'Green' on RIT

panel for loading. Driver shall then press 'Start' push button on RIT panel. Loading

shall commence by starting the loading pump automatically, if it is not already in

operation.

The following information shall be displayed on the BC while loading:

1. Volume count up

2. Volume count down

3. Pre set quantity

4. Status information

5. Alarm information

In the remote mode, loading operation shall be carried out without driver touching

batch controller.

The following interlocks shall be provided in the terminals to integrate with overall

terminal automation:

a) SSV (Set Stop Valve) to shut off in case of loss of Tank truck earthing and

bonding, loading arm not in position and T/T overflow.

b) Low – Low level in the tanks to trip the respective product loading pump.

Each loading point will be provided with an earthing relay device with suitable

safety interlock to the Batch controller. The earthing system shall consist of a

crocodile clamp arrangement along with 2 M long braided, suitably insulated

copper strip connected to the truck and another 5 M long braided, suitably

insulated copper strip connected to the tank truck manhole for bonding purpose.

Adequate number of Earthing studs/terminals shall be provided to facilitate

interconnection to main earth grid.

Each loading point will be provided with one batch controller. Batch controllers

supplied shall be in a position to operate in standalone mode. The Tenderer has to

inform the default prompts / sequence of prompts that shall appear on the local

display of the batch controller.

A maximum of 4 Batch controllers shall be multi dropped over RS485 link and

taken to the control room.



4.6 ADDITIVE DOSING SYSTEM FOR POWER & TURBOJET

Additive dosing System shall be supplied and erected by the Tenderer at the

terminal for loading Power & turbojet. The additive injection skid shall be dual

module type with facility of dosing two independent additives. Two loading points

for each product shall have additive injection facility.

The system components generally required for additive injection system per

product are given below:

1. Additive Tank(SS) – In safe Area

2. Additive Pump with stepper motor (one working and one stand by) - In safe

Area

3. ½” SS Piping – From Tank to the loading Point

4. P.D.Meter – At Loading Point

5. On Off DCV – At Loading Point

6. Non Return Valve – At Loading Point

7. PLC – Dedicated PLC for each dosing system ( optional) In the Control room

8. Any additional hardware specific to the system offered by the tenderer shall be

included.

The Terminal automation vendor shall supply and integrate this into TAS.

The additive injection system is proposed for two dedicated loading points. The

Batch controller of that particular loading point shall control the additive dosing

system.

Supply of all necessary piping, modifications, cabling to PLC is in the scope of

the tender.

All the Batch controllers shall have dosing and blending provision as per the

specification.

It may be noted that Power & Petrol is loaded through the same loading arm.

Similarly, Turbojet & Diesel is loaded through same loading arm.

The proposed scheme for additive injection system shall be as follows



4.7 LOADING PUMPS AUTO -START SEQUENCING:

Loading pumps shall have auto start / stop facility based on the demand. Total

demand should be based on feedback from the pressure transmitter of the header of

each product. It shall be possible to choose any one of the pumps as stand by. A

software selector switch shall be provided by Terminal automation system (TAS)

to decide the priority order for auto start of pumps. If one pump is taken for

maintenance, the logic takes that particular pump out of logical sequence. This

information is communicated to the control room.

All the pumps can be operated in the remote mode from the control room. The

PLC logic shall be built in the VFD PLC. Permissive Signal to VFD PLC shall be

withdrawn in case of any logic failure. For example, level in Tank is low / low –

low. When the level reaches low-low level, the pump trips. Start command shall

be given from TAS only after other tank with the same product selected and put in

dispatch mode.

Method of Operation and Control and I / O counts for PLC

TLF Pumps:

All the product pumps, All these pump motors are powered from MCC (MOTOR

CONTROL CENTRE) located in the electrical room.

Each pump motor is provided with local control station (LCS) near the pump,

which consist of START and STOP push buttons. All Pumps shall be operated in

the following modes.



1) Locally near the pump

2) Through VFD PLC

Status regarding each pump shall be transmitted to the TAS PLC from VFD PLC

through digital cables. The necessary interfaces shall be built by the TAS vendor.

Cabling between TAS PLC and VFD PLC, termination at both ends is included in

the scope of this tender.

TWF pumps , Sump pumps, Slop pumps

All the Pumps are driven by 3 phase LT motors. All these pump motors are

powered from PMCC ( POWER AND MOTORS CONTROL CENTRE) located

at MCC room near the generator room.

Each pump motor shall be provided with local control station (LCS) near the pump

which shall consist of START and STOP push buttons, 3 positions Selector switch

for Remote (Interlock), local (De-interlock), OFF mode of operation.

All pumps shall be operated in the following modes.

1. MMI (CRT operating Console)- Manual from control room

2. Local mode from local Control Station (LCS)

The following inputs/ outputs from field shall be considered in the PLC system for

each pump.

A) The following digital inputs are taken from LCS to PLC for each pump.

1. START (Push button)

2. STOP (Push button)

3. Interlock (remote) mode( Selector switch)

4. De- interlock (local) mode ( Selector switch)

B) The following digital inputs are taken from PMCC to PLC for each pump.

1. Pump motor running feedback

2. Pump motor overload /trip

C) The following digital outputs are taken from PLC to PMCC for each pump.

1. Pump motor- START/ RUN (withdrawal of this output will stop the motor)

2. Local permissive / local enable

Loading pumps shall not have auto start facility. It shall be operated manually

either from control room or pump house.

Pump to shut off automatically once level in Tank is low/low- low.



Signal cabling for the above I/O's are in the scope of TAS tender. Supply

installation, termination at both ends (between LCS and RI/O, MCC and RI/O,

RI/O and PLC) are included in the scope.

Limit switches are provided for the Roof drain and Water draw off manual valves.

The Roof drain valves are kept open in the normal conditions. Water draw off

valves are kept closed on the normal conditions.

The open limit switches of roof drain valves pertaining to a particular tank shall be

connected in series and taken as an input to the PLC. The Close position limit

switches of roof drain valves pertaining to a particular tank shall be connected in

series and taken as an input to the PLC. In case of any one of the valve being

closed, an alarm will appear on the screen.

The open limit switches of water draw off valves pertaining to a particular tank

shall be connected in series and taken as an input to the PLC. The Close position

limit switches of water draw off valves pertaining to a particular tank shall be

connected in series and taken as an input to the PLC. In case any one of the water

draw off valve is open, an alarm will be generated in the control room and the tank

will remain in idle mode till the valve is closed.

Entry and exit Barrier gate signals shall be taken to PLC.

Status of all the MOV’s in the terminal shall be transmitted to the Pipeline control

room as digital signal. All the receipt valves shall be hardwired between TAS PLC

and Pipeline PLC (EIL Scope). Supply of all the cables, Laying of the cables and

termination at both ends are in the scope of this tender.

4.8 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES:

One variable frequency drive for one pump per product is proposed at each

location. The other pumps will be with DOL/Star-Delta starters. The VFD shall be

supplied by another vendor. The operation of VFDs shall be automated. The

automation Tenderer shall work in consultation with VFD supplier for this.

Two software modules shall be made in TAS and the Pump logic supervised by

TAS PLC and the logic built into VFD PLC.

In case VFD is down, or the communication with TAS is down, then the pump

logic shall be completely controlled by TAS with out VFD. It shall be possible to

select this option from the OIC in the control room with user intervention through

password protection.

The VFD logic is as follows:

32 bit PLC in Hot redundant mode shall be provided for the terminal. The I/Os of

all the product pumps shall be connected to the VFD PLC.

Pressure transmitters provided in the header shall send the signal to the VFD PLC

to decide the number of pumps and the speed of VFD controlled pump.



The status of all pumps and the pressure signal shall be available in the TAS

system also, through a RS485 Modbus link between the VFD PLC and TAS PLC.

The ESD logic, tank level logic and other software interlocks shall be built into

TAS software. The VFD PLC shall be given permission to start only after all the

TAS interlocks are taken care of.

The VFD shall be kept in the MCC/ Electrical room. Communication cable has to

be laid between VFD Panel and TAS at the control room. The laying and

termination of the Cable is included in the scope of the automation Vendor.

Also the required interfaces for signal transfer and control between VFD PLC and

TAS is included in the scope of TAS Vendor.

The additional RS 485 ports in the TAS shall be provided by the TAS Vendor.

The stabilization of TAS with VFD logic shall be tested and accepted separately.

4.9 AUTOMATION OF FIRE WATER SYSTEM

Three nos. of diesel engine driven fire pumps and two nos. of electrically operated

jockey pumps are envisaged for all the terminals. Water is stored in 2 A/G vertical

tanks. These tanks feed the pumps. Delivery of the fire pumps is connected to a

network of hydrant pipeline of 6/8”/10”/12” dia.

During normal times, none of the hydrant points fixed on the pipeline is in open

condition hence there is no outflow of water. The pressure in the pipeline shall be

maintained at 7 Kg/ sq cm. The jockey pump shall be automated in such a way that

if the pressure in the line falls below 7 Kg/ Sq cm, the jockey pump shall start. If

one jockey pump fails to start, the stand by pump shall come into operation.

Jockey pump is envisaged for making up the loss.

If any hydrant point is opened, the pressure falls rapidly. When the pressure falls

below 6 Kg/ Sq cm as sensed by a pressure switch, one fire engine should

immediately come into operation. If it fails to start, the second pump shall start. If

the pressure still falls below 4.5 kg/ Sq cm, the third pump shall also operate. The

pumps can also be operated based on the signal from a remote call point. These

call points are distributed all over the plant. The shutdown of these fire water

pumps shall be manual. No automation is required for this. Tenderer shall submit a

suitable scheme for this.

Also if there is no flow within 30 seconds of activation of manual call point/ pump

starting, the pump shall get switched off and an audio alarm will be generated in

the control room and security room.



Seven numbers of manual call points are envisaged for each of the terminals. The

locations shall be indicated to the successful tenderer. Logic shall be built in to the

PLC.

It shall be possible to operate the pumps manually too.

Tenderer shall include the supply, erection, installation and cabling in his scope.

Necessary instruments like manual call points, pressure switch etc. shall be

supplied by the Tenderer. The installation shall be done in co ordination with the

Fire protection system tenderer.

4.10 TANK FARM MANAGEMENT:

Tank Farm Management System (TFMS) is a part of Terminal Automation system.

The products are stored in Floating roof tanks. Each tank shall be provided with

the following measurements:

� Radar type transmitter for measuring level

� Multi Element averaging type sensor for temperature measurement

� Water bottom sensor for Water/Product interface measurement

� Pressure transmitters for density measurement

Radar gauge with an accuracy of +1mm shall be provided for primary storage of

products in U/G. Radar gauges with accuracy of + 3mm shall be provided for

secondary storage of products in U/G tanks. Single point temperature probe shall

be considered for temperature compensation in U/G tanks. The compensation shall

be done in the control room or locally with corrected value available in the control

room for U/G storage tanks.

The tank side display for all FRVT and U/G tanks shall be backlit.

The indication shall be available locally in the tank side display unit and in the

TAS in the control room.

The monitoring and control operations shall be possible from the control room.

The system shall have the following capabilities:

a) Continuos and automatic data acquisition of level, temperature from field

instruments

b) Real time volume calculation from level and tank capacity tables.

c) Different data screen representation for tank details like level, temperature,

density, volume etc. and summary of details including histograms, inventory,

capacities, volume correction factor etc.

d) Comprehensive programmable logging of all alarms and events, summary of

all details without disturbing scanning sequences.

e) Continuos on-screen listings of significant happenings occurring during run

time.



f) Totalisation of volume and mass for group of tanks selected.

g) Trending facility for level and temperature, both real time and historic.

h) Programmable alarms for high and low level, temperature, volume. Audio

visual display of alarms shall be available.

i) TFM system MMI shall be user friendly with easy to use command structures,

windows and cursor control facilities.

j) Archival and retrieval facility of selected tank data.

k) The interlock and shutdown logic on programmable logic controller.

l) Process flow scheme with graphic mimic on operator interface console.

Tank farm management system is a microprocessor based system. The tank farm

management system is connected via redundant computer interface unit to Tank

Farm computer and gives continuously and automatically all the data like level,

level interface, temperature, gross volume, net volume, tank stock overview etc.

It also generates software alarms for H, HH, L, LL & water/product interface level

for each and every tank and maintains database for all alarms generated. Computer

interface unit shall be redundant. Summary of all details including histograms,

inventory, capacities, volume correction factors shall be displayed by the system.

Fire water tanks, underground sumps and slop tanks shall be integrated into the

TAS software / TFM software.

Tanks side indicator shall be provided for display of level, temperature, Density,

alarm / diagnostic and water/product interface level.

TFMS output for “HI”, “HIHI”, “LO”, “LOLO” alarms shall be provided. The

alarm shall be displayed on the operator console.

Supply and installation of latest version of Tank Farm Management software is

also included in vendor's scope. The TFM shall have licenced version of latest

ASTM tables for density correction. TFMS software which needs hardware lock

like dongel /OEM CD etc. to be attached to computer for running the application,

should be avoided. However, in case such arrangement is inevitable, such

hardware lock must be located inside the CPU or made to be pilfer proof by some

means. Vendor to guarantee free of cost replacement of such hardware lock/OEM

CD etc. in case of damage or pilferage .

Due to site conditions if any of the above requirements cannot be fulfilled in the

terminal, the Tenderer shall bring out during or before tender discussion.

4.11 STATION CONTROL SYSTEM:

Station control operation such as selection of receipt/despatch/ maintenance mode

of product tanks, starting/ stopping of loading pumps and emergency shut down

operation shall be handled by station control subsystem using a PLC.



4.12 SHUT DOWN FEATURES:

Emergency shut down shall be provided in the marketing terminal automation

control room to stop all despatch operation. ESD shall be implemented in the PLC

logic as part of terminal automation.

Three nos. of ESD pushbuttons are proposed per terminal.

One no. of Emergency push buttons shall be provided in the gantry to stop all road

loading operations.

One no. of Emergency push buttons shall be provided in the Administration

building to stop all loading operations in the terminal.

One no. of Emergency push buttons shall be provided in the control room to stop

all loading operations in the terminal.

Incase wagon loading exists in the terminal, an additional Emergency push button

to stop all rail loading / unloading operation shall be provided. The philosophy

shall be as follows:

a) When rail loading ESD is pressed, only rail loading operation shall be

terminated.

b) When any one of the other three Emergency pushbuttons are pressed, the entire

plant operation shall be terminated.

4.13 SECURITY

The TAS shall provide security mechanisms to keep unauthorised and non-

privileged users from accessing data. The operator shall control the security level

of user by assigning the user's account a security group code. There shall be five

levels of security.

Level I : Terminal Support Personnel

This security group shall have no restrictions and is reserved for personnel

providing the technical support to the terminal. Typically, no one at the terminal

shall have Level I access.

Level II : Terminal Support

This security group shall have no data restrictions except to critical hardware

configuration data. Level II shall be for the most highly privileged terminal

personnel.

Level III : Terminal Operators

This security group shall have only access to Facility Configuration data and shall

not have the capability to edit some data items.

Level IV : Sales Clerk

This security group shall have no access to Facility Configuration data, but shall

have the capability to edit data items pertaining to loading operations.



Level V : View only

This security shall have no access to Facility Configuration data. This shall be the

least-privileged level and shall be used primarily for Terminal Operations, Local

File Management, reporting and operations monitoring.

4.14 ALARMS AND EVENTS MANAGEMENT

An alarm of event needs to be recorded and possibly acknowledged. The

characteristics of alarms and events are as follows:

� Alarms / Events shall be generated by any system task

� Alarms / Events shall be signified within the system by a condition code,

which consist of the following components.

� FACILITY, which represents the system component which detected the alarm

condition and generated the alarm message.

� SEVERITY, which represents the relative importance of the alarms with

respect to other alarms in the system

� IDENTIFICATION, which represents the symbolic name used internally by

the system tasks to refer to alarm condition.

� TEXT, which represents the message text which is to be output when the

alarm condition occurs.

When alarms are annunciated, the above components provide additional

information about the circumstances surrounding the alarm condition.

� Alarms / Events may be automatically refreshed periodically for as long as the

alarm condition persists.

� Alarms / Events may be either a single stage alarm, where the alarm condition

can reset automatically, or a dual-stage alarm, where an operator shall

acknowledge the alarm condition before the alarm condition can be reset.

The logging of alarms, events and summary of all details shall be obtained with out

disturbing scanning sequences.

4.15 INTERFACING WITH PIPELINE CONTROL ROOM

Tenderer shall connect the following signals from terminal automation system

PLC to pipeline PLC. The signals are:

1. Status of all the tanks

� Main inlet (2 movs for each tank) OPEN / CLOSE.

� Main outlet (2 movs for each tank) OPEN / CLOSE.

� Tank level of all product tanks (continuous 4 – 20 mA)

� Tank level of water tanks for fire fighting

2. Control of inlet / outlet valves for the terminal



The pipeline PLC has provision for serial link interface for status of tank inlet /

outlet MOV’s, tank levels etc. The link shall be RS 485 Modbus protocol (master).

Tenderer shall configure the TAS PLC to RS 485 Modbus – Slave protocol.

The tank inlet valves at the terminal shall also be controlled by the pipeline PLC.

Pipeline control room shall send the opening / closing command for these valves in

the appropriate mode. These signals shall be hardwired outputs from the pipeline

PLC. The supply and laying of cables required for this upto pipeline control room

is in the scope of the tenderer.

The RS 485 Modbus communication cable shall be laid by the tenderer. Both the

pipeline contractor and the TAS contractor shall take equal responsibility for

handshaking and establishing the link.

Detailed list of all signals to be taken to pipeline control room is provided with this

specification as annexure.

5.0 LINE MOUNTED EQUIPMENT, TAPPING POINTS

Installation and hookup of all field instruments except line mounted flow

measuring elements (such as Orifice plate, Venturi, Coriolis), Set Stop valves, ON

/ OFF valves etc. are included in the scope of work of turnkey Instrumentation

package tenderer. Flow elements and shall be supplied by Instrumentation tenderer

along with matching flanges, reducers, expanders and other accessories. These

flow elements and valves shall be installed on the pipeline by pipeline contractor

under the supervision of instrumentation contractor. All the cabling, cable

termination etc. shall be done by instrumentation contractor. This is not applicable

for additive dosing system. For additive dosing system, piping and installation of

equipment on the pipeline is included in the scope of instrumentation vendor.

For measurement of pressure, flow etc pipeline contractor shall provide instrument

tapping points and root valves on the pipeline as per specification and location

given by instrumentation contractor. The process tapping shall be 1/2” in dia

unless otherwise specified. Root valves shall be 1/2” stainless steel ball or gate

valves, suitable to maximum pressure and temperature. Pressure testing of piping

shall be done after provision of Instrumentation tapping points and closing root

valves.

For installation of temperature elements/gauges, suitable tapping on pipeline,

welding of boss with threads or flange shall be provided for accommodating

thermowells supplied by instrumentation tenderer. Pressure testing of pipelines

shall be done by the tenderer after installation of thermowells. The details of

mounting arrangement required will be given to pipeline tenderer during

engineering. Impulse tube shall be 1/2” Seamless SS tube of 0.065” thickness of

cold drawn and soft annealed type.



6.0 BATTERY LIMITS

The works between the following limits are included:

� Generally, from the first root valve, flange connection onwards.

� For line / equipment mounted instruments companion flange to flange.

� However, where mounting arrangements such as installation of nozzles etc. for

mounting of Tenderer’s equipment are required, the same also will be under

the scope of the Tenderer.

7.0 APPLICABLE CODES AND STANDARDS

a) The components of instrumentation and control system shall be designed,

manufactured, assembled and tested in accordance with the latest standards of the

Standards Institution, Instrument Society of America, Institute of Electrical

Engineers and Manufacturer's association of the country where they are

manufactured / country of principals. They shall also confirm to the relevant

standards of the Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS) wherever available, so that

specific aspects under Indian conditions are taken care of.

b) The equipment shall also conform to the latest Indian Electricity Rules as regards

safety, earthing and other essential provisions specified there in for the installation

and operation of electrical plants.

c) The equipment in the hazardous area shall have CMRI/ CCOE approvals.

All painting shall be done in accordance with the General Specification for Painting.

All equipment shall comply with the statutory requirements of the Government of

India and the State Government of respective states.

The Tenderer shall execute the job to comply with the requirements of the relevant

regulations or acts in force in the area together with design specifications with respect

to:

� Indian Electricity rule

� Indian Factories act

� Regulations laid down by chief electrical inspector

� Regulations laid down by Factory Inspector of state Indian Standard Specifications

� Oil Industries safety directorate norms.

� International Organization of Legal Metrology.

� Regulations relevant to explosion hazardous areas

The equipment specified is to be designed in accordance with the applicable

standards listed below.

� American National Standards Institute (ANSI)

� American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM)

� National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA)

� American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME)

� American Petroleum Institute (API)



� Institute of Electrical electronic Engineers (IEEE)

� National Fire Protection Agency (NFPA)

� Scientific Apparatus Makers Association (SAMA)

� Canadian Standards Association (CSA)

� International Electro-technical Commission (IEC)

� International Standard Organisation (ISO)

� Open Software Foundation (OSF)

� Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS)

RELEVANT IS – CODES FOR PERSONAL PROTECTION

IS: 2925 – 1984 Industrial Safety Helmets

IS: 4770 – 1968 Rubber gloves for electrical purposes.

IS: 6994. 1973 (Part I) Industrial Safety Gloves (Leather & Cotton

Gloves)

IS: 1989-1986 (Part I & III) Leather safety boots and shoes

IS: 3738 – 1975 Rubber knee boots.

IS: 5557 – 1969 Industrial and Safety rubber knee boots.

IS: 6519 – 1971 Code of practice for selections, care and

repair of Safety footwear.

IS: 11226 – 1985 Leather Safety footwear having direct

moulding Sole.

IS: 5983 – 1978 Eye protectors

IS: 9167 – 1979 Ear protectors

The following standards shall be followed:

ASTM A106Gr.B Schedule STD for all pipes.

ASTM A 234 WPB, Schedule STD. Seamless, ANSI B16.9 for all types of

fittings.

API-600, class 150, Cast steel body, 13% Cr trim for gate valves.

All field equipment shall be weatherproof to NEMA 4X (IP 65), suitable for the

ambient site conditions. In addition all the field equipment shall be explosion proof/

intrinsically safe, suitable for the hazardous area specified typical of this project.

8.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION

8.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR INSTRUMENTATION

EQUIPMENT :

Tenderers are requested to study the information / data sheets furnished in this

document thoroughly and quote accordingly. Further the following drawings /

document which have been enclosed as a part of this document shall also be

referred and the offer shall be accordingly made. These documents are:

� P & I diagram for terminal

� Layout of terminal

� System architecture drawing



General environment conditions:

Temperature - 0°c to +55°c operating

Humidity - 95%

Equipment supplied for Terminals near sea shore will be suitable for corrosive /

saline atmosphere.

All the electronic equipment supplied by the Tenderer shall have protection

against surges, lightening and reverse polarity.

8.1.1 SPECIFICATION FOR BATCH CONTROLLER

Make : As per approved vendor list

Qty : Refer BOQ

Type : Microprocessor based field mounted

Service : White oils

Inputs : � Pulse input from pulse transmitter of

main product line, ethanol line (if

applicable) and additive line

Interlock inputs

� Grounding inputs

� Loading Arm Positioner

� Temperature sensor

� Totaliser reset mode switch (software)

� Serial input

� Overspill

� Emergency shut down

� RIT

Outputs : Digital control signals to solenoid valves of

set stop valve in Main product line and

Ethanol line ( if applicable), Digital control

signals to 2 nos. of additive injection

system.

RIT

Communication port : Dual redundant RS 485, maximum of 4

Batch controllers shall be multidropped and

taken to the control room.

Power requirements : 230 V AC + 10%, 50Hz

Data entry : Alpha numeric entry pad

Alarms : Overflow/underflow

� Interlock failure

� Pulse transmitter failure

Self diagnostics : Required

Memory capacity & backup : Minimum 200 transactions. Non volatile

RAM shall store the transactions upto 10

years.

Battery : Internal Lithium battery / flash memory



shall be provided for data retention.

Battery Life : 10 years

Meter Linearisation : 4 point over 10 – 100% flow rating of meter

by entering "K" factor of meter in memory

Display : Alpha Numeric, Back lit LCD, Non Glare /

Vacuum florescent. In built key pad and

display as one composite unit.

Enclosure : Explosion proof to IS-2148, Gr. II A & II B

Weather proof to IS-2147 to IP-65 for field

mounted batch controller

Approvals : CCOE

Batch Accuracy : Shall be 0.05% of batch

Functions : Indication, Totalisation, Batch Control,

Blending, injection of additive 1, injection

of additive 2, flowrate control, Meter factor

linearisation (min. 4 points over 10-100 %

flow rate), dynamic flow display,

programmable ramp down for multistage

opening/ closure of set stop valve, Batch

summary, Executing local loading,

Numeric key pad, Automatic Flow

optimization, ability to feed seal nos., one

alarm relay, 1 NO + 1 NC contact

configurable,

The quantity to be loaded entered in the

TDM is uploaded to LRC which in turn

uploads this information to Batch controller

via RS485 link as preset quantity

Level of security : Password protection for database

configuration.

Density correction feature : Provision for RTD input for density

correction

Salient Features : Each batch controller should be in a

position to operate in stand alone position.

Each batch controller should be able to

store at least 200 batches in local mode

which can be retrieved later

8.1.2 SPECIFICATION FOR REMOTE INTERACTION TERMINAL(RIT)


Qty : Refer BOQ

Enclosure : Explosion proof, WP as per IP 65

Push Buttons : 3 nos for start, stop & acknowledge

Indicators : 3 nos ( Red, Yellow, Green)

Power supply : 230 V AC +/- 10%, 50 Hz



8.1.3.1 SPECIFICATION FOR FLOW METER (PDM)


Qty : Refer BOQ

Type : Oval gears / tri-rotor design / rotary vanes

Casing : Double case

Size : 3”

Service : MS, HSD, SKO etc.

Materials :

Body : Carbon Steel

Rotor Elements : Anodised aluminium

Bearings : As per manufacturer’s standard

Wet parts : Aluminium / SS 304

Seals : Viton

Outer Housing : Carbon steel

End connection : 3" Flanged type, ANSI B16.5 , class 150

ASTM A 150

Flanged : RF Serrated

Design Pressure : 15 Kg/sq cm

Flow Range : 120 – 1200 LPM

Linearity : ± 0.25`% over a 5:1 range from max. meter

capacity.

Repeatability : ±0.02% over 10:150 flow range from maximum

nominal meter capacity

Rangeability : 100% to 10% of max. flow range

No of pulses / litre : Mfr Std

Mounting : Horizontal / Vertical

Coupling : Magnetic / Optical

Calibration : Shall be done at vendors premises

Approval : CCOE

NOTE: Total pressure drop across meter assembly – The strainer, Air eliminator, PD

meter, Shut off valve shall not exceed 1.3 Kg/ Sq cm under any process conditions.



8.1.3.2 SPECIFICATION FOR FLOW METER FOR ETHANOL (PDM)

Flow meter type : PD meter, Single case, SS wetted parts

Size : 1 ½”

End Connection : 1 ½” Flanged type, ANSI B16.5 , class 150

ASTM A 150

Service : Ethanol

Specific Gravity of ethanol : 0.7958

Flow rate : 30 LPM to 300 LPM

Strainer cum Air Eliminator : Integral type

Pulse transmitter : Single pulse

DCV : Diaphragm type, 1 ½”, hydraulic, suitable for

hazardous area.

NRV : Lift Check Valve as per BS-1868, class 150,

cast steel body & disc

Approval : CCOE

NOTE: Batch Controller shall control DCV.



8.1.4 SPECIFICATION FOR DUAL PULSE TRANSMITTER

Make : As per approved vendor list.

Qty : Refer BOQ

Application : To convert volumetric flow to pulse

Operating Range : Upto 1500 LPM

Pulse per revolution : As per manufacturer standard

Resolution : As per manufacturer standard

Output : Dual pulse stream, each pulse shifted by 90 deg.

with each other. Confirms to pulse security level

A as per IP-252/76, ISO 6551 and API chapter 5

Materials

Body : Aluminium Alloy

Operating torque : To suit the P.D meter

Mounting : On the O/P shaft of the PD meter

Shaft Rotation : Bi-directional

Pulse security : To be provided through verification pulse

generated through additional grid element

Supply current : MFR STD

Allowable vibration : 3 G’s at 30 Hz at all planes

Supply Voltage : 12 VDC

Enclosure : Flame proof / Intrinsic safe circuit

Signal Transmission : 20M From counting instrument

Housing : Explosion Proof

Approval : CCOE, CENELEC

Cable Entry : ‘1/2" NPT (F)



8.1.5 SPECIFICATION FOR STRAINER (FOR PD METER)


Qty : Refer BOQ

Type : Basket type

Size : 3”

Mounting : Pipeline

Service : MS, ULMS, HSD, ULSHSD, SKO etc.

Design Pressure : 15 Kg/cm2

Materials

Mesh : 40 mesh of SS 304

Body : Carbon steel/ SS 304

Seal : Viton

Flange : CS

Float : SS 316

Basket : CS Reinforcement sheet / SS 304

Air Release Body : Carbon steel

End Connection :

Inlet : 3" Flanged type, ANSI B16.5 , class 150

ASTM A 150

Outlet : 3" Flanged type, ANSI B16.5 , class 150

ASTM A 150



8.1.6 SPECIFICATION FOR AIR ELIMINATOR (FOR PD METER)


Qty : Refer BOQ

Type : Float actuated pilot operated , air eliminator

shall be mounted on top of the strainer.


Design pressure : 15 kg/ sqcm

Materials

Body : Carbon steel

Seal : Viton

Float : AISI 304

Mounting : On top of strainer vertically



8.1.7 SPECIFICATION FOR SET STOP VALVE


Type : Piston type / Diaphragm type with linear

characteristics , Electrically actuated

hydraulically operated

Size : 3”

Qty : Refer BOQ


Flow Range : 1500 LPM (Maximum) ,1200 LPM (avg.)

Design pressure : 15 Kg/sq. cm

Mounting : Downstream of flowmeter

End connection : 3" Flanged type, ANSI B16.5 , class 150

ASTM A 150

Materials

Valve body : Cast steel A 216 WCB / SS 304

Valve cover : Cast steel A 216 WCB

Spring : Stainless steel AISI 304

Internal parts : Stainless steel AISI 304 / CS

Tubing & Pipe : SS 316

Diaphragm material & Seals : Viton

Trim : As per manufacturer’s standard

Body type : Inline

Solenoid Valve : 2 nos, ASCO Make

Body : Carbon steel

Trim : SS 304

Mounting : On control valve

Test pressure : 285 PSI

Elec. Connection : ‘1/4" NPT (F) (Sol. valve)

Limit switches : Single for closed position indication, explosion

proof, class I, Gr IIA & IIB

Viscosity : 40 CP (max.) for white oils

Enclosure : Explosion proof class 1, Group II A & B,

weather proof to IP 65

Approval : CCOE

8.1.8 SPECIFICATION FOR LOADING ARM ( DELETED FROM SCOPE)


Qty : Refer BOQ


Description : Swivel, Top loading

Balancing : Spring Type (Torsion / Compression)

Design Pressure : 15 Kg/ sq.cm

Operating Temp : 0 - 50 deg.C

Size of arms : 3"

End connections : 3" ANSl 150# WNRF FLANGED

Body : Carbon Steel for 1st arm and aluminium for 2nd

arm

Seals : Viton



Swivel Joints : Carbon Steel, Flanged

Drop tube : Aluminium, 3" upto 750 mm Long

Working envelope : Reach 3 - 4 mtr.(Typical). 4 mtr. X 6 mtr. X 1

mtr.(Vertical)

Vacuum Breaker : ½” integral viton Diaphragm type with SS

nipple and ball valve

Position Limit switch : To be provided

Over-spill protection device : Shall be provided

NOTE: 1. One extra O ring shall be supplied with each loading arm.

2. Locking facility to be provided :

i) When loading arm in parking position

ii) When loading arm is inserted in T/T



8.1.9 SPECIFICATION FOR POSITION SENSOR FOR LOADING ARM (DELETED

FROM SCOPE)

Function : To detect if loading arm is in position

Area classification : Explosion proof suitable for class I Gr II A and

II B, electronics shall be intrinsically safe

Mounting : On the loading arm

Input : To batch controller

Type : Proximity type / Mercury contact type

Certificates : CCOE



8.1.10 SPECIFICATION FOR EARTHING DEVICE

Function : To detect proper earthing of the tank truck and

will stop loading upon loss of earth connection Connection : Dual channel electronic unit with Crocodile

type clips

Principle : Earth potential limit value monitor.

Signal Input : 1. Through earth point at loading area.

: 2. Probe from body of an earthed tank truck

Protection : Intrinsically safe

Intrinsically safe Isolator

mounting : In explosion proof junction box suitable for

mounting in class I div. II, Gr llA and llB

Control output : Typically, 5 A @ 230V AC rated contact

Power supply : 24 - 35 VDC, supplied from batch controller or

230VAC 50Hz, ± 10%

Indicators : 1. Red – vehicle not earthed

: 2. Green - vehicle earthed

Enclosure : Explosion Proof & weather proof to IP 65

NOTE : A 16 sq mm cross-section braided copper strip of 2 m length shall be

provided with each earthing relay.



8.1.11 SPECIFICATION FOR CARD READER


Qty : Refer BOQ

Type : Proximity type

Operation : Access control

Sensing Distance : 1”

Enclosure : Explosion proof / intrinsically safe electronics

with CCOE certificate

Power : Mfr Std

Connections : As per manufacturer’s std

Card media : Laminated cards

Card Dimension : Shall be specified by the manufacturer

Card Thickness : Minimum 1.5 mm

Communication : 2 no RS485 serial port

Battery : V Lithium, with 10 years min life

Baud rate : 9600

Protocol : To be indicated in the offer

Sensing time : Less than 4 seconds

A maximum of 6 card readers shall be multidropped over RS485 link and taken to the control

room.



8.1.12 SPECIFICATION FOR DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE GAUGE


Qty : Refer BOQ

Mounting : Local

Dial size : 100 mm

Colour : White dial with black engraving

Bezel ring : Screwed

Unit of measurement : mm of water column / Kg/cm2

Range : 0-5000 mm of wc across the strainer in the bay.

0-1 Kg/cm2 across the strainer near the pump.

Pressure element : Manufacturer’s standard

Accuracy : ± 2 % of FSD

Zero adjustment : Through micrometer pointer

Over range protection : 125 % of FSD

Process connection : Through 1/2" NPT (M)

Service : MS, ULMS, HSD, ULSHSD, SKO across

Strainer in TLF bay and pump suction

Materials

Case : Die cast Aluminum

Window : Shatter proof glass

Movement : SS 316

Socket : SS 316

Standard : IS 3624



8.1.13.1 SPECIFICATION FOR PROVING TANK FOR PD METER


Type : Mobile SKID with pump filling facility, quick

connect coupling, valves and accessories

mounted on a 4 wheeled tyre

Qty : Refer BOQ

Accuracy : ± 0.1%

Capacity : 2000 Ltrs

Gauge glass : Shall be provided at Top and Bottom

Drain valve : Shall be provided

Gauge Glass Resolution : +0.1% of tank cap.

Displacement tube volume : +0.5% of tank cap.

Plug valve size : 3"

Drain & Vent connections : Shall be provided

Mounting : On Skid, Chassis mounted on automobile

wheels(jeep wheel)

Gauge glass : Shall be provided with Mounting accessories

Accessories : Pump & flame proof Motor with starter and

Piping. Plug with FLP type 32 A rating socket

shall be provided on skid.

Dimensions : As per weights & measures standards

Design standard : IS 2341

Other Features : Levelling instrument shall be provided



8.1.13.2 SPECIFICATION FOR PROVING TANK FOR TRUCK


Type : Static with pump top filling facility/ Open

volume prover

Qty : Ref BOQ

Accuracy : ± 0.1%

Capacity : Two nos. of 1000 Lts & 1 no. of 500 Lts

Gauge glass : Required

Drain valve : Required

Resolution : +0.1% of tank capacity

Displacement tube volume : +0.5% of tank capacity

Plug valve size : 3"

Mounting : On structural supports

Gauge glass : Required with Mounting accessories

Drain & Vent connections : Required

Accessories : Pump & Motor, Associated piping, piping

material & valves to make a complete system

Dimensions : As per weights & measures standards

Design standard : IS 2341



8.1.14.1 SPECIFICATION FOR RADAR GAUGE


Qty : Refer BOQ

Type : Radio Frequency type


Accuracy : +/- 1 mm

Tank height : Refer annexure

Supply voltage : 230 VAC, 50 Hz

Distance (Range) : Suitable for tank heights

Output : RS-485 through CIU

Probe material : Acid proof steel, PTFE, Aluminium

Insertion length : Suitable for tank

Mounting, flanged : Top, Flanged type, ANSI B16.5 , class 150

ASTM A 150

Canopy for protection : Shall be provided

Probe head : Cast Aluminium, conforming to IP 65

Safety Class : Explosion proof/ Intrinsically safe electronics

CIU & TFMS Software : Shall be provided

Tank water/product interface : Shall be provided, 500mm sensing distance

All the Radar gauges and the average temperature sensor from the respective tanks to be

connected to local electronics, for each tank. Further all these local electronic unit will be

connected over RS 485 to a CIU which will be located in the Control room



8.1.14.2 SPECIFICATION FOR RADAR GAUGE FOR U/G, A/G TANKS

Type : Radio Frequency type


Qty : Refer BOQ

Service : Level measurement of U/G, A/G Horizontal

tanks

Tank height : Refer data sheets

Accuracy : +/- 1 mm for Primary tanks, +/- 3 mm for

secondary tanks

Supply voltage : 230 VAC, 50 Hz

Distance (Range) : Suitable for tank heights

Output : RS-485 through CIU

Probe material : Acid proof steel, PTFE, Aluminium

Insertion length : Suitable for tank

Mounting, flange : Top, Flanged type, ANSI B16.5 , class 150

ASTM A 150

Canopy for protection : Shall be provided

Probe head : Cast Aluminium, conforming to IP 65

Safety Class : Explosion proof

CIU & TFMS Software : Shall be provided

Temperature compensation : Single point temperature element to be

provided.

Local display : To be provided, Exproof type

All the Radar gauges and the temperature sensor from the respective tanks to be connected to

local electronics, for each tank. Further all these local elect. unit will be connected over RS 485

to a CIU which will be located in the Cont. room



8.1.15 SPECIFICATION FOR AVERAGE TEMPERATURE SENSOR

(FOR TANK LEVEL MEASUREMENT BY RADAR GAUGES)


Type : Multi point RTD Pt 100 / Thermocouple


Qty : Refer BOQ

No of RTD/ Sensor : Refer BOQ

RTD / thermocouple intervals : 2 M

RTD Type : Pt-100, grade A as per DIN standards

Thermocouple type : ‘T’ type

OD : ‘ 1” Typical

Instrument Connection : Threaded

Overall length of sensor : To suit the tank height

Mounting : On floating roof tank / conical tanks(refer BOQ)

Enclosure : Explosion proof and weather proof

Process connection : Flanged

Output : To RTG or Data Acquisition Unit

Accuracy : 0.25OC

Sheath : SS 316

Lead wires : Copper

Measuring range : 0 to 100 deg C



8.1.16.1 SPECIFICATION FOR LEVEL TRANSMITTER FOR UG / AG TANKS


Qty : Refer BOQ

Type : Float and tape type

Accuracy : +/- 3mm

Service : Tanks of MS, HSD, SKO etc


Mounting : Top

Output : 4 – 20 mA

Tank side indicator : Shall be provided

Enclosure : Explosion proof (CCOE Certified)



8.1.16.2 SPECIFICATION FOR LEVEL TRANSMITTER FOR WATER TANKS


Qty : Refer BOQ

Type : Float & Tape

Service : Water


Mounting : Tank side bottom

Output : 4 – 20 mA

Tank side indicator : Shall be provided

Enclosure : Weatherproof to IP65

Accuracy : + 1 to 2 cm

Alarms : 2, High & low



8.1.16.3 SPECIFICATION FOR LEVEL SWITCH FOR WATER TANKS

Type : Float

Service : Water


Mounting : Side

Flange material : Carbon steel 150#, 4”

Float material : SS 304

Spring material : SS 304

Switch enclosure : Cast Aluminium

Quantity : 2 nos.( one high and one low)

Differential : Micro switch

Switch contact rating : 5 A, 230V resistive

Cable entry : Through ½ “ NPT



8.1.17 SPECIFICATION FOR TANK SIDE INDICATOR FOR RADAR GAUGE


Quantity : Ref BOQ

Mounting : Tank bottom for A/G and tank top for U/G

Display type : LCD, Backlit for CRVT & FRVT.

Display parameter : Product level, Ullage, Average temperature,

Pressure transmitter signal

Power supply : Intrinsic safe power from RTG

Communication : Digital bus from the radar level gauge

Protection class : IP 65

Approvals : ATEX, CCOE

Housing material : Die cast aluminium, Exproof type

Cable entries : ½” NPT & ¾” NPT



8.1.18 SPECIFICATION FOR COMMUNICATION UNIT FOR RADAR GAUGE


Quantity : Ref BOQ

Location : In the control room

Function : To collect measured data from the field

mounted tank gauging equipment

No. of inputs / capacity per port : Min of 48

Baud rate : 4800

Transmission : As per manuacturer’s standard

Enclosure : IP20



8.1.19 SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

Type : Electronic microprocessor based, smart


Output : 4-20mA, HART interface to be provided as

option

Accuracy : 0.075% of measured level

Method of measurement : Hydrostatic

Service : Tank density measurement for MS, HSD, SKO.

Range : 0-15 M wc

Material of construction : SS 316 for wetted parts

Process connection : 1” or 2” depending on site conditions

Overange protection : 150%

Power : 24 VDC

Area classification : Zone I group II A/II B

Protection : Protection required against surges, lightening,

reverse polarity

Zener barrier : Required

Isolation valve : Shall be provided

Approval : CCOE



8.1.20 SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE GAUGE (BOURDON TYPE)


Qty : Refer BOQ

Type : Bourdon

Mounting : Field

Dial size : 150 mm

Color : White dial with black engraving

Bezel ring : Screwed

Range : Suction -1Kg/cm2 to 7Kg/cm

2

Delivery 0 to 15Kg/cm2

Unit of measurement : Kg/ cm2

Accuracy : ± 1 % of FSD

Zero adjustment : Through micrometer pointer

Over range protection : 125 % of FSD

Blow out protection : To be provided

Process connection : Through 1/2" NPT (M)


Materials :

Window : Shatter proof glass

Case : Cast AL

Element : SS 316

Socket : SS 316

Movement : SS 304

Snubber : Shall be provided

3 way isolation valve : Shall be provided of SS material

Standard : IS 3624



8.1.21 SPECIFICATION FOR UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY

Type : On-line and on 100% parallel redundant mode

Rating : Refer BOQ

Input voltage : 415 V+10 %, -15%, 3 Phase, @ 50 Hz, +1.10%

Inverter type : High frequency switching sinusoidal with pulse

width modulation.

Output voltage : 230 V, single Phase

Output Frequency : Free running 50 Hz, ± 0.1 % tracking bypass ±2

% (± 1 to ± 4%) (selectable)

Output voltage regulation : Better than ±1% for simultaneous variation

from no load to full load & input voltage to any

extreme.

Output voltage waveform : Sinusoidal

Total Harmonic distortion : Less than ± 3 % for linear load, less than ± 5 %

for non-linear load.

Transient response : For 100 % step load

Dip : Typical 5 %, Max 8 %

Peak : Typical 5 %, Max 8 %

Recovery to normal : Up to 60msec i.e. 3 cycles

Over load capacity : 125 % for 10 min

Audible noise : Less than 55 dB at 1 mtr distance

LCD/ LED indication : Mains OK

Inverter OK

Overload

On Battery

Low Battery

Inverter trip

Bypass ON

Load on Inverter

Load on Bypass

Bypass frequency out of range

Auto bi-directional static switch : Shall be provided

Environment : 0 – 50 deg. C

Relative humidity : 95 % RH non condensing

Switch gear : Input MCCB, Bypass MCCB, Battery isolator,

inverter ON/OFF MCCB, manual bypass

isolator (Load break switch)

Remote Indication : Provision for all the available LCD/ LED for

remote indication and potential free contact (1

NO and 1 NC) for fault indication should be

provided

Bi-directional static switch with

SCVS : Shall be provided

Batteries : Sealed maintenance free (SMF) batteries with

end cell voltage of 1.8 V

Battery Backup : Battery back-up for 30 minutes

Capacity : Min. 120 % of the actual load requirement for

the system to be calculated by vendor.

Enclosure : IP 31

Isolation transformer : Shall be provided with class ‘H” insulation



Configuration : Diagram to be submitted

PDB : To be provided


NOTE: 1. UPS load calculation to be finalised during design engineering and to be submitted for approval.

2. UPS failure to be taken as hardwired contacts to PLC

3. UPS shall supply power to the communication equipment (supplied by

other contractor). 1KVA capacity shall be considered for this.



8.1.22 SPECIFICATION FOR TURBINE FLOWMETER (DELETED FROM SCOPE)


Size : 600 mm

Service : MS, ULMS, HSD, ULSHSD, SKO

Location : Header

Qty : Refer BOQ

Flow Range

Minimum : 647 m3/hr

Normal : 794 m3/hr

Maximum : 902 m3/hr

Operating Pressure : 3-15 Kg/cm2

Operating Temperature : 15-45 deg C

Sp. Gravity : 0.7 - 0.87

Viscosity : 0.35 - 7.0 CP

Pick off Coil : Dual, Magnetic

Accuracy

Linearity : ± 0.15% of the reading

Repeatability : +/- 0.02% to +/- 0.05%

Materials of Construction :

Body : Carbon Steel / stainless steel

Rotor Elements : ANSI 430 / ANC 21

Bearings : SS, Tungsten Carbide, Stellite

Bearings Support : SS 304 / SS 316

Wetted parts : Anodised Aluminium / SS

Seals : Buna N

Outer Housing : Carbon steel

End connection : ANSI Flanges ANSI B16.5 (150# to 2500#) or

DIN/BS

Mounting : Horizontal

Approval : CCOE

Display : 2 lines, 8 digit LCD with flow rate and total

Bi-directional flow : Required

Totaliser : Integral type

Pulse converter : Integral with output in 4-20 mA



8.1.23 SPECIFICATION FOR DENSITY METER


Qty : Refer BOQ

Working Principle : Coriolis mass flow / Direct measurement

Range : 0.6 to 1.0 gm/cc

Accuracy : ± 0.0005 gm/cc over the

measurement range factory calibrated

Location : On the header TLF shed

Line size : Refer annexure

Transmitter : Integral

Pressure : 0 to 10 Kg/ cm2

Protection : IP – 65

Flanges : SS 316 / SS 316L

Wetted parts : SS 316 / SS 316L

End Connection ‘1”

Housing : SS 304 fully welded

Tube : SS 316 L

Size : 1” for coriolis type

Repeatability : ± 0.0002 gm/cc

Area classification : Class 1, Div II, Group II A & B

Service : MS, ULMS, PGMS, HSD, ULSHSD, PGHSD,

SKO etc.

Communication : RS 485 Interface

Output : 2 Nos minimum, Analog/ Digital, 4 – 20 mA &

RS 485 serial port, modbus protocol

(Availability of API measured density and

temperature output to be ensured locally as well

as remote)

NOTE: 1. The temperature transmitter connected to the temperature detector inbuilt with

densitometer should transmit an output of 4 to 20 mA for a temp range of 0 to 100

Deg C. The density should be temperature corrected.

2. All the densitometers supplied by the Tenderer shall be calibrated at FCRI.

3. A maximum of 4 Density meters shall be multidropped over RS485 link and taken to

the control room.



8.1.24 SPECIFICATION FOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR (RTD)

TRANSMITTER (FOR DENSITY METER)


Type : Pt-100, Simplex, 3 wire as per DIN standards

Qty : Refer BOQ

Thermowell : SS 316, barstock

Instr. Connection : ‘1/2" NPT(F)

Immersion length : As required

Range : 0-100deg C

Total length : As required

Mounting : On the Header lines to TLF shed


Enclosure : Explosion proof and weather proof

Process connection : Screwed connection 3/4" NPT(F)

Output : 4 to 20 mA signal

Insulation : Mineral Insulated

Accuracy : Accuracy As per DIN 43760

Sheath : Made of SS 316 having 5 mm diameter

Lead wires : Copper

NOTE: This is to be offered separately in case the density meter does not have the inbuilt

feature of temperature measurement and correction.



8.1.25 SPECIFICATION FOR MASS FLOWMETER (DELETED FROM SCOPE)


Qty : Ref. BOQ

Size / pipe dia : Ref P & ID

Working Principle : Coriolis mass flow

Range : 2400 LPM for ULMS, 4800 LPM for MS &

SKO, 9600 LPM for ULSHSD, 14400 LPM for

HSD

Accuracy : +/- 0.1%

Mounting : On the Rail loading line

Transmitter : Integral

Temperature : 0 to 100 Deg C

Pressure : 0 to 10 Kg/ cm2

Protection : IP - 67, Ex. Proof

Flanges : SS 316 / SS 316L, Flanged type, ANSI B16.5,

class 150 ASTM A 150

Wetted parts : SS 316 / SS 316L

End Connection : *

Housing : SS 304 fully welded

Tube : SS 316 L

Area classification : Class 1, Div II, Group II A & B

Application : MS/PGMS/SKO/HSD/PGHSD

Communication : RS 485 Interface

Approval : CCOE / CMRI

Output : 2 Nos minimum, Analog/ Digital, 4 – 20 mA &

RS 485 serial port, modbus protocol. Mass flow

and temperature to be displayed separately in

the local mode.

A maximum of 4 Mass flow meters shall be multidropped over RS485 link and taken to

the control room.



8.1.26 SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE TRANSMITTER

Type : Electronic microprocessor based, smart


Output : 4-20mA, HART interface to be provided. The

output shall be connected to VFD PLC located

in the Electrical room

Accuracy : 0.075% of FS

Principle of operation : Variable capacitance

Range : 0 – 5 bar

Material of construction : SS 316 for wetted parts

Service : Header Pressure Measurement

Process connection : *

Overange protection : 150%

Power : 24 VDC

Area classification : Zone 1, Group II A/II B

Protection : Protection required against surges, lightening,

reverse polarity

Zener barrier : Required



8.1.27 SPECIFICATION FOR PRESSURE SWITCH


Quantity : Ref BOQ

Type : Bellows

No of contacts : 2 NO, NC

Process connection : ‘1/2 “ NPT

Set Pressure : Settable at the site

Snubber : To be provided

Service : Fire water

Enclosure : IP65



8.1.28 SPECIFICATION FOR LIFT CHECK VALVE

Type : Lift Check Valve

Rating : ANSI Class 800

Service : ETHANOL

Size : 1/2” to 1 ½”

Cover : Bolted

End Connection : Socket Weld ended

Applicable Codes : BS : 5352, ANSI B 16.34,

Testing Code : BS : 6755 Part I

Hydrostatic Test Pr. : Shell /

Seat : 3000 / 2200 psi

Material

Body / cover : ASTM A 105

Disc : 13% Cr. SS, Stellited

Seat ring : 13% Cr. SS, Stellited

Fasteners : ASTM A193 Gr. B7/A194 Gr. 2H




8.1. 29 SPECIFICATION FOR BALL VALVE

Type : Fire Safe , Anti static

Size : Bidder to specify

Size : ‘1/2” to 2”

Design code : BS 5351, class 150, cast steel body, SS304, ball,

fire safe

Test Code : BS – 5146 / API – 598 B.S 617 SS Part – I

Fire Safe : API – 607 / APIRPGF 1993

Valve Type : Full Bore

Type : 2 pieces

End Connection : ANSI 150 # Flanged type, SORF, 125 AARH

3" Flanged type, ANSI B16.5 , class 150

ASTM A 150

Material of Construction :

Body : ASTM A 216 Gr. WCB

Ball : CI8M

Trim : AISI 316

Seat : PTFE

Stem Seal : PTFE / GRAF OIL

Gland Packing : GRAF OIL

Studs : ASIM A 193 Gr. BZ

Nuts : ASIM A 194 Gr.2 H

Handle : Carbon Steel



8.1.30 SPECIFICATION FOR JUNCTION BOX


Quantity : Ref BOQ

Materials

Body & Cover : Cast Aluminum

Gasket : Neoprene rubber

Terminals : Clip on type

Tag name plate : Required

Paint : Anti corrosive epoxy paint, shade light Grey

JB type : Suitable for hazardous area, Explosion proof

Protection class : IP 65



8.1.31.1 SPECIFICATION FOR CABLE TRAY – GI

Material : GI

Perforated : Slotted holes

Length : 3 M/ segment

Thickness : 2 mm

Height : 50 mm for 150 mm wide trays, 75 mm for 300

wide trays, without cover

Cover height : 10 mm, cover to be provided for trays in Gantry



8.1.31.2 SPECIFICATION FOR CABLE TRAY – FRP/ GRP

Material : Fire retardant fiber reinforced plastic

Fire retardancy : Low flammability as per IS 6746 appendix K

Oxygen under test : Oxygen index under test should be min 30 as

per ASTM – D 2863

Height : 50 mm for 150 mm wide trays, 75 mm for 300

wide trays, without cover

Cover height : 10 mm, cover to be provided for trays in Gantry

Thickness : 3 mm

Loading on trays : 150 mm wide – 30 Kg/meter, 300 mm wide –

60 Kg/meter



8.1.32.1 SPECIFICATION FOR SIGNAL CABLE

Makes : As per approved vendor list

Quantity : Ref BOQ

Type of cable : Single pair/ multipair shielded copper cable

Construction : Multi strand annealed electrolytic copper

Conductor : Electrolytic annealed copper

Size, No. of strands, Dia of each

strand : 1 sqmm, Min 7, 0.43mm

Insulation : Extruded PVC type A as per IS 5831/84

Thickness : 0.6mm

Pair twist : 10 twists / mtr per pair

Individual Pair Shield : Al mylar tape, helical, thickness,

Thickness : 0.05mm

Overlap / Coverage : 25 % / 100 %

Overall shield : Al mylar tape, ,

Thickness : 0.05mm

overlap / coverage : 25% / 100%

Inner sheath : Extruded PVC type ST1 of IS 5831 / 84

Thickness : 0.7mm

Rip cord : Required, Non metallic type below inner sheath

Outer sheath : Extruded PVC type ST1 of IS 5831/84

Thickness : Min 1.4mm

Armour : Armour over inner jacket shall be of Galvanised

steel wire

Size : 1.4 mm

Drain wire : Shall be provided, Annealed tinned copper in a

continuous contact with Aluminium side of the

shield

size , drain wire resistance : 0.5mm, 30 ohm / km

Pair identification Shall be provided at distance of not more than1

metre interval, 1 pair cable shall be colour

coded white & blue.

Electrical Parameters

Max resistance of the conductor

of the complete cable at 20 deg

C.

: shall not exceed 39.7 ohm /km

mutual capacitance @ 1KHz– : 250pF/mtr

max cap btw any core / screen @

1KHz : 400pF/mtr

L / R ratio 25 micro H/ohm

Noise rejection ratio, 76dB

High voltage test 1KVrms for 1 min



8.1.32.2 SPECIFICATION FOR RTD CABLE


Quantity : Ref BOQ

Type of cable : Triad cable

Construction : 1 sq. mm cross section, individually shielded

and overall shielded with drain wire

Core : 7 X 0.52 mm nominal stranded ATC wires.

Polyethylene insulated with a nominal min.

insulation thickness of 0.5 mm

Twisting : 3 insulated cores shall form a triad

No of Twists/metre : Min 12 to 20

Drain wire size : 10 strands 0f 0.25 mm ATC

Triad shielding : 100% coverage with Al Mylar tape 0.062 mm

with a Min of 25% overlap along with drain

wire.

Overall taping : 0.015mm thick Polyester taping

Overall outer sheathing : 1.6mm(+/-0.2mm) thick for triad

Drain wire : AWG 20

Voltage class : 600 V

Conductor Resistance : 14 Ohms/Km @ 20 Deg C

Insulation Resistance : As per IS 5831

Mutual capacitance : Between cores with shield grounded shall be not

more than 150pF/Mtr

Capacitance : Between one conductor and other

Conductors connected to the shield shall be not

more than 250pF/Mtr



8.1.32.3 SPECIFICATION FOR CONTROL CABLE


Quantity : Ref BOQ

Type of cable : Multi core copper cable

Construction : Multi strand annealed electrolytic copper

Voltage class : 600 V



strand : 1.5 sqmm, Min 7, 0.53mm

Insulation : Extruded PVC type A as per IS 5831/84

Thickness : 0.7 mm


Thickness : 0.7mm

Outer sheath : Extruded PVC type ST1 of IS 5831/84



steel wire

Size : 1.4 mm

Identification Shall be provided at distance of not more than1

metre interval




C.

: shall not exceed 13 ohm /km

Min Volume resistivity : 1x 1013

@ 27 deg

1 x 1010

@ 70 deg




8.1.32.4 SPECIFICATION FOR POWER CABLE


Quantity : Ref BOQ

Type of cable : Multi core copper cable

Voltage rating : Up to and including 1100 volts



strand : 2.5 sq mm, 7, 0.67mm

Primary Insulation : Extruded PVC type A as per IS 5831/84

Thickness : 0.7 mm


Thickness : 0.3mm

Outer sheath : Extruded PVC type ST1 of IS 5831/84 with

oxygen index of 29 @ 27 deg C



steel wire

Size : Min 1.4 mm




C.

: Shall not exceed 7 ohm /km

Min Volume resistivity : 1x 1013

@ 27 deg

1 x 1010

@ 70 deg




8.1.33 SPECIFICATION FOR BULK AIR ELIMINATOR

Air eliminator shall be of horizontal / vertical cylindrical mild steel dished end

tank construction with internal baffles and float operated air release valve along

with supporting steel frame work and anchor bolts. The tank shall have large cross-

sectional area to slow the flow of liquid. The volume of the tank shall be at least

10% of the flow rate in LPM. The units shall conform to the following

specifications.

Makes : Flash point, Teltech, Bopp & Reuther, Liquid controls, FMC Sanmar

Rated flow in LPM : As given below

Operating Pressure in KG/cm2 : 10 Kg/sq cm

Test Pressure : 1.5 times the operating pressure

Allowable Pressure drop in the air

separator at rated flow : 0.1 Kg/cm2

Operating Temperature : 50o C

No. of Air Eliminators required : 1 for each product header in TLF bay

Material of Construction

Fabricated Body and baffles : IS 2002 Gr. 2

Flanges : ANSI B16.5, class 150, A 105, RF

Pipes : ASTM A 106, Gr. B, SCH-STD

Supporting frame : MS IS 2062, Gr. B 99

Drain Plug/socket NPT : ASTM-A-105

Float & accessories : AISI 304

Seals : Nitrile/Viton

Code of construction : IS-2825-99

Painting

Shall be painted with 2 coats of Zinc Phosphate primer(25 microns each) and 2 coasts of

aluminium paint (20 micron each)

Testing

Hydrostatic testing shall be done.

Bulk Air eliminator shall be installed as close to the TLF loading bay as possible. Density

meter shall be installed on the by pass line to the header after Bulk Air eliminator (closer

to the gantry). Pressure Transmitter shall be installed after Densitymeter.

Product Rated Flow Line Size

HSD 7200 LPM 300 mm dia



MS 4800 LPM 200 mm dia

SKO 1200 LPM 100 mm dia

8.1.34 SPECIFICATION FOR MANUAL CALL POINT

Manual call points are manually operated devices to initiate an alarm signal and

operate the fire pump. The manual call points are located all along the plant. The

manual call point shall be painted with fire red as per IS-5-1994, sheath 536. All

the manual call points shall be wired to PLC.

Manual call points consist of MS enclosure with a safety glass front. The front

glass keeps the switch in pressed condition.

Manual call points shall have CMRI certified flame proof enclosure. MCP’s are

provided in the following areas

Sl. No. Description Quantity

1 Tank Farm Area 1

2 TLF shed 1

3 Admin Bldg 1

4 Product pump house 1

5 Rail loading/ Unloading gantry 1

6 TW pump house 1

7 Security 1



8.1.35 SPECIFICATION FOR PROGRAMMABLE LOGIC CONTROLLER

(PLC)

8.1.35.1 General

Programmable logic controller (PLC) shall be dual redundant hot standby PLC

with dual processors and single I/O with Auto IO testing for all DI & DO as

specified.

Programmable logic controller (PLC) system shall be programmable, modular

microprocessor based. Safety system, which shall be used for implementation of

safety shutdown/interlocks and terminal operation control/monitoring shall be

done through PLC.

The system shall be designed "fault avoidant", as a minimum by selecting high

grade components of proven quality and proper design of system electronics. The

system shall be highly reliable, high-integrity safety system on both qualitative and

quantitative technologies. Redundancy shall be provided as a minimum, as per this

specification to improve system availability, reliability and safety. Due

consideration shall be given to the environmental conditions particularly for field

mounted subsystems.

The system shall be modular in construction and expandable in future by adding

additional modules which shall be easily accessible for maintenance and repair.

The modules shall be suitable for inserting in 19" rack. The types of modules shall

be kept to minimum possible in order to have interchangeability and low spares

inventory.

The PLC shall have a very high noise immunity in order to ensure safe and reliable

operation when subjected to electrical radio frequency interference and electro

magnetic disturbances expected in a plant. The design of system electronics shall

be in compliance with the electromagnetic compatibility requirements as per 'IEC-

801-Electromagnetic compatibility for Industrial Process Measurement and

Control Equipment'.

The system shall have extensive set of self diagnostic hardware and software for

easy and fast maintenance of PLC. Routine checks should run automatically at

frequent intervals for identifying any fault in software or hardware. Diagnostics

are be required at local module as well as operator interface console level.

Operation of the PLC shall be completely unaffected by a momentary power loss

of the order of 20 milli –seconds.

The scan time of programmable controller shall be of the order of 100 milliseconds

for logic & 500 milliseconds for closed loops. Scan time of PLC is defined as the

cycle time taken by the system to read input, process input executing logic, and

update control output for all the logic configured within the system. Other



activities like diagnostic routines, output/dump of data to peripherals, or any other

activity which consume processor time shall also be accounted while computing

scan time.

On-line replacement of any module shall be possible in such a way that the

removal and addition of the module shall be possible without de-energizing the

system. Further, there shall not be any interruption in the system while replacing a

faulty module except for the inputs/outputs, which are being handled, by that

module.

Spares philosophy

Installed engineering spare modules upto 5% shall be provided in input/output

subsystem on module basis and/or with a minimum of one module of each type to

enhance the system functional requirements for future.

In addition the system shall have the following minimum spare capability.

(a) I/O racks of PLC shall have 20% useable spare slots for installing I/O

modules of each type in future. These racks shall be part of the offer.

(b) The processor system shall have the capability to execute logic for I/O's

including 5 % installed spares.

(c) Whenever relays are used to interface process input/outputs with PLC 25%

additional relays shall be provided. In addition, 20% spare space shall be

provided in cabinets to install 20% additional relays in future.

8.1.35.2 System Configuration

The system shall consist of following major subsystems :-

Input /Output subsystem

The I/O modules shall be mounted in the I/O racks located in control room i.e. I/O

modules shall be general purpose unless otherwise specified. I/O devices interface

with PLC shall be at I/O racks only.

The maximum number of input/outputs per module shall be limited as follows:

Sr.No. Type of Configuration No. of I/Os

1. I/O Sub-system 16 for Digital inputs

8 for Analog inputs

16 for Digital outputs

� Each I/O shall be electrically isolated from external control circuit by suitable

means. The minimum isolation level between I/O and logic circuit shall be

1000 VDC . I/O status indication shall be provided for each I/O module.



� Each I/O shall be protected against reversal of polarity of the power supply

voltage to I/O.

� Each module shall have LED for each I/O channel to indicate the status of each

input/output.

� Each input shall be provide with filters to filter out any noise in the input line

or noise because of input contact bouncing.

� PLC inputs shall be provided with potential free/dry contacts unless otherwise

specified.

� All the inputs shall preferably be double ended i.e. two wires per input and not

common return for all inputs.

� The interrogation voltage ( 24 V DC / 110 V AC) to the input/output contact

shall be powered from separate redundant power supply units and shall not be

a part of PLC

� Output contacts from the PLC shall be potential free/dry contacts with contact

ratings as per table below. Wet contacts/ powered contacts/TTL outputs etc.,

shall not be acceptable. Suppression device for each output contact is to be

provided.

o The output contact rating shall be as follows

Sr.No.

Applicable For VOLT Current Rating

1 All output cards for driving

solenoid, valves and alarm

annunciator

110V DC

24 V DC

0.5 A

2.0 A

2 All output cards for driving LT

motors/pumps/solenoids

230V AC 5.0 A

o Input type shall be intrinsically safe with barriers for analog input modules and

explosion proof type for digital input modules. Only Active Barriers shall be

employed for achieving galvanic isolation .

� Each output shall be short-circuit proof and protected by fuse. Visual

indication of fuse blown must be provided for each output.

8.1.35.3 Processor System (32 Bit)

The system shall consist of following major subsystems :-

The offered processor type shall have a minimum reference capacity to handle 1000

real time I/O. Redundancy shall be provided such that in case of failure of the primary

processor, the secondary processor shall take over automatically without any time lag.



Both processor shall access the inputs simultaneously. If not possible, changeover

time shall be worst case 60 millisecond. The changeover shall be bumpless and the

system shall be safe. Redundancy shall be provided for complete processor subsystem

including CPU, memory, power supply & host system communication interface i.e.

rack to rack redundancy.

� Memory shall be non-volatile. However, incase volatile memory is provided,

rechargeable battery backup shall be provided for a minimum of one year to

keep the stored program intact. A battery drain /pass indication shall be

provided .The size of the memory shall be sufficient for storage of the

program instructions required by the logic schemes. 20 % spare capacity shall

be available.

� In case of failure of complete processor system i.e both processors failing,

system outputs shall take fail safe automatically.

� It shall be possible to generate the first out alarm output by the PLC in case

where a group of parameters are likely to trip the system.

8.1.35.4 Communication Sub system

1. The communication subsystem shall be a digital communication bus that

provides reliable and high speed data transfer between the processor subsystem

& I/O subsystem.

2.Redundancy in communication subsystem shall be as follows unless otherwise

specified.

(a) Communication Interface between each I/O rack & the dual processor

system shall be via separate dedicated dual redundant communication link

in multi-drop mode; daisy chained redundant communication bus to

establish interface between I/O racks & processor system shall not be

acceptable.

(b) The communication interface between each processor subsystem and host

LRC system shall be dual redundant consisting of two separate

communication interface modules located in / from each individual

processor rack and two individual communication links, with each one

configured in redundant mode. Use of PLC processor CPU port for

establishing host interface connectivity shall not be acceptable.

In case of redundant communication subsystem on the failure of the active

device the redundant device shall take-over automatically without

interrupting the system operation.

Information about the failed device shall be displayed locally as well as in

the console. It shall be possible to manually switch-over the

communication from main bus/device to redundant bus/device without

interrupting the PLC functions.



(a) The mechanism used by the system for error checks and control shall be

transparent to the application information/program. Error checking shall be

done on all data transfers by suitable codes. All communication interfaces

shall be galvanically or optically isolated.

8.1.35.5 Self diagnostics

1. The system shall have an extensive set of self-diagnostic routines which shall

be able to identify the system failures at least upto module level including

redundant components and power supplies through detailed CRT displays

report print outs and logic programming.

2. At the local level, failure of a module in any subsystem shall be identified by

an individual LED.

3. Self-diagnostics shall be provided to detect faults (which make the contacts in

fail safe mode) in the input and output modules. Each module shall have

separate arrangement for self-diagnostic facility. This may be achieved by

automatically running the testing software at cyclic intervals. Auto IO Testing

shall be provided for all DI & DO with all faults being annunciated

/reported on the LRC /OIC screen.

4. Testing software shall be capable of detecting faults in case of normally closed

system as well as in normally open system.

5. Feedback shall be provided internally from the output voting logic system to

detect any latent faults of the system.

8.1.35.6 Power supply distribution

PLC system shall be powered with 230 V AC + 3%. Power pack shall be 100%

redundant with safety factor of 1.5. The distribution network for AC power supply

shall be designed such that a single power fault in any branch system shall not

cause a trip of the entire system. The distribution network for interrogation

voltage shall be designed such that a single fault in any branch shall not cause trip

of the logic other than where the fault has occurred. Sequential starting of various

load centers shall be provided whenever specified.

8.1.35.7 PLC System Cabinets

All PLC system cabinets shall be completely wired with all modules in place.

Inside cabinet wiring shall be done using ribbon type pre-fabricated cables.

Doors & side panels shall be fabricated from cold rolled steel sheet of minimum

1.5mm thickness. Cabinets shall be thoroughly debarred and all sharp edges shall

be grounded smooth after fabrication.



Cabinet finish shall include sand blasting, grinding, chemical cleaning, surface

finishing by suitable filter and two coats of high grade lacquer with wet sanding

between two coats. Three coats of paint in the cabinet colour shall be given for

non-glossy high satin finish.

Each cabinet shall be maximum 2100 mm high (including 100-mm channel base),

1200 mm wide and 800 mm deep, in general. An anti vibration pad of 20 mm

thickness shall be provided. Construction shall be modular preferably to

accommodate 19" standard electrical racks. All cabinets shall be of same height.

Maximum swing out for pivoted card racks, doors and drawers shall be limited to

600 mm.

Cabinets shall be equipped with the front and rear access doors. Doors shall be

equipped with lockable handles and concealed hinges with pull pins for easy door

removal.

In order to remove dissipated heat effectively from cabinets, vent louvers backed

by wire fly screen shall be provided in cabinet doors. Further two ventilation fans

shall be provided.

Illumination shall be provided for all cabinets by incandescent lamps, which shall

be operated by door switch.

Equipment within the cabinet shall be laid out in an accessible and logically

segregated manner. Cable glands shall be provided for incoming and outgoing

cables to prevent excessive stress on the individual terminals. All metal parts of

the cabinet shall be electrically continuous and shall be provided with a common

grounding lug.

The front doors for the PLC cabinet shall have toughened glass / acrylic window

for visual ergonomics.

8.1.35.8 Earthing

Each cabinet, console and other equipment supplied as a part of PLC system shall

be provide with an earthing lug. All these lugs shall be properly secured to the

AC mains earthing bus.

All circuit grounds, shields and drain wires of control cables shall be connected to

the system ground bus which shall be electrically isolated from AC mains

earthing bus. This bus shall be typically of 25 mm wide and 6 mm thick of

copper.

All barriers, if used, shall be securely grounded. Safety barrier ground wire shall

be capable of carrying a maximum fault level current of 0.5 A at 250 V r.m.s per

barrier.



8.1.35.9 Testing, Installation, commissioning and acceptance

General

On the basis of guidelines specified in this specification bidder shall submit their own

testing installation commissioning and acceptance procedure. For hardware the

procedure shall include purpose of test, test definition of input procedure, results

expected and acceptance criteria. For software it shall include details of the method,

list of tests, sequence of execution, results expected and acceptance criteria.

Factory Acceptance Tests (FAT)

Vendor shall demonstrate functional integrity of the system hardware and software.

No material or equipment shall be transported until all required tests have been

successfully completed and the material/equipment have been certified' Ready for

shipment' by purchaser.

Purchaser reserves the right to involve and satisfy himself at each and every stage of

testing. They shall be free to request specific tests on equipment considered necessary

by them, although not listed in this specification. The cost of performing all tests shall

be borne by the vendor.

Bidder to note that acceptance of any equipment or the exemption of inspection

testing shall in no way absolve the bidder of the responsibility for delivering the

equipment meeting all the specified requirements.

It shall be bidder's responsibility to modify and/or replace any hardware or

software if the specified functions are not completely achieved satisfactorily

during FAT.

Schedule of FAT shall be included in the Bidder's proposal.

Vendor shall not replace any component/module/subsystem unless it has failed and a

log of such failures shall be maintained during FAT. If a malfunction of

module/component in a subsystem repeats, the test shall be terminated and vendor

shall replace the faulty component/module. Thereafter test shall start all over again. If

a subsystem fails during FAT and is not repaired and made successfully operational

within 4 hours of active repair time after the failure, the test shall be suspended and

restarted all over again only after vendor has replaced the device into acceptable

operational condition.

Testing and FAT shall be carried out in two phases. The minimum requirement for

testing during these two phases shall be as follows



Under the first phase, vendor shall perform tests at his works to ensure that all

components function in accordance with the specification for each type of test. A test

report shall be submitted for purchaser review within two weeks of completion of this

test. All subsystem shall undergo a minimum of 30 days burn in period. Following

tests shall be performed by the vendor and reports shall be forwarded to purchaser.

(a) Quality control test which shall be carried out to assure quality of all

components and modules.

(b) System pre-test which shall be physical check of all modules, racks, cabinets

etc.

(c) System power-up test which shall test functionally all hardware, racks, cabinets

etc.

The second phase of testing shall systematically, fully and functionally test all

hardware and software in the presence of purchaser representative. All subsystems

shall be interconnected to simulate, as close as possible, the total integrated

system. Following minimum tests shall be carried out.

(a) Visual and mechanical testing

(b) High voltage and insulation testing

(c) Functional testing

This shall include the simulation of each input and output to verify proper system

response. The testing as a minimum shall include :

(d) Complete system configuration loading

(i) Demonstration of all PLC system builder functions including

addition/deletion of an input/output, addition/deletion of a rung or an

element in a rung generation of dynamic graphics and other views, report

generation etc.

(ii) 100% checking of logic configured in the PLC by connecting switch/lamp

at input/output.

(iii)Checking of scan time as per specification

(iv) System redundancy check including correct change over of the back-up

unit in case of failure of main unit. These shall be applicable for following:

• CPU Rack to Rack Redundancy

• Each CPU to host system communication interface & communication

link redundancy

• I/O subsystem to processor system communication redundancy

(v) System diagnostic checking for all subsystems on local level as well as on console,

including checking of the auto testing software for I/O modules/signal

conditioning modules.

(vi) Checking of output status on processor failure

(vii) Checking of first-out alarm generation



NOTE : Vendor to submit I/O Count for PLC along with the unpriced bid

8.1.36 SYSTEM CABINET FOR COMPUTER ELECTRONICS

Cubicles for control room mounted instrument/ System cabinet to house rack

mountable computer electronics shall be free standing enclosed type and designed for

bottom entry cable connection.

The cabinets/ cubicles shall be fabricated cold rolled steel Sheet of minimum 2 mm

thickness.

Both rear and front door shall be provided for computer System cabinet. Doors

shall have lockable handles. System cabinet should have front glass door.

In order to remove dissipated heat from the cabinet, blowers shall be provided. In

case blowers are insufficient, ventilation fans can be provided.

Illuminations shall be provided inside cabinet by fluorescent lamps and door

operated switch.

Gland plate shall be provided at bottom of cabinet for cable entry. Necessary cable

glands shall be supplied by vendor.

2 Nos. lifting eye bolts shall be provided.

The finish of the cabinet shall include sand blasting, chemical cleaning, Surface finish

by suitable fillers and two coats of high grade lacquer storing enamel paint as per

requirement

Painting shade: Shade 631 as Per IS 5 or RAL 7032.

8.1.37 SPECIFICATION OF BARRIER GATE

Type

: Electrically operated barrier system

with complete drive motor & drive

mechanism box. 4 band circuit

controller, counter balance channel

and weights, control switch gear etc.

for 6 meter (approx.) wide gate.

Operating time : Closing/Opening operation within 10

seconds.

In case of card/ Sensor failure : Manual(electrical) control available at

Security room

Operating in manual

(electrical) mode : Remote push button control from

Control room for opening and

Closing of gates.



Operating while power failure : Manually with hand cranking

Attachment

Outputs : 2 Nos potential free contact output

while closing position.

Supply voltage : 440/230 VAC, 50 Hz


IR sensors : To be provided to sense the passage

of truck

Construction:

18th

Square mild steel pedestal made out of 10mm thick MS plate.

Square type boom made out of 10 gauge aluminium sheet with suspended pendent

fringes, painted as per standard Colour combination i.e. Yellow & black Colour bands

painted alternate, circular tangent fixed on the boom painted with "STOP" lettering,

caution high box complete with heavy duty brass light holder, bulb, wiring etc.

MS fabricated boom support with spring loaded plate with rubber padding.

Necessary warning device to give Beep-Beep-Beep sound as the boom of barrier gate

starts coming down for closure of gate shall be provided.

Floor mounted type, sheet metal controller panel box complete with red & green

indicators to indicate closed & open position of barrier respectively, 3 Nos. push

buttons and over load release suitable for operation of barrier.

Separate wall mounted remote control panel with 3 Nos. push buttons to be

installed on outer face of security room wall.

Job also includes providing necessary RCC foundation complete with foundation

bolts, etc.



8.1.38 SPECIFICATION FOR ELECTRONIC DISPLAY BOARD WITH

INTEGRATED VOICE ASSEMBLY NEAR ENTRY GATE

Make : As per approved Vendor list

Type of Display Board : Weather Proof IP65 , Electromagnetic Display

with embedded LCD/Dot matrix LCD

Visibility : Day & Night

Size of mosaic : 15 mm square / equivalent

Matrix of mosaics : Min.100 x 7 arranged along length x width.

Total 700 dots./ Equivalent

Colour of mosaic : One side fluorescent yellow and another side

black / equivalent

LEDS : Centre of each mosaic shall have an yellow-

green LCD/ equivalent

No. of display lines : 5 ( FIVE )

Character height : 105 mm ( 4.13")

No. of characters per line : 16

Display area/line : 1500 x 105 mm

Power supply : 230 V +/- 10% , 50 Hz +/- 5%, single phase

A/C mains

Power requirement : To be informed by vendor

Visibility : Upto 55 mtrs. Excellent visibility reqd. during

day & light, low ambient light and night.

Angle view : Upto 150 0`

Communicating link between PC

and Display Board : Via RS-422/RS 485 interface

Communication protocol : Vendor to specify

Dimensions of the Board : 1750 mm {W} x 1050 {H} minimum

Integrated Voice Announcement

System : Via sound blaster card housed in PC. The

selected 5 lines should be announced using the

voice software for conversion of displayed

alpha-numeric character to voice in 3 languages

Enclosure : CRCA powder coated enclosure to be housed

inside building

Mounting : Table top

Languages : English, Hindi and regional language [ any one

specified]

Order in which the

announcement should be made : Hindi, Regional Language and English

No. of times announcement to be

made : 3 times of each line in different languages

Logic for display and

announcement : Vendor to specify.

Display mode : Out of the 5 lines displayed, 4 lines should

display the Truck Registration Number

allocated to 4 loading bays. The 5th line should

flash the Truck Registration Number with the

words "WL" against it to advice that the truck is

"Wait Listed".



Sequence for converting the

Wait Listed Truck Registration

Number

: If any one truck fails to report to the allocated

Bay Number within a reasonable time, the

Terminal Manager has to allocate a bay number

to the Wait Listed truck and move the non-

responsive Truck Registration Number into a

special position in the PC for calling later on.

This software has to be incorporated in the LRC

by the vendor.

Audio Amplifier capacity : Philips make / Model No LBD 1912 , 120 Watts

Mounting options for Display : Suitable for wall mounting or hang mounting or

frame mounting.

Duty : Outdoor duty.

Speakers :

Mounting : TT Parking area through suitable cabling

Horn speaker : Required, 6 Nos

LBD 8347 + LBD 8308, 15 Watts RMS

Box Speaker : Required , 2nos , LBD 8372,4 Watts RMS

Enclosure For speaker : Weather proof IP 65



8.1.39 MASTER STATION

Supply of Microprocessor based control station (Master station) provided to

control and monitor all motor operated valve actuators is in the scope of this

tender. Master station shall be located in main control room and interfaced with

plant PLC through RS-485 redundant serial communication link with Modbus

protocol. Plant PLC and master station will operate on master/slave mode. Master

station shall receive commands like open/close/stop from the PLC and shall

operate the valves. All information about all actuators shall be available at PLC

through master station.

Master station shall have the following minimum features: -

� It shall have capacity to connect and control minimum 200 motor actuated

valves. It shall have provision for extending the no of nodes in case required in

future.

� It shall have REDUNDANCY in communication, processor and power supply

and there shall be bump less transfer in case of failure of any one of the above.

� It shall have LCD/LED display unit with provision of operating the valves

from master station in stand-alone mode.

� It shall have facilities to set parameters like baud rate, address, skipping of few

actuators during maintenance, etc.

� It shall have capacity to receive at least 25 digital signals and 5 analog signals

through communication link from each valve actuator.

� It shall have it's dedicated self diagnostic features to find out faults like cable

fault (for cable open and cable short or grounded), actuator communication is

not reached and all actuator faults and alarms, etc) and it shall have real time

clock to monitor alarm events/data/faults.

� It shall have capacity to store and display the following events. The memory

size shall be 20% extra for future expansion.

a) Valve actuator and control signals and its operation status.

b) Number of operations of each MOV'S from its normal state.

c) Valve and operator position log

d) Actuator control status log

e) Statistics

f) Historical data/ events

g) Actuator failure information.

The master station shall be connected to each field mounted valve actuator through

redundant communication interface link and back to master station in ring

topology. It shall perform tasks of data collecting from each actuator, storing the

data's and receiving the command signals from PLC and send the same to

respective actuators for it's operation. It shall be possible to operate the valve from

the master station. When MOV'S are operated from master station, the command

signals form the Plant PLC are ignored and only status signals shall be sent to

PLC. Contractor shall include necessary software and hardware to establish serial



communication link. If any special programming tool is required the same shall be

supplied.

The supply of valves, actuators and FCU is not in the scope of this tender. The

connection of FCU to Interface box ( if required) , looping and terminating at

Master station is in the scope of the tenderer.

It is to be noted that only five nos. valve actuators are of Limit torque make and

balance are of Rotork make. Supply of PCM cards and related software

modification in PLC to enable communicate limit torque actuators with the PLC is

included in the scope of supply of PLC. The cabling, erection, testing,

commissioning is included in the scope of the tenderer. The valve supplier shall

assist the automation contractor in integration.

Master station and field units shall be protected against lightening by the provision

of transient suppressor devices on all 2 wire connection ports at 1.5 KV at 1 mS.

Opto isolation shall be used within the field units and Master station for enhanced

noise protection.



8.1.40 ENGINEERING SPARES

Minimum engineering spares to be made available by the tenderer as part of his

supply is as follows:

a) 25% spare instrument interface electronics viz. barriers, signal distributors,

alarm cards, RTD / mA converters

b) 25% spare interlock items such as relays, lamps, push buttons, selector

switches, diodes, lamp covers etc.

c) 25 % additional spare terminal strips

d) 25 % additional spare ladder, perforated cable trays for routing the cables

e) 25 % additional cables (number of cores) for various internal wiring

f) All cables shall have additional loop of 5 mts at each end.

g) 30 % additional mounting space slot

h) 25 % additional cable glands

i) 25 % additional spare feeders for each power supply levels

j) 25 % additional MCB's

k) 25 % spare junction boxes for each type.

The above 25% spares shall be subject to minimum of one number of each type.

Each cabinet shall be designed to accommodate 10% minimum additional

equipment including 10% spare cable points.



9.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION FOR AUTOMATION SYSTEM

9.1 INTRODUCTION

This specification defines the minimum requirements of terminal Automation

System designed for reliable, effective and optimum control & monitoring of

marketing terminal Operations.

In order to distribute petroleum products and keep track of the material movement

computerized Terminal Automation Systems is envisaged. The Terminal

Automation System, hereafter called the system or “TAS”, shall be capable of

terminal wide automation. All functions defined in this specification shall be

performed in an integrated cohesive manner. The architecture of the system shall

accommodate both functional and geographical distribution of the hardware,

software, and database over the terminal while allowing system wide access to the

distributed data. The TAS shall utilize a modular architecture to permit wide range

of system configurations and facilitate system flexibility and expendability. It shall

include real-time control at the field instrumentation level, supervisory control,

access control, terminal security, transaction processing and product inventory

tracking at terminal level.

The terminal automation system software (Latest version) shall be governed by the

operating system running in a real time mode and shall be able to meet all

functional requirements as specified minimum.

This customized system shall be working in tandem with the instrumentation

system, which in turn controls and monitors the entire terminal.

The system architecture shall be open, providing data movement horizontally and

vertically throughout the operations structure.

The field communication shall be through redundant RS-232C or RS485

communications interface for data transmission to PLC/ LRC.

The system shall be provided with diagnostic features, which monitor the signal

performance and hardware status.

The system shall be able to communicate with all common makes of Supervisory

Control Data Acquisition packages and Programmable Logic Controllers.

The basic function of this system shall be as follows.

� Controlling and monitoring the Product movement.

� Controlling the Loading



� Access control

� Emergency shut down

� Data Acquisition and controlling various instrumentation

� Generating history Profile

� Reporting and Displays

9.2 Scope of Work

Scope includes supply & integration of complete hardware and software for

Terminal Automation System with various sub – systems including all installation

materials required to meet the specified functional requirement. Scope includes

Factory Testing and Acceptance of the complete system.

The Terminal Automation system (Latest version), proposed shall consist of the

following subsystem:

� Automation sub-system including loading rack computers.

� Flow metering and loading sub-system.

� Tank Farm Management sub-system.

� Plant control sub-system using PLC.

� Truck Data Management (TDM) system. etc.

� Operator Interface Computer Module (OIC)

� Interface to Truck Data Management (TDM) System

The successful Tenderer has to Study, Analyze, Develop and Implement a suitable

Tailor made Customized Application Software to cater for above objective. This

application Software shall form an integral part of Terminal Automation System

(TAS). Required hardware, System Software and Networking (LAN) which is

required for smooth running of application package is also included in the scope of

supply of tenderer. An indicative architecture of the whole application is given in

enclosed drawing.

These various software modules / subsystems shall be developed using State-of-

the-art Client–Server Technology on RDBMS platform. The suitable client

software, depending on permission levels shall be running on various PC Clients.

The servers and clients across the campus shall be connected over Fast Ethernet /

fiber optic Local Area Network. This LAN shall be redundant with dual cabling.

The automation vendors LAN shall be connected to HPCL computer system (ERP)

through a CISCO switch, which shall be supplied by HPCL or the specification

shall be given by HPCL. This LAN-Fiber optic connection shall be in the scope of

the Contractor.

Fiber Optic cabling shall be considered for all terminals as required.

Tenderer is required to submit system network configuration as per details

provided in the Tender Document.



The tenderer during detailed engineering shall submit detailed software block

diagram showing various functional modules & tasks for the offered software &

their interconnection.

9.3 HARDWARE SPECIFICATIONS

The proposed automation system shall utilize latest and proven microprocessor-

based device, which shall be configured to perform in real-time, such essential

functions as:

� Data acquisition / Control

� Transaction processing

� Operator interface

� Interactive graphic displays

� Database for data collection, achieving reporting and trending

� Process alarms and system diagnostics.

The system shall be capable of protecting the system integrity and security by

implementation of redundancy for both communication links and system hardware.

In case of failure the switch over shall be automatic and in no way affect the

control operation.

The hardware and system architecture shall be reliable and field proven, High-

grade components of proven quality having high MTBF shall be selected to

achieve the desired functions.



9.3.1 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR LOAD RACK COMPUTER

Make As per approved make

Quantity 2 Nos. for each site

Gen

era

l

Form Factor Tower

Processor Intel® Xeon® Quad Core Processor at 1.6 GHz, 1066 MHz FSB

L2 Cache 2 x 4 MB

Chipset Intel

RAM 2 GB Fully buffered DDR-2 SDRAM 667 MHz ECC memory

Hard Disk Drive 3 x 73 GB SCSI/ SAS HDD Hot Swappable (15K RPM)

Drive Controller Integrated controller

RAID RAID 5

Power Redundant Hot plug power supply

Dual Processor Support Yes

Networking 2 nos. 10/100/1000 GB Network Interface Card (1 integrated, 1 add on)

Expansion Drive Bays 3

I/O Channels (slots) Min. Five (PCI/ PCI-X)

I/O Ports 1 Serial, 1 Parallel, 4 USB Ports

Keyboard PS/2 / USB Windows Keyboard

Mouse PS/2 / USB Optical Scroll Mouse with mouse pad

Optical Drive CDRW/ DVD Combo Drive 48X

Graphics Suitable graphics adapter with 16MB of Video RAM

Operating System Windows 2003 preloaded and on media (CD) with paper licence and

recovery media

Monitor 19" TFT Color Monitor (HP/ L1906)

Resolution 1280 x 1024 (SXGA)

Contrast Ratio 400 to 1

Viewing Angle 140 / 130 (H/V)

Response Time <= 20 ms

Sp

ecif

icati

on

s

Brightness 250 nits

USB / Parallel port converters shall be provided in absence of parallel ports



9.3.2 SPECIFICATIONS FOR CLIENT COMPUTERS ( TTES/ OIC/TDM/ENGG.

STN.)

The Tenderer shall supply, install and commission Client PCs. These Client PCs shall be

put into work all over the campus of the terminal and shall be connected to the server over

LAN. The Client component of the application software has to be developed suitably to

run on these PCs.

The OIC and TTES computer shall have the same functionalities built in so that they are

interchangeable. The same functionalities shall be made available in the Plant manager

computer too.


Quantity TTES-2, OIC-2, OIC/ES-1, TDM-2

Gen

era

l

Form Factor Mini Tower

Processor Intel Core 2 Duo, 1.8 GHz with 2 MB L2 Cache

Chipset Intel® latest suitable

FSB 800 MHz

RAM 1 GB DDR-2 SDRAM

BIOS With built in diagnostic setup, APM/ACPI/DMI support.

Hard Disk Drive 1 No. 80GB SATA (7200 RPM)

Hard Disk Controller Integrated SATA

Networking 2 nos. 10/100/1000 GB NIC

Slots Four ( PCI / PCI-X full height)

Keyboard PS/2 / USB Windows keyboard

Mouse PS/2 / USB Optical Mouse with scroll as per

I/O Ports 1 serial, 1 parallel & 6 USB port

CDROM Drive CDRW/ DVD Combo drive 48X

Audio Ports microphone-in, speakers/line-out

Graphics Integrated Intel® Graphics Media Accelerator

Operating System Windows XP professional / Vista Ultimate on media with

recovery CD

Expansion Bays One inernal & One external bay shall be free after fixing all

devices as per specs.

Sp

ecif

icati

on

s

SMPS Capable to support one additional device with adequate power

connectors



9.3.3 SPECIFICATIONS FOR TFMS MACHINE


Model As per OEM

Quantity 1

Gen

era

l

Form Factor Tower/ Mini Tower

Processor Intel Core 2 Duo 1.86 GHz, 4 MB L2 Cache

Chipset Intel® suitable latest

FSB 1066 MHz

RAM 1 GB DDR-2 SDRAM

Hard Disk Drive 1 No. 80GB SATA (7200 RPM)

Hard Disk Controller Integrated SATA

Networking 2 nos. 10/100/1000 GB NIC

Slots Four ( PCI / PCI-X full height)

Keyboard PS/2 / USB Windows keyboard

Mouse PS/2 / USB Optical Mouse with scroll with mouse pad

I/O Ports 1 serial, 1 parallel & 4 USB port

CDROM Drive CDRW/ DVD Combo drive 48X

Audio Ports microphone-in, speakers/line-out

Graphics Nvidia Quadro NVS 285 with 128 MB graphics card or

equivalent

Sp

ecif

ica

tio

ns

Operating System Windows XP professional / Vista Ultimate preloaded and on

media with license/ recovery CD



9.3.4 SPECIFICATION FOR GATEWAY SERVER


Model As per OEM

Quantity 2 Nos. Gen

era

l

Form Factor Tower

Processor Intel Core 2 Duo 1.86 GHz, 4 MB L2 Cache

Front Side Bus 800MHz

Chipset Intel

RAM 1 GB ECC DDR2 SDRAM.

BIOS With built in diagnostic setup, APM/ACPI/DMI support.

Hard Disk Drive 1 Nos. 80 GB, 7200 RPM SATA HDD

Drive Controller Integrated Serial ATA Controller

Networking 3 nos. 10/100/1000 GB NIC with Wake On LAN

Expansion Drive Bays 2 x 3.5'' Hard Drive

I/O Slots 4 (PCI /PCI-X full height)

I/O Ports 1 Serial, 1 Parallel, 4 USB Ports

Keyboard PS/2 / USB Windows Keyboard

Mouse PS/2 / USB Optical Scroll Mouse with mouse pad

Optical Drive CDRW/ DVD Combo drive 48X

Graphics Integrated Video controller with 16 MB Video RAM

Operating System Windows 2003 preloaded and on media (CD) with paper license and

recovery media

Sp

ecif

icati

on

s

SMPS Capable to support one additional device with adequate power

connectors

should be Microsoft Windows compliant with Logo on the system.

SMPS shall be able to support atleast one additional device namely internal CD writer /

additional 40 or 60 / 80 GB HDD, complete with adequate power connectors.

Certificate from vendor regarding compatibility with Windows 2003 shall be submitted.

All necessary drivers for all components of the server for windows 2003 / NetWare should

be supplied with each server.

Server should be manageable through vendors’ management software

USB/Parallel port converters shall be provided in absence of parallel ports



9.3.5 SPECIFICATIONS FOR DOT MATRIX PRINTER Tenderer shall supply, install, and commission dot matrix printers required for text and graphics

printout.

The printers shall be put on the LAN and shall be accessed over the LAN.


Model As per OEM

Quantity 2 Nos. for each site

No. of pins in head 24

Printer Type Dot Matrix / Laser

Print Direction Bi-Directional logic seeking in both text and graphics

No. of columns 136 column

Print speed 300 Cps @ Draft 12 cpi, 360 cps @ high speed draft 12 cpi

Printer Driver Win 9X, NT, 2000, ME, XP, DOS

Interface standard RS 232 Serial interface

Operating voltage 150 – 270 V AC

Frequency 47.0 Hz – 53.0 Hz

Power Consumption 12 W in idle mode and 36 W in operating mode

Temperature 5 to 50 Deg. C

Relative Humidity 20% to 80% - RH - NC

Emulation ESC/P and IBM emulation with auto switching

Font HSD, Draft, Roman, Sans, Courier, Script, Prestige, ORC-A, ORC-B,

Operator, Operator-5

Pri

nte

r S

pec

ific

ati

on

s

Paper feed Cut sheet – Top friction, Continuous – Rear push tractor

9.3.6 SPECIFICATIONS FOR MONITORS FOR ALL COMPUTERS/ SERVERS

Monitor 19" TFT Color Monitor

Resolution 1280 x 1024

Contrast Ratio 400 to 1

Viewing Angle 140 / 130 (H/V)

Response Time <= 20 ms

Brightness 250 nits



9.3.7 SPECIFICATIONS FOR MANAGED ETHERNET SWITCH


Model As per OEM

Quantity 2 Nos. for each location

Type Managed and Stackable

No. of Ports 24

Protocol TCP/ IP

LAN Protocol IEEE 802.3

Bandwidth 100 Mbps fast Ethernet

Connector RJ45

Console Port type Serial (9 Pin)

Power input 100 to 240 V AC, 50 Hz

Dimensions 4.4 (H) X 44.1 (W) X 20.7 (D) cm

Operating Humidity 10% to 95% non condensing Man

ag

ed E

ther

net

S

wit

ch

MAC address entries 8000



9.3.8 RAID LEVEL V

The LRC shall have Internal RAID V controller with 3 Hard disks of 73 GB.

9.4 LOCAL AREA NETWORKING (LAN)

The tenderer shall estimate design supply, install, and commission a separate local

area network (LAN) other than control network, for the connecting Servers and

Client PCs.

9.4.1 NETWORK REQUIREMENTS

The automation system communication shall be on the high-speed modern local

area network (LAN) confirming to IEEE 802.3 standards and utilize industry

standard protocols with minimum 100 Mbps bandwidth.

To ensure maximum reliability, communications shall be dual redundant. The

communications system shall be capable of sustaining loss of one media channel

without loss of data or performance degradation.

Ethernet Switches with auto sensing for 100 MBPS port selection & Simple

Network Management Protocol support (Managed Switches) are to be used for

establishing LAN inter-connectivity in dual redundant configuration. All the STP /

UTP / Co-axial cabling within Ethernet network should have 100% redundancy or

better.

20 % spare ports are to be provided on each of the Ethernet Switches.

Loss of communications shall not cause loss of control at the local subsystem.

The communication software should employ a peer to peer communications

(master less) protocol between all sub-systems where-ever applicable.

The automation system shall be able to integrate terminal wide network data into

common Terminal Automation Software functions such as user displays, historical

recording and reports.

Loss of a subsystem or module shall not disrupt communications to other

subsystems or result in performance degradation. Loss of a subsystem or module

shall cause automatic isolation by pass of the failed subsystem without disrupting

communications & without performance degradation; loss of a subsystem or

module or module channel shall generate a diagnostic message to be displayed at

the operator stations and logged identifying location / type of fault.

Dedicated Front End Communication Processors / Terminal Server / LAN Server /

ACU are to be offered with 100 % redundancy in hardware with 20 % spare ports



capacity. Critical communication channels / physical links from devices such as

batch controllers, communication interface unit (TFMS), PLC shall be connected

in dual redundant configuration to serial ports of the primary & secondary

(redundant) Terminal Server / Communication Processor.

The LAN connectivity between the main control room & the TDM computer / JDE

client & Terminal Manager Computer shall be established using redundant (two

physical runs) 4-core armored fiber optic cabling with necessary fiber optic

transceivers as per specifications & run in separate GI conduits.

The main data highway shall be based on IEEE 802.3 standard and shall be OPC

compliant.

The network shall have at least following features / components.

� 10 / 100 Fast Ethernet Switch based LAN

� 10 / 100 Fast Ethernet stackable Switches with optical, AUI and BNC ports,

with gigabyte backbone support.

� Enhanced UTP CAT 6 Structured Cabling for internal cabling. Fiber optic

Cabling for inter building / Cross Campus cabling Suitable LIU, Fiber to

Copper Converters Etc.

� RJ 45 I/O outlets

� Jack Panels / Patch Panels

� Patch Cables

� Any other networking component required for smooth operation of LAN

The tenderer shall submit complete Local Area Networking plan by clearly

mentioning following

� Layout of LAN mapped on the General Layout

� Logical Scheme of LAN in form of Block Diagram

� Details (Makes, Models, Specs etc) and Nos. of various components (Switches,

Hubs, LIUs, etc)

� Cabling Details and Estimates

9.5 SOFTWARE PLATFORM

9.5.1 SERVER OPERATING SYSTEM

9.5.1.1 LRC Server Operating System

The tenderer shall supply, install and commission suitable Windows operating

system based machine with proper licensing on both the server and suitably tuned

redundancy. One of the servers shall be Master and other shall be Hot Standby.

The servers shall have OS Mirroring and the operating system shall be capable of

achieving redundancy at server level by use of suitable Asymmetric Hi-

Availability Software.

The Hi-Availability Software shall have atleast the following features.



� Failure Detection with Heartbeat or Similar Mechanism

� Login Consistency

� Rebooting

� Avoid False Triggering

� Service Modules

� Administration

� Configuration Flexibility

� Expandability and Scalability

� Ease of Use

9.5.1.2 Gateway server operating system

The tenderer shall supply; install and commission suitable Windows operating

system based machine with proper licensing only on one of the servers.

The tenderer shall supply, install, and commission suitable preloaded Windows

2003 Standard Server (SP3 minimum) and media (CD) with paper license and

recovery media.

All necessary drivers for all components for Windows 2003 should be supplied with

the server(s).

9.5.2 CLIENT OPERATING SYSTEM

The tenderer shall supply, install and commission Microsoft Windows XP

Operating System with proper licensing on all the clients and suitably tune them

for running the application.

9.5.3 RELATIONAL DATABASE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (RDBMS)

The tenderer shall supply, install and commission ORACLE OR SQL or

equivalent for the system. The server component of the RDBMS shall be suitably

loaded onto both the servers to achieve fault tolerance and redundancy and proper

tuning shall be made in Database to interact suitably with HA Software. The

application package shall be developed on this platform. The RDBMS server shall

be tuned for performing the necessary tasks (i.e. Data Replications etc.) to

maintain the fault tolerance and redundancy of the entire TAS package. The

necessary client components shall be installed on the client PCs and tuned to run in

tandem with the server component.

9.5.4 GUI BASED RAPID APPLICATION DEVELOPMENT TOOLS

The tenderer shall use suitable GUI based rapid application development tools

(viz. Microsoft Visual Studio) for the development of the TAS application

package.

9.5.5 SNMP BASED NETWORK MANAGEMENT SOFTWARE



The tenderer shall supply, install and commission SNMP based network

management Software for Microsoft Windows XP based Network to mange the

campus wide networking from the control room.

9.5.6 TAILOR-MADE APPLICATION SOFTWARE

General

A modular GUI based Application package shall be designed, developed,

implemented and commissioned to meet the whole terminal operation.

The software should have excellent features in regard to real time data acquisition,

data & alarm processing, database downloading, Terminal security, access etc. The

software should also meet our desired operational criterion in regard to T/T

loading, scheduling, stock recording, monitoring & control of product movement.

The Application package shall be of Client - Server Architecture with RDBMS

running at backend. The entire Application Package for these terminal automation

systems shall be essentially:

Scalable: scalability features of the entire system shall be clearly indicated.

Flexible: The offered systems shall be flexible enough to accommodate minor

changes required by user during the operations. The features related to this shall be

clearly described.

User Friendly: The entire application shall be developed to incorporate maximum

user friendliness.

Latest Technology: The offered systems shall be of with latest technology with

all state-of-the art features.

The tailor-made application software shall be continuously uploading and

downloading DATA / Commands with the instrumentation systems. The

application software shall in turn store the filtered data in related databases for

various purposes like Displays, Trending, Reports etc.

While developing this tailor made application software the developer shall

consider the following points.

All modules of application packages shall be developed on and around RDBMS

(viz. ORACLE, SQL server).

The fronted of the application package shall be developed using any popular

Visual RAD Tools (viz. Visual Basic 6.0, Visual C ++ etc.)

The various modules shall be developed to work in tandem with each other as well

as in standalone mode if required.

In case of failure of link between Server and Client, server component of

application shall be able to update and synchronize the data when link comes up.



Reporting modules shall be able to generate business graphics.

The features specified under this document are indicative, however tenderer is free

to offer suggestions. The final features shall be frozen during the detail engineering

stage.

9.6 MODULES / SUBSYSTEMS

The Application package shall be modular and cover all essential functions of

terminal operations. The data available for modules shall be suitably shared across

the application.

9.6.1 TERMINAL SECURITY SYSTEM (TSS) / TANK TRUCK ENTRY SYSTEM

The function of this module is to keep track of Tank Truck Movements for

Terminal. As and when a Tank Truck reports at the entry point, this Module shall

be activated. The operator makes an entry of the truck index to download truck

details from TDM and a FAN (Filling Advice Note) is generated, allocating Bay

No., Filling Recipe, Etc. The same information shall be uploaded to LRC module

for calculation, control and downloading of various parameters to the related

control devices deployed to execute loading operation on respective loading bays.

9.6.2 LOAD RACK COMPUTING SYSTEM MODULE (LRC)

Load Rack Computing Systems (LRCS) is the heart of the entire terminal

automation. The main computation model shall be running in this module and this

module shall work as the master module of all other modules. This module shall be

of hot redundant and fault tolerant in nature and shall be developed to run

simultaneously on two machines to avoid failure, ideally with two concurrent

instances with complete synchronization. The information for bay allocation and

truck details, including FAN flows from TTES module. LRCS shall integrate data

from other modules and calculate various parameters for loading the trucks. These

parameters shall be downloaded to the control and instrumentation device for

execution of loading operation. In turn devices shall talk to this module to store

feed back data which are to be stored in proper fashion in the database. This

module shall be capable of handling exceptions and alarm raised by the

instrumentation and control devices. It shall also be capable of transmitting the

alarm over dual Ethernet LAN / FO LAN to the desired workstations / Nodes.

The LRC system shall be configured as a distributed real time computing

Environment consisting of two LRC servers working in hot standby mode. The

two LRC’s can either operate in primary server or standby server mode. Only one

of them can operate as primary server at any instant. In the event of failure of one

server the other completely takes over without any data loss or integrity. The

master databases stored in LRC automatically duplicates the databases between

LRC1 and LRC2 using suitable software feature



In the hot standby mode, LRC server-1 shall be running the entire Terminal

Automation Software in primary mode and LRC computer-2 will be hot stand by

to LRC computer-1. The complete system database consisting of real time values,

equipment status and configuration related data base files shall reside in primary

computer and the same shall be dynamically updated in the stand by computer so

as to take care of the entire terminal operation bumplessly on failure of primary

computer. On restoration, the failed computer shall automatically become hot

stand by and should function in synchronized pair with complete updating of files

and database automatically.

The LRC software (Latest version) for TAS should be offered complete with

standard third party interface software functional modules like Open data base

connectivity (ODBC); Microsoft Excel Data Exchange Interchange; to enable the

LRC system to be integrated with TDM system.

LRC computer will be interfaced to the TDM computer / JDE server on dual TCP /

IP communication via Gateway server. The connectivity between TDM and LRC

(including cable laying) will be the tenderer’s responsibility.

For invoice generation, LRC shall consider the density of product in the header.

Density of gashol shall be calculated by the LRC based on the density measured at

the individual MS and ethanol headers.

Flexibility should be kept in the software to re-designate each tank, pump for a

new product which will in turn maintain the stock accounts as per the change.

P/L Receipt screens, Tank farm receipt, to indicate all field instruments real time

values.

Inter tank transfer screens shall be provided.

Gantry overview screen shall be provided.

Tank farm overview with MOV open/close status and Pump house overview with

MOV open/close status to be given based on piping diagrams provided by HPCL.

RIT status screen shall be provided on the graphics of LRC/OIC. Flashing status /

sequence should mirror the field status of the RIT.

All tanks level, water level, gross vol., net vol. etc to be given.

Adequate help screens to be provided.

The software shall provide extensive user-friendly tools for creation of dynamic

displays and total system configuration. All the Engineering tools shall be initiated

within the system.

Security: Access to Operator / Engineering Station functions shall be provided by a

multi-level password system.



Tenderer has to confirm each point as per table given below:

SN. LRC SOFTWARE FEATURES HPCL REQUIREMENT

A.1. Server failover alarm announced Audibly

& Visually.

YES, For both primary & secondary

server.

2. Ethernet failover alarm announced

Audibly & Visually.

YES, For both primary & secondary LAN.

3. LRC Server failover time. Maximum 30 seconds that includes real

time Database as well as RDBMS.

4. Operator / Client station connection to

Redundant Server.

Operator / Client station should always

connect to Primary Server.

5. Time taken by operator stations / client

stations to connect/ upload data from

active primary server.

Maximum 30 seconds for all

operator/client stations.

6. RAID DIAGNOSTICS. Hard disk failover should be annunciated

Audibly & Visually.

7. Electronic preset communication channel

failover.

Communication channel failover should be

Audibly & Visually annunciated.

8. PLC CPU Failover alarm announced

Audibly & Visually.

YES; For both primary & secondary PLC.

9 PLC to I/O Rack communication failover Active / Backup communication link status

should be displayed on a standard display

& failover shall be annunciated both

audibly & visually.

9. PLC Scan Time 100 m sec for interlock logic ( DI / DO )

500 msec for AI / AO

10. PLC Interrogation Bulk Power Supply Redundant Power Supply Required

11. Each PLC Processor Rack to Host System

Communication Redundancy

Redundancy shall be provided by use of

two dedicated communication processor

modules in each PLC CPU Rack

12. PLC DO Module DO Module shall be provided with in-built

fuse blow protection, maximum I/O

module density 8/16 points.

13. PLC I/O Modules Connection All I/O modules shall be connected with

field signals through use of intermediate

Remote Termination Panel / Field

Termination Assembly

14. Interconnection of Field Devices to PLC

/ Terminal Server

Safety Barriers shall be used for

interfacing IS devices to PLC system /

Terminal Server

15. PLC I/O Racks Bus Topology All I/O Racks shall be multi-dropped on

dual redundant bus

16. Auto I/O Testing Required

17. PLC to I/O Rack communication failover. Active / Backup communication link status

should be displayed on a standard display

& failover should be annunciated both

Audibly & Visually.

B.1. User assignable different alarm priorities

for point in alarm

Minimum Three shall be provided;

EMERGENCY / HIGH / LOW.

2. PV in alarm state should be flashing / User configurable required for both



change color on all displays displaying

the point.

features.

3. Alarm banner / display of alarm. Dedicated alarm line on all displays

required; Most current emergency alarm

should POP UP on screen as a X-

WINDOW; User configurable.

4. Acknowledge alarm by selecting any

point in the display & press a dedicated

Acknowledge Button.

Required.

5. Indication of point on a display still in

alarm but Acknowledged

Yes ; In Red Color.

6. Indication of point on a display which has

had an alarm which has returned to

normal but without Acknowledgement.

Yes ; Flashing in normal color.

7. Multiple alarm entries in the alarm

summary for a point that is fluctuating

between alarms.

Yes ; Required.

8. Associated display for points when

clicked OR Double clicked when in

alarm.

Yes ; Required ; Associated display should

provide details of alarm Deadband ; Alarm

limits as minimum.

9 Software features listed 1 to 8 above

should be available as a standard

configurable utilty as a part of

SCADA/MMI Development pack license.

Programmed or VB plus Scripted utility

shall not be acceptable

Yes; Required

C. 1 Trend types available. Minimum multi plot ;

X – Y Plot ; Numeric plot required.

2. Vertical axis readings. Engineering units & percentage readings

required.

3. Comparison between Real Time;

Historical & Archived Data.

Trend comparison availability required.

4. Copy of currently selected trend data on

to Clipboard for pasting into spreadsheet.

Yes; Required.

5. Automatic displaying of archived history

if trend is scrolled past current history

limits.

Yes; Required.

6. Trending of archived history files. Yes; Required.



configurable utilty as a part of SCADA/

MMI Development pack license.



Yes; Required

D.1. Activation of archiving. Operator demand; Periodic Scheduling OR

event initiated as minimum.

E. 1 Activation reports. Operator demand; Periodic Scheduling OR

Event initiated facility required.

2. Configurable custom reports. Yes; Required; Either inbuilt OR third

party eg. SEAGATE CRYSTAL

REPORTS TOOL.



3. Microsoft Excel as per Formatted report. Yes; Required.

4. Results from reports stored in user

database.

Yes; Required.

F. 1 Automatic logout of user interface after

pre-configured time of inactivity.

Yes; Required.

2. Control level Functionality. Operator; Manager level control

functionality user assignable to each point

required.

G.1. Programming languages. Minimum Visual Basic; C++ Support /

compiler required. Real time data

acquisition Data point management with

settings for alarms etc Supports links to its

own GUI and also API for generic

languages such as VC++ , VB etc Interface

with external database for History etc

H.1. Export data directly into Excel

spreadsheet.

Yes ; Required.

2. Retrieve real time / historical data from

primary Server using Microsoft Excel.

Yes ; Required



configurable utilty as a part of




Yes; Required

I. 1 Nos. of utilities required to configure

parameter value points, printers; stations;

controllers.

Vendor to specify.

2. Changes to common fields of points,

controllers, and station should be globally

applicable.

Yes; Required

3. User fields for each point for tagging

information like cabinet Nos. / wire Nos.

Yes; Required ,



configurable utility as a part of




Yes; Required

J 1. Predefined area on screen for operator

messaging.

Yes; Required

2. Function keys. User configurable; Frequently used tasks

can be accomplished using dedicated

function keys.

3. Zooming facility for trend display. Yes; Required

4. Standard Windowing conventions

employed.

Yes; required

5. Configurable Toolbar Icons & Pull Down

Menus.

Yes; Required

6. Time Zone Availability. Time Zone should be displayed on each

station.

7. Standard display for displaying Alarm summary display Required. Alarm



unacknowledged Alarms & Alarms,

which have been, Acknowledged but still

in Alarm.

summary should show / differentiate

Alarm status by flashing/color change;

User configurable.

8. Summary pages for reports, Trends,

Displays & Groups.

Yes; Required.

9. Point detail display. Yes; Required.

10. Group detail display. Yes; Required.

11. Software features listed 1 to 10 above


configurable utility as a part of




Yes; Required

12 Display pages/ Builder Format All system display shall be HTML Format

as minimum

K.1. Time taken to call a particular screen

from any other screen with all the

contents.

2 Sec.

2. Time taken to get a control target selected

after Mouse click.

2 Sec.

3. Time taken for execution of any remote

command from Operator stations i.e.

Remote Stop command from time

operator to reach field after issuing it at

operator station.

4 Sec.

4. Time taken for Valve status that has

changed in the field to get updated on

display.

4 Sec.

5. Card Reader , RIT and Data entry panel

RESPONSE TIME ( Time between

pressing a pushbutton & corresponding

bulbs indication changing)

4 Sec.

6. Time taken between card flashing &

barrier gate opening.

8 Sec.

7. Time taken between card flashing &

corresponding Batch controller message

appearance.

7 Sec.

8. Time for complete database update for the

entire terminal.

10 Sec.

9. Time for controller scanning including

input, calculation and output.

1 Sec.

10. Time for Non-controlled input. 2 Sec.

11. Time for Building CRT display. 2 Sec.

12. Filling time considering 1 no. 3

compartment 12 kl tank truck at normal

filling rate of 65 m3/hr.

15 min.

13. Other system responses required for

driver interaction such as card validation,

RIT lamp sequences, down loading of

data etc.

4 min.

14. Presence of “ Help” functions built into

the Operator station software for operator

Available.



guidance.

15. Presence of “ System Diagnostic ” mimic

to quickly locate a faulty hardware.

Available.

16. System stability and system response

when TLF is working at near full load

(i.e. when all bays are loading)

No freezing, hanging, crashes or

slowdown.

17. Rational allocation of bays (scheduling

function) i.e. there is no long queue on

one bay while some other bay capable of

loading the same product is free.

Yes.

18. Is the system capable of manual filling

through Batch controller (i.e. driver/bay

officer keys in pre-set quantity at BC and

carries out filling operation)

Yes.

19. How does a running loading operation

behave if primary PLC or primary LRC is

switched off.

No degradation, no interruption of ongoing

loading operations.

20. After recovery how does a failed LRC

equalise its status for the data updated

during the time it was down.

No degradation, no interruption of ongoing

loading operations.

L 1. Name / Version of TAS software offered. Original paper license from PRINCIPAL

to be offered with mention of project name

; Database size ; Version/Name of offered

software

2. Name / Version of RDBMS offered. Original paper license from PRINCIPAL

Supplier to be provided for RDBMS ( for

LRC-1 & LRC-2 : Redundant operation)

3. Name / Version of Operating System. Original paper license from PRINCIPAL

Supplier to be provided for OPERATING

SYSTEM.

4. Details on custody transfer system (LRC

Application)

Availability of source code for LRC

application with prime bidder required

9.6.3 TANK FARM MANAGEMENT SYSTEMS MODULE (TFMS)

The Tank Farm Management Systems (TFMS) Module shall be working as

complete materials management systems for the whole tank farm. This module

shall be primarily a Data Acquisition Application. It shall keep track of Product

inventory all across the Tank Farm. This module shall act as a monitoring module

for products storage levels in various tanks. This module will monitor Levels,

Volumes, Density, etc of various products stored in various tanks. The module

shall be displaying all these information graphically as well as in tabular mode and

shall be able to drive queries from the graphics screen itself. The data collected

from control / Instrumentation Field devices shall be kept in proper form of

database and shall be made available for other modules.

Enhanced inventory management and tank monitoring functionality shall be

available by means of software applications running on Windows XP platform,

designed on industry standard open connectivity architecture.



The HMI shall be able to calculate tank inventory values according to the API. All

values in the calculation process shall be displayed.

The system shall be able to accept multiple users with different privileges

independently of the Windows operating system. The system shall have freely

configurable task related privileges for operators managers, service managers etc.

It shall be possible to change the security level of certain function. All function

shall have a preset security password level.

Logging on and off of different users shall be stored as event for traceability. The

system administrator with the highest level of authority and password handles the

assigning of user accounts.

The systems shall be capable of storing unique volume tables and correction

factors, with at least 1000 strapping points for each tank. These tables will provide

level to volume conversion of the tank.

The system shall provide for open connectivity for users to extract appropriate data

using commercial off the shelf software e.g. MS Excel or MS Access etc.

The operator interface shall have full network support over standard LAN, using

commercial off the shelf hardware and software.

In case of networking the system shall have clock synchronisation for all systems /

operator stations.

The following modules / views are considered to be required as a minimum for the

tank inventory system:

� Alarming; audio/visual alarms

� User configurable tank grouping

� Events

� Field commands

� Manual override

� Views; tank related as well as group related

� Tank detail

� Tabular data

� Bar graphs

� Tank icons.

� Batch Handling

� Rate of Change Computation (Flow)

� System Diagnostics

� System and Data Recovery

� Leakage Alarm

The system shall be able to generate reports in different formats . All reports shall

be publishable on printers, via e-mail or as a file. All reports shall be generated



manually or automatically by user-defined schedules. Minimum required reports

are:

� Tank reports

� Inventory balance reports

� Alarm Reports

All reports may be retrieved through on local communications.

The system shall generate multiple High, Low and safe alarms for levels,

temperature, pressure and water bottom level. Configurable time delays shall be

provided for each process variable to minimize nuisance alarms.

The system shall have configurable static and dynamic grouping of tanks.

The system shall generate leak alarms based on the change in level or the Net

Standard Volume of the products in the storage tanks.

The system shall be capable of performing self-checks on each tank gauge and data

collection or control units. As a minimum, the following features shall be included:

� All field inputs, including level, temperature, pressure and water level shall be

monitored for faults. All faults shall be annunciated and logged. The error

indications shall be categorized, such as communication failure. Gauge failure

or software failure.

� All diagnostic information shall be displayed, alarmed, stored in historical files

and included in reports. This diagnostic information shall include details of all

types of failures, system status and configuration modifications. All diagnostic

alarms shall be presented locally or distributed via e-mail.

� The system shall have the capability for historical and real-time trending

analysis.

� The system shall have the capability to store data on hard disk for later analysis

documentation and traceability.

� The system shall have the capability to store reports on hard disk for

traceability.

� The system shall be capable of sending reports automatically using fax, email

or print services.

� It shall be possible to integrate data of other databases, residing in the same

computer or network environment, in the same report audible PC alarms.

� The system shall provide an audible and visual indication to the operator of an

alarm condition and provide the operator the ability to acknowledge the alarm

and disable the audible indicator.

� The system shall provide the operator with the ability to disable the audible

portion of an alarm but the visual alarm shall not be disabled until the alarm

condition has been corrected.

� The system shall provide a calculated volume rate of change (FLOW) based on

the true level rate from the radar gauge and the tank capacity table.

� The system shall provide importing and exporting flow indications based on

volume movements in the tank. Indications of ‘estimated end time of batch”

shall be provided based on user set points. The batch handling shall be able to



handle multiple destinations and sources. The Batch function shall generate

printable batch reports.

� In case a stand alone TFMS computer is offered and is interfaced directly to

the CIU; then the TFMS computer / tank gauging application software are to be

offered in hot standby / redundant configuration.

� License copy of TFMS software to be submitted from OEM

� The tank gauging software shall have an extensive set of self diagnostic

routines which shall locate and identify the system failure at least upto module

level including components. Failure of a module in a subsystem shall appear

on the screen irrespective of the display selected.

� The system shall be internally protected against system errors and hardware

damage resulting from electrical transients on power wiring and signal wiring

which may be generated by switching large electrical loads or by power line

faults, and connecting & disconnecting devices or removing or inserting

printed circuit boards in the system.

� The system design shall permit on line addition of new systems/ subsystems

without any disruption to either the operation or system communication for

future expansion. � The system architecture shall provide a logical path for implementation of

evolving technologies like JDE and provision for up-gradation of existing

equipment.

� The system shall be able to communicate with remote station via Internet and

telephone connection for remote viewing the data. The system should be

connected via OPC server link to remote station.

9.6.4 OPERATOR INTERFACE CONSOLE MODULE (OIC)

This module shall be the main interface to the entire Terminal Automation System

and act as one point window to the whole terminal operation.

The operator interface module shall provide centralized information to terminal

operator to monitor and control the complete automated terminal operation at

various locations of terminal in the fields such as menu driven data entry screen

through structured pull up & pull down menus, manipulation of control loops,

alarm displays & annunciation, bar graphic displays & status indications, logging

& trending including historical trend recording, self diagnostic messages etc.

As far as operational displays are concerned, displays viz. Overview display,

Group display, Loop/Point display, Graphic display, Alarm monitoring & display,

Database Management system display, Trend display shall be possible as a

minimum. The offered base software shall have a copyright or registered

trademark. LRC software should be offered complete with standard 3rd

party

interface software functional modules like ODBC, MS Data Exchange to enable

LRC system to be integrated with TDM System.

This module shall consist of few options in the form of menu as follows

� Predefined displays to monitor various operations at Terminal

� Process Listing / Graphic Displays

� Engineering Interface for Device Programming



� Bay Status Displays

� Tank Status and Inventory

� TT movement Tracking

� Alarm and Exception Management

� User Management

� System Management

� License and Access Control

� Access to other modules

These modules shall be able to interact with all other modules of entire Terminal

Automation System. A proper security system shall be included to avoid

unauthorized access.

The module shall be storing data with the maximum possible details and a suitable

‘data warehousing’ methodology shall be developed. All kinds of alarm and

exception events shall be trapped and stored with time and date stamping. The

personnel information (viz. Operators Code, Name, etc) for these operation shall

also be captured for HR purpose. These data shall further be processed for MIS

purpose.

9.6.5 INTERFACING TERMINAL AUTOMATION SYSTEM (TAS) WITH JDE

(ERP) SERVER

The Truck Data Management software on Windows platform shall be supplied by

the HPCL. The JDE machine shall interface with LRC / TAS Servers (Load Rack

Computer) to transfer the data files between them using the interface programs

provided by the TAS vendor developed using the protocol details given by HPCL.

This interface shall work as a bi-directional bridge between TDM and Entire

Terminal automation System.

The objective for interfacing the JDE machine with LRC / TAS servers is to

transfer the necessary data between these two systems to avoid the re-entering of

data so as to ensure the consistency of the data in both the systems. The interface

between LRC / TAS servers and JDE machine will be based on the following:

� JDE machine will be initiating requests with files as parameters through

programs of TDM to get the necessary data from LRC / TAS servers. The reply

files from LRC / TAS servers will be written onto the JDE Server system in

pre-designed formats under specified directories.

� The JDE machine and LRC / TAS servers will be connected through Ethernet

with TCP / IP suite loaded on both the servers.

� All the programs required for various pre-defined data requests will be

developed by the automation tenderer and all the source programs will be made

available on JDE machine and LRC / TAS servers.

The format for the terminal automation protocol between JDE and LRC will

be given to the successful tenderer.

Typical scheme is given below.



The following points should be noted for effective implementation of TAS and

interfacing with JDE:

� LRC software shall have the facility to maintain IP addresses on the gateway

server / JDE machines in *.ini files. The daemon program should read the IP

addresses from the *.ini file and communicate with servers through TCP/IP. It

shall be possible to carry out the changes in the IP addresses of the gateway

servers / JDE servers / LRC servers and other machines in the network

depending on the business requirements.

� There should be provision in LRC software to add / modify / delete brands by

HPCL. This is required because new brands are being introduced in the market

by HPCL. The frontend application shall facilitate the local personnel to add

new brands or update / modify the existing brands. The changes to the product

master should be reflected in the LRC software, which includes the MIS

reports (color changes, bay changes etc.). This master can be maintained in a

table or in a product .dat file.

� The system should have a facility of changing the product on the given bay

without actually having to restart the LRC server / software on LRC server. For

eg. The bay, which was loading MS in the morning, may load power after 3

hours. The location should be able to do this without having to restart the LRC

server / software on LRC server.

� In the event of a batch controller malfunctioning, only the particular loading

point shall be affected. Other loading points shall function normally.



� If due to some reason the LRC server shuts down and has to be restarted, the

details of the trucks under filling or waiting to be filled must be retained in the

LRC server, especially the information regarding the product and the quantity

filled of partly filled truck. When the LRC restarts it should continue from the

point of interruption.

� Incase LRC is restarted the cards which are issued should not be invalidated for

the entire day. It shall be possible to reuse the same cards the same day

� The LRC shall store product wise, date wise, tank wise, density at 15 deg C

temperature. Incase density meter / temperature sensors are not functional, the

location shall enter the density and temperature product wise and the same

shall be sent to JDE through the post load packet.

� The post load packet shall have the facility to send 10 digit alphanumeric seals

/ abloy lock information.

� The pre load and post load packets format shall comply with the interface

document of HPCL. This shall be provided by HPCL.

� The post load data packet shall be downloaded to gateway server automatically

without any request from JDE.

� JDE communicates with LRC system through a window gateway server

through TCP/IP. The Windows Gateway Server shall have Windows 2000 OS.

Technical specification of the window Gateway server is enclosed elsewhere in

this specification. A backup Windows gateway server shall be provided as a

standby in the event of failure.

� The tenderer is required to develop a daemon program, which shall poll the

directories as defined by HPCL. There shall be provision to add or delete the

directories to be polled. The directories to be polled by the daemon should be

kept in *.ini files. A log / report should be maintained above the activities of

daemon program. The daemon program should not require a change /

modification incase any new brands are added or deleted by HPCL. The

daemon program should be installed as a service and shall start automatically

once the gateway server is booted.

� FAN slip shall be printed through the LRC system on a preprinted stationary /

plain stationary. The option shall be provided to the location to select the

appropriate printing program for printing the FAN slip

� LRC1 and LRC2 shall work in Hot standby mode. Incase of failure of any one

LRC server the other server shall take up the activities.

� The tenderer shall provide the standard configuration of the LRC servers, OIC

terminals, and printers for printing the FAN slips and MIS reports.



� The tenderer shall furnish the standard MIS reports. The formats shall be

finalised in consultation with HPCL.

� Proper documentation for all software shall be provided. It is the responsibility

of the tenderer to provide an environment for compiling his daemon program if

required.

TERMINAL AUTOMATION PROTOCOL BETWEEN JDE AND LRC

HPCL is implementing J.D.Edwards (ERP) Software at all the locations all over India.

J.D.Edwards operates on a Centralized Architecture.

JDE Software (In House HPCL Accounting Package) Operates on SCO Unix Open

Sever and Dbase IV Ver 2.0 / Windows NT and Dbase 5.0.

The JDE Software Communicates with the LRC through the Gateway Server using the

JDE Daemon / Polling program. The JDE Software creates various request files under

different directories with same name as FAN Slip Number. The LRC Daemon /

Polling program on the Gateway Server should constantly scan the set of Directories.

JDE communicates with the Gateway server through the set of JDE daemon programs.

The JDE daemon programs are responsible for polling files from the Batch Server to

the Gateway server. The Gateway server is a Windows 2000 Server and is located in

the respective location. The LRC Daemon / Polling program is supposed to constantly

scan the required directories and pick up the flat files from the respective directories

and put the acknowledgement files in appropriate directories on the Gateway Server.

If the LRC Daemon / Polling program finds any request file in one of the directories

on the gateway server it collects the data from these and sends it across to LRC. LRC

on receiving this information should register the data sent by the LRC Daemon /

Polling program and send a reply to the JDE server through Daemon program.

The Interfacing program on receiving the reply for the request sent, creates a reply file

in the respective directories with the file name same as FAN Slip Number.

The JDE Software after making the request will be waiting for the reply to arrive from

the LRC by scanning the respective directories. When the reply file is created in the

respective directory by the Interfacing program, the JDE software collects the data

from these files.

The LRC Daemon / Polling Program should be constantly scanning the different

directories on the Gateway Server for request files to be sent LRC or received from

LRC.

LRC Daemon Program should continuously check the health of the communication

link between the Gateway Server and LRC Server.



The LRC Daemon / Polling programs for picking up files from the Gateway server to

LRC and receiving files on the Gateway server from LRC is required to be developed

by the vendor.

The Directories used for Communication between JDE / DDP and LRC are

as given below :

authorise To Store files for Trucks that are Authorised by JDE

These files will be created by JDE and Deleted by the

Communication Program (LRC Daemon) after the file is

picked up.

authstatus To Store files to Indicate authorisation status of a

Truck to JDE

These files will be created by the Communication Program

(LRC Daemon)

loadover To Store files for trucks for which loading is over

These files will be created by the Communication Program

(LRC Daemon) and deleted by JDE Daemon Program

Cancelloading To Store files for trucks for which loading is to

be Cancelled.

These files will be created by JDE and deleted by

Communication Program (LRC Daemon)

Cancelstatus To Store files to Indicate cancellation status of a Truck to

JDE

These files will be created by communication program

(LRC Daemon) and deleted by JDE .

loadstatus To Store the Loading Status of a Truck

These files will be created by communication program

(LRC Daemon) and deleted by JDE .

The detailed file structure etc. are given below.

1). Authorise Trucks (c:\jde\authorise)

When the truck is to be filled, the truck driver is asked to report to the Marketing

Terminal. The Data pertaining to the Customer, Destination, Truck has to be entered

in to the JDE. This data is commercially verified by JDE and then downloaded to the

LRC through the Interfacing /Communication Program.

Every Truck that is entering in the terminal for filling will be given an Unique FAN

Slip Number, with which the truck will be identified throughout the system. This FAN

No. will be generated by JDE.



The JDE Software after validating the data creates a request data file in the

c:\jde\authorise directory with the file name similar to the FAN Slip Number.

The Authorization request file contains the following data in the ASCII Text format.

Sl.no. Data Item Length

Type

1. FAN Slip Number 06 Numeric

2. Authorisation Date

(DD/MM/YYYY)

10 Character

3. Truck Registration Number 14 Character

4. Oil Company 04 Character

5. No.of Compartments 01 Numeric

6. Capacity of Compartments

(To be Specified for Each

Compartment)

06 Numeric

7. Calibration Expiry

Date(DD/MM/YYYY)

10 Character

8. Method of Delivery (Via Code) 03 Character

9. Remarks(First Three Digits will be

TT Code)

50 Character

10. No.of Customers 01 Numeric

11. Location Code 04 Character

12. Location Description 30 Character

13. Contractor Code 05 Character

14. Contractor Description 30 Character

15. Customer Code 06 Character

16. Customer Description 30 Character

17. Destination Code 06 Character

18. Destination Description 30 Character

19. No. Of Products 01 Numeric

20. Product Quantity 06 Numeric

21. Product Code 08 Numeric

22. Product Description 30 Character

Note 1 : Item No. 11 to 19 referred above are to be repeated for Each Customer

Note 2: Item No. 20 to 22 referred above are to be repeated for each product

Note 3: Please refer Annexure 1-A for Data Sample for c:\jde\authorise directory

The Communication/Protocol program should continuously scan various directories

for request files to be sent to LRC. Once a file is found in the directory c:\jde\authorise

it should read the file and send the request to the LRC.



LRC after receiving the information should register the Truck and send a reply to the

Communication program which keeps waiting for the reply to be received from LRC.

When the reply is received from LRC, the Communication program should create a

reply file in the directory c:\jde\authstatus. After the creation of the reply file in the

c:\jde\authstatus directory the request file should be deleted from c:\jde\authorise

directory by the communication program. The reply file will be created with the same

name as request file name which would contain one character code for the JDE

Package. The file will be deleted by the JDE program after getting this information.

C:\jde\authstatus

Response :

1) Authorisation Successful.

2) No Product requested

3) Compartment Allocation Failed

4) Fan Slip Number is Duplicated

9) LRC communication Failed.

Value 1 indicates successful authorisation of a truck. Values 2,3,4,9 indicates errors.

A Sample File Format is given below :

Sample File (File Name - 1 in Authstatus Directory)

1: Truck Authorisation Status indicating Successful Authorisation

3) Truck Loading Completed (c:\jde\loadover)

Loadover directory is used to store files for trucks for which loading is completed.

Communication program continuously communicates with the LRC to find out the

latest loading status for all the authorised trucks. After the loading is over and seal

numbers allotted, the LRC should indicate that loading of a truck is over by putting in

the status file in the c:\jde\loadstatus directory and the data file in c:\jde\loadover

directory. Then the LRC communication program collects all the loading information

for that truck from LRC and creates a data file in the c:\jde\loadover directory.

The JDE daemon program will pick up the information for the respective FAN

numbers from the loadover directory. The LRC communication program should keep

the information of all the trucks which are loaded in c:\jde\loadover directory

automatically.

The file in the c:\jde\loadover should contain the following data in the ASCII Text

format. This file is to be created by LRC.



Sl. No. Data Item Length Type

1. FAN Number 06 Numeric

2. No.of Compartments 01 Numeric

3. Time of Filling (HH:MM:SS) 08 Character

4. Product Code 08 Character

5. Volume filled 06 Numeric

6. Volume at 15 Degree Centigrade 06 Numeric

7. Product Density 06 Float (9.9999)

8.

Product Density at 15 Deg.

Centigrade

06 Float (9.9999)

9. Temperature 05 Float (99.99)

10. Top Seal Number (or Abloy Lock

no.)

10 AlphaNumeric

11. Bottom Seal Number(or Abloy Lock

no.)

10 Alpha Numeric

Note 1 : Item No. 4 to 11 should be repeated for Each Compartment

Note 2 : Please Annexure – I-B for Sample Data file c:\jde\loadover directory

4) Cancel Truck Loading

After the truck is authorised, some times the truck will have to be cancelled due to

some reasons.

This operation is carried out by JDE by creating the cancel request file in the directory

c:\jde\cancelloading. The name of the request file itself tells the Truck corresponding

to the FAN number is to be cancelled.

The truck can be cancelled by the JDE operator only when the truck has not started

filling.

The LRC communication program while scanning the directories finds this request in

the cancel directory, then it should send the data to the LRC.

The LRC after verifying the Truck status cancels the Truck if it is not already taken up

for loading and then it should send reply to the communication program.

The LRC communication program collects this information from LRC and creates a

reply file for the JDE in the Directory c:\jde\cancelstatus.

Response

1) Truck Cancellation Successful

2) FAN details not found

3) Truck Under Loading

4) Truck Already cancelled by LRC



9) Communication Failure between LRC and Gateway Server

Value 1 Indicates successful cancellation of a truck.

Note : There should be a provision to cancel a truck from LRC after loading is taken

up and before completion of loading.

Annexure I-A

Sample Data format for a Truck going to 3 customers (c:\jde\authorise)

Fan No. 000001

Authorisation Date 12/01/2004

Truck No. GJ/06/A/5340

Oil Company HPCL

No. of Compartments 3

Capacity of Compartment 1 004000



Calibration Exp. Date 05/10/2005

Method of Delivery (Via Code) 003

Remarks (First 3 digit TT Code) 052

No. of Customers 3

Location Code 0446

Location Description LONI TERMINAL

Contractor Code 06621

Contractor Description BHATIA TRANSPORT SERVICE

Customer Code 117804

Customer Description AECS CAR CARE CENTRE

Destination Code XXXXXX

Destination Description PUNE

No. of Products 1

Product Quantity 004000

Product Code 09500006

Product Description H S D

Location Code 0446





Customer Description AMBICA PETROL DEPOT




Destination Description POONA

No. of Products 1



Product Description M S

Location Code 0446





Customer Description AMRAPALI SERVICE STATION

Annexure 1-A ..........Contd


Destination Description PUNE

No. of Products 1



Product Description H S D

Note : Via Code = ‘001’ Indicates Company Truck



Annexure I-B

Sample Data format for c:\jde\loadover file

FAN No. 000001

No.of Compartments 3

Time of Filling 08:45:30

Comp. 1 09560006 004000 003980 0.8950

0.8970 28.50 0010211111

0010221111

Comp. 2 09500006 004000 003975 0.8950

0.8970 27.50 0010231111

0010241111

Comp. 3 09500006 004000 003960 0.8500

0.8550 30.00 0010251111

0010261111

Details of Compartments Product Code, Volume Filled,

Volume at 15 Degree, Product

Density, Product Density at 15

Degree, Temperature, Top Seal No.

and Bottom Seal No.

Note:

1) The spaces in the post load packet sample data to improve readability and not a

part of the actual post load packet.

2) The directory c:\jde\authorise is only indicative. The C: or D: should be

configurable and not hard coded in the daemon programs. Directories

should be configurable

9.7 SYSTEM ACCESS SECURITY

� All operator commands shall be automatically checked for validity of

authorization by the system.

� Validity checks shall be automatically performed by the system to ensure that

control parameters entered by the operator are within the defined limits.

� Access to all system functions shall be protected by a multi-level password

system.

9.8 SYSTEM DIAGNOSTICS:

� The system diagnostics shall support fault isolation to a specific module or

channel or subsystem device, which can be subsequently removed and

replaced.

� The system diagnostics shall include both hardware and software diagnostics

routines which upon detecting an abnormal conditions, reports this information

on standard diagnostics displays on the OIC and printers.

� Once a diagnostic test has detected a failure, a descriptive alarm shall be

generated and bumpless transfer to control to a redundant component shall be

triggered wherever specified.



9.9 DIAGNOSTIC DISPLAY

� The system status level shall be accessible by a single dedicated key.

� A flashing diagnostic message prompt shall be displayed and allow the user to

immediately view the specific error message in a single keystroke without

going through a diagnostic display hierarchy.

� A system status display shall provide the current status of every subsystem.

Subsystems with a diagnostic alarm shall be identified by flashing indicator.

The system status display shall include information on the communications

system including status of each of the communication modules for every

subsystem.

� The subsystem level status display should provide detail information on the

subsystem itself and the status of the individual modules contained therein.

� The I/O status display shall provide detailed information of each I/O Channel

of the associated device.

� The message level diagnostic display shall provide English text message

explaining the exact nature of the diagnostic error and the time and frequency

of occurrence. The users shall be able to go to an achieve file to obtain a

history of diagnostic messages for the entire system and additionally shall be

able to make a backup copy to a removable media.

9.10 REPORTS, TRENDING, QUERIES - MIS MODULE

The report generation module shall be capable of generating various reports and

logs for all measured and computed parameters as per requirement. The system

should provide scope for database generation & configuration with multilevel

security access into the system. All the communication between LRC and

peripheral units shall be established through secured data transfers. The network

communication shall be selected keeping in view of number of peripherals &

instrument connected on the network and with higher throughput.

A MIS module shall be developed to extract various reports, Trending and Historical

Analysis, by firing suitable queries and data mining procedures on the available

database of Terminal automation System.

Trending:

The trending feature shall be of various types like Single Bar, Multiple Bar, X-Y,

Numeric, etc. The module shall be able to show at least

� Real Time Trending

� Historical Trending

� Archived Historical Trending

� Cursor Read Out

� Zoom & Scroll

� Trend Comparisons



� Others

Reports:

This module shall generate various reports for MIS as well as engineering purpose.

The reports shall be of following nature

� Alarm / Exception Reports

� Inventory Reports

� Truck Monitoring Reports

� Quality Control Reports

� Various Statistical reports

� MIS – Reports

Queries:

This module shall support various on line and off Line queries. The queries shall

be of following in nature with data drill down facility.

� Tank Farm Data

� Bay status

� Metering Status

� Equipment Status

� Truck Tracking / Status

� Others

All the Reports, Trending, Queries shall support user defined time horizon and

customizable.

9.11 SCALBILITY/ UPGRADABILITY/ LICENCING

The capacity of offered software should be with 50 % spares with respect to nos. of

data base points/ tags after calculating requirements of the total system. The offered

software should have in-built capability / provision to take care for future expansion to

the extent of minimum four additional loading points; up to four new product tanks &

base products as a minimum. System should be flexible from the point of view of up-

gradation. These shall be verified during FAT. In case of tag based system, unlimited

tags should be offered.

The system architecture shall provide a logical planned implementation of

evolving technologies and provision for up-gradation of existing equipment.

The system design shall permit the online addition of new sub-systems with no

disruption to either the operation or system communications, for future expansion.

The offered software should be of proven technology & latest with copyright or

trademark registration. The offered software has to be from principal

manufacturer.



The original copy of the license certificate (PAPER LICENCES) for the operating

system, RDBMS (5-user license. Licence shall be for 2 Nos. redundant LRC/ TAS

server), and LRC / TAS server software/ SCADA/ TFMS software each needs to

be provided to HPCL clearly mentioning the details like project name, end user

name, name & version of the offered software for each of above. The original copy

of all paper license certificates in name of Hindustan Petroleum Corporation

Limited shall be provided to HPCL for effecting payment to the vendor. In the

absence of the above documents payment shall be held back by HPCL. The prime

bidder / system integrator with collaborator backup shall confirm availability of the

source code for the custom code programmed Tank Truck Filling Operation

application software with them.

In case the prime bidder has an MOU / Joint venture with the principal who is the

technology supplier or the vendor is a 100% subsidiary of the principal a letter

shall be submitted by the prime bidder on the principals letter head from the

country of origin declaring qualified technical support for the offered application

software for the next 10 years as a minimum.

All software licenses shall be from the principal software manufacturer and not

from the resellers.

Bidders to provide details (for at least two jobs) where the quoted LRC / TAS

server software is working for TAS (POL) applications successfully for a

minimum period of one year in India or abroad. Bidders to provide completion

certificates of these jobs as documentary proofs.

For each server (LRC / TAS Server) running memory resident applications like

Operating system + SCADA software, RDBMS + code programmed application

for truck filling operations, development (engineering) + runtime + network

license is to be provided from principal supplier. Each operator / client station shall

be provided with Runtime + Network license with no. of licenses being equal to

the no. of client / operator stations and these shall be submitted to HPCL.

10.0 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS FOR ENGINEERING, ERECTION,

TESTING & COMMISSIONING

The scope of work under the major activities is listed below.

10.1 ENGINEERING ACTIVITIES:

� Preparation and furnishing of all drawings and documents as listed out

elsewhere in this specification and obtaining necessary approvals from client /

consultant as mentioned.

� Development of requisite software in consultation with the client / consultant

and testing of the same at Tenderer’s works.

� Documentation, training, comprehensive AMC warranty, etc.

� Preparation and submission of as built drawings as required.



10.2 ERECTION ACTIVITIES:

This shall include the following:

� Installation of flow metering system package consisting of strainer, digital

Control valves, Batch Controllers etc.

� Installation of Instrumentation and Automation system consisting of computer

system and operator consoles, Computer Interface Unit, Radar type level

transmitter, multipoint temperature sensor, water bottom sensor, tank side

indicator etc as per the Bill of quantities. Integrating the subsystems and

ensuring provision of proper communication links so that Data transfer takes

place smoothly.

� Laying of communication bus, field bus, other system cables, Fiberoptic cables,

instrumentation cables, Power supply cables and control cables in conduits,

cable trays etc.

� Installation of all instruments that are in the Tenderer’s scope of supply, laying

and termination of all signal, control & power cables.

� All instruments shall be checked and calibrated before installation at site.

� Civil / Mechanical / Electrical works including the casting of foundation as per

requirements for instruments supports where paved surface do not exist.

� Fabrication and installation of any supports required for the instruments are also

included in the scope of the Instrumentation tenderer.

� Erection, testing, commissioning of free issue items and integrating the same

into TAS. The final assembly shall also be tested.

� Minor civil works like chipping of pavement, grouting on the pavements,

instrument panels/support, chipping and refilling of the pavement for conduits.

� Sealing of cables / tube entries into the control room after laying and testing of

all tubes, cables etc.,

� Degreasing of handwheels of valves, stud bolts, nuts of side and bottom flange

of valves, orifice plates, flow meters (PD-meters), other primary elements,

flanges, Instruments as per manufacturers instructions and other items as

required by owner / consultant.

� Installation of system cabinets in control room.

� Laying and termination at both ends between Instrument earth buses provided in

control panels to instrument earth pit.

� Laying, dressing, glanding and termination of power supply cables from power

supply distribution cabinet / box in control room to field consumers through

UPS.

� The armoured cables for TFM system shall be taken through sealed, buried

conduits.

� Painting of all structural supports for trays, pipes, junction boxes, instruments,

ducts. etc.

� Proper installation and alignment of line / vessels / equipment mounted

instruments like valve, PD meters, etc.

� Drilling holes on all panels, shut down cabinets, power supply cabinets, control

panels, etc. for cables / glands.

� Grounding of shielded cables to respective instrument earth bus provided in the

control room / local panel.

� Supply of all types of consumables required for the execution of the job.



� Tenderer shall offer the services of the installation team which would install the

equipment / instruments, lay the interconnecting cabling, check out, testing and

commissioning the system.

� Tenderer shall prepare site acceptance test documentation covering hardware,

software and system functional testing and submit it three months in advance

for owner / consultant review and approval.

� All technical personnel assigned to the site by the Tenderer shall be fully

conversant with the supplied system and software package, and shall have both

hardware and software capability to bring the system on line quickly and

efficiently with a minimum interference with other concurrent construction and

commissioning activities.

� Incoming Inspection which includes verification of documents and Bill of

quantities. Visual inspection shall be carried out to check for damages.

10.3 TESTING

Testing & Calibration of instrumentation devices shall be done for equipment

under Tenderer’s scope of supply.

Tenderer shall make available all consumables, instruments, and equipment

necessary for testing, calibration, maintenance etc as required by the defined scope

of works. All instruments and equipment used for the above purpose shall be of

standard make with accuracy better than the accuracy expected from the

calibrated/tested instruments and certified by standard testing agencies. These

instruments / equipment are necessary only during testing / calibration /

maintenance.

Loop checking

Loop check shall be carried out by the Tenderer and checking the Interconnection

configuration and overall system functioning.

Tenderers scope of work in loop checking shall include checking interconnection

between instrument/equipment and control room, ferruling, tagging of

interconnecting cables, ferruling of field cables in control room and performing

over all loop performance check.

Loop checking shall be carried out to check the functional performance of all

elements comprising the loop and thereby ensuring proper configuration

functioning and interconnection.

Calibration and installation of metering instruments and installation of other field

equipment, installation of junction boxes, interconnection between instruments

and junction boxes. Laying of single / multipair cables up to control room, tagging

all field cables, performing continuity / insulation test of cable, core identification

of field cables etc. shall also be in the Tenderer's scope.



Testing at site:

All the equipment shall be checked thoroughly after its receipt at site. The test as a

minimum, shall include:

� Visual and mechanical testing.

� Demonstration of all system functions.

� Checking of loop configuration.

� Checking of Visual Display Unit.

� Checking of correct functioning of all key-boards.

� Demonstration of all system diagnostics.

� Checking of current change over of redundant devices.

� Checking of proper functioning of all printers, sample printing of all types of

logs and reports.

� Checking of all disc drives, alarm summary and alarm history.

� Demonstration of proper operation of system at specified power supply

specifications.

� Making of User's data formats and check out of results.

The site testing test plan shall also cover the recording and calculation of the

following:

� Record of duration involved for the command to be successful.

� Record of commands executed and commands failed.

� Record of reasons for incomplete sequence.

� Record of duration of process faults.

� Record of cumulative availability for specified duration etc.

10.4 COMMISSIONING ACTIVITIES:

The following main functions shall be carried out:

� Carrying out No Load tests.

� Sequential check on No Load commissioning.

� On Load commissioning of the system.

� Post Commissioning activities



11.0 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE TESTS:

The following tests shall be conducted before final acceptance of the system:-

a) Inspection and Testing at Manufacturer’s works

b) FAT – Factory Acceptance Test

c) SAT – Site Acceptance Test

d) TRIAL RUN

e) STABILIZATION

These tests shall be carried out on all equipment supplied by Tenderer including

those supplied by sub-Tenderers if any.

PART I – General

The Acceptance Test shall demonstrate to the satisfaction of HPCL that the system

performs all functions as described in this specification.

HPCL shall supervise all testing designated by the Tenderer as acceptance testing.

HPCL shall have the option to run these tests if it deems necessary.

Tenderer shall provide written notification to owner of the acceptance test

procedures 10 days prior to acceptance test period. HPCL shall review and, if

necessary modify these procedures.

All system hardware and software used for acceptance testing shall be complete as

specified and the actual equipment shall be shipped to the job site.

Tenderer shall perform complete system functionality test before advising HPCL

that the system is available for factory test. All input points, output points, alarm

points, etc. shall be tested by Tenderer, using actual system configuration prior to

witnessed factory test.

If problems or malfunctions develop in any part of the system during acceptance

test period, corrections shall be made at the Tenderer's facility during checkout job

site at no cost to Customer.

The Tenderer shall provide any necessary personnel to:

� Review acceptance test criteria

� Schedule and arrange test facilities.

� To arrange the system according to acceptance test criteria

� Analyze and interpret test results for HPCL personnel

� Provide assistance in case of system malfunctions during the acceptance test

period.



Tenderer shall test and demonstrate the functional integrity of the system hardware

and software. No material or equipment shall be transported until all required tests

are successfully completed and certified 'Ready for Shipment’ by HPCL.

HPCL reserves the right to be involved and satisfy itself at each and every stage of

inspection. HPCL shall be free to request specific test on any equipment

considered necessary by them although not listed in this specification, the cost of

performing all tests shall be borne by the Tenderer.

Tenderer shall note that acceptance of any equipment or the exemption of

inspection or testing shall in no way absolve the Tenderer of the responsibility for

delivering the equipment meeting all the requirements specified in the Bid

Package.

It shall be Tenderer’s responsibility to modify and or replace any hardware and

modify the software if the specified functions are not completely achieved

satisfactorily during testing and factory acceptance. This will be done at

Tenderer’s cost.

PART II - Failure of Components / Modules / Sub system:

a) Tenderer shall not replace any sub-system component / module / subsystem

unless it failed. A log of all failed components / modules in subsystem, shall be

maintained which shall give description of the failed components / modules of

failure and number of hours of operation before it failed.

b) If there is a malfunction of a component/module in a sub-system, the test shall

terminate and Tenderer shall replace the failed component/module. Thereafter

the test shall commence all over again. If even after this replacement of the

sub-system fails to meet the requirement, Tenderer shall replace the full sub-

system to the one meeting the requirements and the system tested all over

again.

If a sub system fails during the test and is not repaired and made successfully

operational within four hours of active repair time after the failure, the test shall be

suspended and restarted all over again only after the Tenderer has replaced the

device into the acceptable operation.

The Tenderer shall notify at least two weeks prior to system testing. In the event

that representatives arrive and the system is not ready for testing, the Tenderer will

be liable for back charges for any extra time and expenses incurred.

11.1 INSPECTION AND TESTING AT MANUFACTURER’S WORKS:

Inspection procedure shall be finalized with HPCL and vendor offering the

equipment for inspection.



The owner and its representatives shall have the right to inspect and test each

equipment at all stages of production and commissioning of the system. The

inspection and testing shall include but not be limited to raw materials,

components, Sub assemblies, prototypes, produced units, guaranteed performance

specifications etc. For factory inspection and testing, Tenderer shall arrange all that

is required e.g. quality assurance personnel, space, test gear etc for successfully

carrying out the job by the owner and/or his representative at Tenderer's cost at the

manufacturer's works.

Scope of third party inspection:

Following are the checks to be done as a minimum during third party inspection:-

Common checks for all the materials:

Physical verification

Make, model no verification

Functional performance checking.

The inspection shall be carried out for the following two categories of items:

Category - I: Metering Instruments & Accessories

These items shall include PD meters and accessories, set stop valves, and other

associated field instruments and accessories.

The inspection and testing shall be as under :

a) Material inspection including body and internals.

b) Visual inspection checks.

c) Tests for material, welding, leakage (by hydrostatic test) etc.

d) Dimensional inspection.

e) Calibration test of individual instruments / equipment.

f) Meter proving and calibration.

g) Overall batch accuracy test and repeatability tests.

h) Checks for assuring compliance with standards mentioned in the specifications.

Tenderer shall produce during inspection:

a) Raw material inspection certificate.

b) In House Test Reports.

c) Statutory certificates as required.

All inspection and testing shall be carried out based on the following documents:

a) Relevant standards

b) Specifications

c) Data sheets

d) Approved drawings



Batch Accuracy Test

� Calibration against Weights & Measures certified prover tank (in case of

flowmeter).

� Generation of pulses per revolution through rotating pulser (in case of

flowmeter).

� Testing of randomly chosen Set Stop valves in association with batch

controller and flow meter

� Program checking and relay output checking with simulator in case of batch

controller

� Performance checking of randomly chosen batch controllers in association with

flow meter & Set stop valve.

Obtaining necessary approvals from Weights & Measures department & producing

other necessary certificates in regard to various instruments/peripherals will be in

the scope of the Tenderer.

However the stamping charges will be paid by HPCL (Location) on proof and

production of original receipt.

All equipment and instruments to be located in the TLF shed shall be suitable with

IP protection for water jets (IP-65).

Category - II : System Oriented Equipment

These items shall include Servers, computers, PLC, computer interface unit,

Printers and secondary storage devices.

The tenderer shall demonstrate the functionality of the system hardware and

software. No materials shall be transported to site until all required tests have been

successfully completed and the material / equipment have been certified “ ready

for shipment “ by purchaser.

The purchaser has the right to involve and satisfy himself at each and every stage

of tests. They shall be free to request specific tests on equipment considered

necessary by them, although not listed in this specification. the cost of performing

all tests shall be borne by the tenderer.

Tenderer to note that acceptance of any equipment or the exemption of inspection

testing shall in no way absolve the bidder of the responsibility for delivering the

equipment meeting all the specified requirements.

The inspection and acceptance shall be carried out in two phases i.e. Phase - I and

Phase - II for the items covered in Category – II.

The minimum requirements for testing during these two phases are as follows:



Phase -I

a) Tenderer shall perform tests at his works to ensure that all components

function in accordance with their respective specification for each type of test.

A test report shall be submitted to the Owner for review within two weeks of

completion of each type of test giving details.

All sub-systems shall-undergo a minimum of 72 hours burn-in period.

b) The test log book shall contain the following information for the above tests:

a. Date / Time

b. Assembly designation (identified with functional unit Tag Nos.)

c. Test input

d. Test results and signature of the person who conducted the test

e. Action required (if deficiency is detected)

f. Action taken, date of completion and signature.

g. Special test methods (including special equipment requirement, by passes

used etc.)

Test Details

Following tests shall be performed by the Tenderer and report shall be forwarded

to the Owner.

11.2 FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TESTS

FAT forms the PHASE II test for CATEGORY II. This shall be generally done at

TAS vendor’s works.

This test shall systematically, fully and functionally test all the hardware and

software in the presence of Owner's representative. All the sub systems shall be

inter connected to simulate the total system. Tenderer shall use simulators for

simulating field inputs to Batch controllers.

Before start of Phase - II tests, Tenderer shall keep the complete integrated systems

powered for 150 hrs. A FAT staging diagram shall be submitted by the tenderer

indicating the equipment arrangement for FAT.

The duration of the testing shall be mentioned by the Tenderer with reasons.

System shall be shipped to site only after this testing and certified ready for

shipment by Owner.

10% of the field devices shall be checked compulsory in FAT. FAT shall be

conducted for each location separately.



SYSTEM PRE TEST

Tenderer as a minimum shall physically check all the modules, racks and cabinets

and equipment which are a part of FAT.

SYSTEM POWER UP TEST

Tenderer as a minimum shall check the functions of all the system hardware and

software including diagnostic software at sub-system levels with simulated inputs.

Test Record

During testing of Phase-II, each test carried out shall be recorded. Any deficiency

or problem shall be clearly brought out and shall be corrected.

Any change in the data or configuration informed to the Tenderer shall be recorded

and carried out by the Tenderer.

Visual and Mechanical Testing

Visual and mechanical testing shall be carried out in principle to assure correct and

neat workmanship by the Tenderer.

Functional Testing

Functional testing shall include the simulation of each input and output to verify

proper system response, checking all functionalities of each sub-system and

complete performance of integrated system. The testing, as a minimum, shall

include:

i) Checking of all Monitors and displays.

ii) Checking of correct functioning of key-board .

iii) Checking of CRT refresh rate, database update and display call up time.

iv) Checking of correct change-over of the redundant back up units in case of main

units failure.

v) System diagnostics shall be thoroughly checked for all sub-systems on local

level as well as on remote computers. These shall include failure of a sub-

system, module, power supply, interface unit, failure of transfer to redundant

module on main module failure etc. and other detailed diagnostic displays.

vi) Testing of proper functioning of all printers.

vii) Testing of system features like interchangeability between VDU console,

peripheral assignments, synchronization of system clocks, key-lock functions

etc.

viii) Checking of various alarms and events log formats and various report

formats.

ix) Proper system operation as per power supply specifications specified in the bid

package.



x) Checking of proper operation of all communication interfaces and secured data

transfers.

xi) Simulation of power failure and system restart after power restoration.

Complete system configuration loading

Demonstration of all PLC system builder functions including addition / deletion of

an input / output, addition / deletion of a rung or an element in a rung generation of

dynamic graphics and other views, report generation.

100% checking of logic configured in the PLC by connecting switch / lamp at

input / output.

Checking of scan time as per specification.

System redundancy check including correct change over of the back up unit of

failure of main unit. these shall be applicable for following:

a) CPU rack to rack redundancy

b) Each CPU to host system communication interface & link redundancy

c) Power supply redundancy.

d) I/O subsystem to processor system communication redundancy.

System diagnostic checking for all subsystems on local level as well as on console,

including checking of the auto testing software for I/O modules / signal

conditioning modules.

Checking of output status on processor failure.

Checking of first out alarm generation.

Tenderer shall be responsible to modify and / or replace any hardware or software

if the specified functions are not completely achieved satisfactorily during FAT.

Schedule of FAT shall be included in the tenderer’s proposal.

QUALITY CONTROL TEST

Quality control tests shall be carried out to ensure quality of all components and

modules in accordance with Tenderer's quality controls and assurance procedure.

Tenderer shall forward details of these procedures for Owner's review.

The sampling procedures for all purchased components or components

manufactured by the Tenderer, for quality assurance test shall be in accordance

with relevant international standards.



All assemblies shall be aligned and adjusted and all test observations shall be

recorded as per manufacturer published set ups and testing methods.

11.3 SITE ACCEPTANCE TESTS

The following shall be verified/ conducted during SAT

a) checking for completeness of supplies for both software and Hardware .

b) Checking whether guaranteed performance of individual equipment / item is

achieved as per specification.

c) Checking if Installation of the complete system is as per approved drawing.

d) Checking out of the equipment installation as per the owner approved

installation drawings for each equipment / item and system as a whole.

e) Checking of interconnection, hardware and software configuration, system

interfaces and overall system function. Checking self diagnostic feature on

individual equipment.

f) Loop checking: Field cable termination and inter cabinet cabling and

termination.

g) Field tests.

h) Commissioning and on-line debugging of the system.

i) Performance of integrated system including communication to remote location

j) Test run

k) Test report

Site Acceptance Teat shall be done at each location as mentioned in the

specification.

11.4 TRIAL RUN

Vendor shall conduct trial run of his system for a minimum period of 15 days after

the mechanical completion of job. The interface between JDE and LRC shall be

established during these trial runs. These trial runs are conducted to verify the

satisfactory performance of the system. In case of major failure in the system, the

trial run shall be repeated for a period of another 15 continuous days.

After trial run site acceptance test (SAT) will be conducted and system shall be

handed over. The project is deemed to be complete after the compliance of

pending points of sat.

11.5 STABILIZATION PERIOD

After successful commissioning of the entire system, the system shall be observed

for faultless working for a period of 90 days. If any fault is observed during this 90

days period in any part of the system (either software or hardware component or

field execution), the same shall be rectified by the vendor at his cost including the

replacement of any material components if required and the system shall be



observed for a further period of 90 days for fault free operations. Date of

stabilization shall be taken as the date at the end of a period of 90 days of absolute

fault free operations. However, in case of minor faults in any subsystem which do

not lead to disruption of operation, stabilization period for the unaffected portion

will remain unchanged. Also for disruption due to fault in any system not supplied

by the vendor as a part of this tender, stabilization period will remain unchanged.

12.0 DRAWINGS AND DOCUMENTS TO BE FURNISHED

BY TENDERER WITH BID:

� Project schedule and Quality Assurance Plan (QAP).

� Instrument data sheets/ specification

� Operational philosophy

� Control room layout

� System architectural drawing

� Power requirement

� Air/Steam requirement (If any)

� List of Special tools and tackles for maintenance (this list shall be finalised by

the owner/consultant)

BY SUCCESSFUL TENDERER / CONTRACTOR:

The Tenderer shall furnish the following drawings/ documents .

FOR APPROVAL PART-I ( For Instrumentation equipment )

� Project schedule and Quality Assurance Plan (QAP).

� Document Issue Schedule

� Training schedule

� System configuration diagram.

� Process and Instrumentation diagram

� Cable route

� Instrument data sheets

� Functional design Specification

� Loop schematics

� Instrument mounting drawings

� Hardware design manual

� Software design manual

� Interlocking schemes

� Alarm annunciation schemes

� Power distribution schemes

� Operational philosophy

� Control room layout

� Panel general view drawings.

� Graphic page layout

� Print formats



� MIS formats and PIN data blocks.

� Maintenance schedules.

� Operator prompt functions.

� Safety/Security functions.

� Inspection procedure (Factory Acceptance Tests)

� Pre-commissioning Tests & Procedures.

� Provisional handing over tests and protocols.

PART-II ( For Automation)

� Layout of LAN

� Logical scheme of LAN in block diagram

� System documentation

� Detail Server-Cluster connectivity

� Database schemes (table details)

� Prototypes of data entry screens

� Prototypes of displays/ alarms

� Prototypes of output formats

FOR REFERENCE AND RECORDS

� Project Organization

� Documentation List

� External connection diagrams

� Equipment (Field devices) location and routing of cables.

� Instrument installation drawing

� Cable schedule

� Wiring diagrams

� Earthing schemes

� As built drawings

13.0 SUBMISSION SCHEDULE FOR SOME OF THE IMPORTANT

DOCUMENTS

The document submission schedule shall be as follows:

All documents shall be submitted terminal wise.

Within 2 weeks of issue of LOI

Data sheet format

Credentials of personnel to be posted at each location

Proposed details of site organization for each location

3 weeks of issue of LOI

Project schedule and Quality Assurance Plan (QAP)

1 month from LOI

Data sheets



Control room layout

FAT staging diagram

Operation philosophy/ system description

6 weeks from LOI

Procedure for installing equipment

P & I for each location

2 months from LOI

FDS for each location

Cable schedule

FAT procedure

Panel general arrangement drawing

External connection drawing

Power distribution scheme

I/O list

Earthing scheme

Pre-commissioning tests and procedures

3 Months from LOI

Instrument mounting drawings

Hardware design manual

Software design manual

Interlock scheme

Graphic page layout

Print formats

MIS formats

Operator prompts

Safety and security functions

Software details

14.0 PLANT OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

Tenderer shall submit to HPCL the draft of the operating manual for the facilities

as per requirements listed in contract documents for review and approval. Final

operating manual shall be issued only after obtaining approval of HPCL on draft.

10 (ten) sets of final approved operating and maintenance manual shall be made

available before commencing the commission of each terminal.

The operation manual shall have two parts. One shall give the details of the

individual instrument/ equipment. The other part shall contain the system details.

The objective of the manual is to assemble under one bound cover all the

instructions, data and drawings necessary for the operations personnel to start,

operate, control, shut down and maintain the systems under normal and emergency



conditions in a safe manner. It is desired that the instructions to be written for

clarity and simplicity.

Separate operation and maintenance manual shall be furnished for each terminal.

15.0 PERFORMANCE GUARANTEE AND WARRANTY

Tenderer shall be responsible for proper design, quality, workmanship, operation

& maintenance of all equipment, accessories, etc. supplied by the Tenderer for a

period of 24 months after successful commisioning. Further Tenderer shall provide

written guarantee that the back-up engineering, maintenance and spare parts shall

be available for a minimum period of 15 years after warranty period.

It shall be obligatory on the part of the Tenderer to modify and/or replace any

hardware from the supplied equipment and modify the operating system software,

Automation software, other software, rectify defects of equipment supplied and

software and attend to the maintenance of the system, free of cost, during start-up

and on-line operation of Loading Terminal facilities, within the warranty Period.

The replacement/maintenance aspects of the total system shall be attended on call

basis with one day notice.

During the warranty period, one competent engineer will visit each terminal at

least once a month for checking the operation of system and do preventive

maintenance. The schedule of visit shall be submitted in advance.

All flowmeters (including PD meters, Massflow meters, Turbine meters), proving

tanks (PD meter proving tank and truck proving tanks) shall be calibrated once in a

year during Performance Guarantee and Warranty

The above points shall be covered in the warranty quotation of the Tenderer, as a

part of base price of the system.

16.0 POST WARRANTY MAINTENANCE CONTRACT:

Tenderer shall quote for maintenance contract after two year warranty period for

five years, including the supply of spares and consumable and services required for

total operation and maintenance of the system. The replacement/maintenance

aspects of the total system shall be attended on call basis with one day notice.

Personal deployed shall have experience on maintenance of similar systems. The

lump sum price of the Post Warranty Maintenance contract shall be furnished

separately on annual basis. The annual calibration of instruments for 5 years is in

the scope of Tenderer. The master instruments required for calibration shall be

arranged by the Tenderer.

The tenderer shall ensure that all possible spares which may be required by the

automation system will be available during the entire period of AMC i.e. 5 years.

A list of spares shall be submitted along with the offer.

Tenderer shall execute bank guarantee equivalent to the cost of maintenance

contract to cover the five year AMC period.



All flowmeters (including PD meters, Massflow meters, Turbine meters), proving

tanks (PD meter proving tank and truck proving tanks) shall be calibrated once in a

year during Annual Maintenance Contract / Post Warranty Maintenance Contract.

During the AMC period, one competent engineer will visit each terminal at least

once a month for checking the operation of system and do preventive maintenance.

Also four emergency calls per year are included in the tenderer’s scope. These

emergency calls shall be attended with in 24 hours of intimation. During AMC

supply of all possible spares for replacement of faulty parts and consumables like

oil, grease for maintenance of equipment are included in tenderer’s scope .

PENALTY CHARGES DURING AMC PERIOD

Sl.No Description Time allowed for

rectification

Panelty charges in case of

delay beyond stipulated

period/days

1 Failure of TT Gantry Automation

resulting in loading point being inactive 7 Days Rs.1000/Day/Point

2 Failure of Gauging system for one

Primary product tank 7 Days Rs.1000/Day/Point

3 Control room equipments

- Equipments having redundancy like

LRC, PLC, Servers, UPS, etc

12 Days Rs.1000/Day

4 TAS failure on account of which

loading through TAS is stopped 48 Hrs Rs.3500/Day



17.0 ENCLOSURES

ENCL. 1 DATA/DETAILS OF TERMINAL

ENCL. 2 SHE POLICY

ENCL.3 LIST OF PREFERRED MAKES FOR INSTRUMENTS

ENCL. 4 GENERAL SPECIFICATION FOR PAINTING

ENCL. 5 LIST OF SPARES

ENCL.6 UPS LOAD CALCULATION SHEET

ENCL.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE PLAN

ENCL. 8 SIGNALS TO BE INTERFACED WITH PIPELINE CONTROL

ROOM

ENCL. 9 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE DRAWING

ENCL. 10 FLOW DIAGRAM OF TRUCK LOADING OPERATION

- 12 SHEETS

ENCL. 11 P & I DIAGRAM

ENCL-12 TERMINAL LAYOUT



ENCLOSURE-1



TERMINAL : JAIPUR

TANK FARM MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

Sl.

No

Tank

no. Product

Type of

Tank

Diameter

(m)

Height

(m)

Capacity

(KL) MOV

1. TF1 HSD FRVT 20 12 3288 101,102,103

104,105,106

2. TF2 HSD FRVT 20 12 3288 107,108,109

110,111,112

3. TF3 HSD FRVT 20 12 3288 113,114,115

116,117,118

4. TF4 MS FRVT 20 12 3288 201,202,203

204,205,206

5. TF5 MS FRVT 20 12 3288 207,208,209

210,211,212

6. TF6 MS FRVT 20 12 3288 213,214,215

216,217,218

7. TF7 SKO FRVT 12 10 959 301,302,303

304,305,306

8. TF8 SKO FRVT 12 10 959 307,308,309

310,311,312

9. TF9 SLOP FRVT 10 8 509 401,402,403

404,405,406

10. TF10 SLOP FRVT 10 8 509 407,408,409

410,411,412

11. TS1 HSD HORZ 3 11 70 NO

12. TS2 MS HORZ 3 11 70 NO

13. TS3 SKO HORZ 3 11 70 NO

14. TS4 ETHANOL HORZ 3 11 70 NO



PUMPS (LOADING)

PUMP NO. PRODUCT CAPACITY

(LPM)

NO. OF

PUMPS

UTILITY RATING

(KW)

J-H-H-001 HSD 3600 1 WORKING 30

J-H-H-002 HSD 3600 1 WORKING 30

J-H-H-003 HSD 3600 1 STANDBY 30

J-H-M-001 MS 2400 1 WORKING 22

J-H-M-002 MS 2400 1 WORKING 22

J-H-M-003 MS 2400 1 STANDBY 22

J-H-SK-001 SKO 1200 1 WORKING 11

J-H-SK-002 SKO 1200 1 STANDBY 11



J-H-SL-001 SLOP 1200 1 WORKING 11

J-H-SL-002 SLOP 1200 1 WORKING 11

J-V-DI-001 HSD 300 1 WORKING 5.5

J-V-DI-002 MS 300 1 WORKING 5.5

J-V-DI-003 SKO 300 1 WORKING 5.5

J-V-ET-001 ETHANOL 300 1 WORKING 5.5



ADDITIVE DOSING PUMPS

PRODUCT CAPACITY (LPH) NO. OF PUMPS UTILITY RATING (KW)

ADDITIVE 50 3 WORKING 0.75

ADDITIVE 50 3 STANDBY 0.75

T T GANTRY

NUMBER OF BAYS : 8

NUMBER OF LOADING POINTS: 12

BAY NO. LOADING POINT NO. PRODUCT

1 1 SKO

1 2

2 3 SKO

2 4

3 5 HSD

3 6

4 7 HSD

4 8

5 9 MS

5 10 HSD

6 11 MS

6 12 HSD

7 13 HSD

7 14 MS

8 15 HSD

8 16 MS



ENCLOSURE-2



SHE POLICY

SPECIFICATION FOR HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

MANAGEMENT

CONTENTS

CLAUSE

NO

TITLE PAGE NO.

1.0 SCOPE

2.0 REFERENCES

3.0 REQUIREMENT OF HEALTH,

SAFETY AND

ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

3.1 MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY

3.2 HOUSE KEEPING

3.3 SAFETY, HEALTH &

ENVIRONMENT

4.0 DETAILS OF HSE MANAGEMENT

SYSTEM BY CONTRACTOR

4.1 ON AWARD OF CONTRACT

4.2 DURING JOB EXECUTION

1.0 SCOPE

This specification establishes the Health, Safety and Environment (HSE) management

requirement to be complied with by the Contractors during construction.

Requirements stipulated in this specification shall supplement the requirements of HSE

Management given in relevant Act (s) / legislations. General Conditions of Contract

(GCC), Special Conditions of Contract (SCC) and Job Specifications. Where different

documents stipulate different requirements, the most stringent shall be adopted.

2.0 REFERENCES

This document should be read in conjunction with following:

- General Conditions of Contract (GCC)

- Special Conditions of Contract (SCC)

- Job Specifications

- Relevant IS Codes (refer Annexure – I)

3.0 REQUIREMENTS OF HEALTH, SAFETY & ENVIRONMENT (HSE)

MANAGEMENT SYSTEM TO BE COMPLIED BY BIDDERS

3.1 MANAGEMENT RESPONSIBILITY

3.1.1 The Contractor should have a documented HSE policy to cover commitment

of their organization to ensure health, safety and environment aspects in their

line of operations.

3.1.2 The HSE management system of the Contractor shall cover the HSE

requirements including but not limited to what is specified under Para 1.0



and para 2.0 above.

3.1.3 Contractor shall be fully responsible for planning and implementing HSE

requirements. Contractor as a minimum requirement shall designate / deploy

the following to co-ordinate the above :

No. of workers deployed

Up to 250 - Designate one safety supervisor

Above 250 & upto 500 - Deploy one qualified and

Experienced safety Engineer / officer

Above 500 - One additional safety

(for every 500 or less) engineer/officer as above.

Contractor shall indemnify & hold harmless Owner / HPCL & either

representatives free from any and all liabilities arising out of non – fulfilment

of HSE requirements.

3.1.4 The Contractor shall ensure that the Health, Safety and Environment (HSE)

requirements are clearly understood & faithfully implemented at all levels at

site.

3.1.5 The Contractor shall promote and develop consciousness for Health, Safety

and Environment among all personnel working for the Contractor. Regular

awareness, programme and fabrication shop / work site meetings shall be

arranged on HSE activities to cover hazards involved in various operations

during construction.

3.1.6 Arrange suitable first aid measures such as First Aid Box, trained personnel to

give First Aid, Stand by Ambulance or Vehicle and install fire protection

measures such as adequate number of steel buckets with sand and water and

adequate fire extinguishers to the satisfaction of HPCL/Owner.

3.1.7 The Contractor shall evolve a comprehensive planned and documented system

for implementation and monitoring of the HSE requirements. This shall be

submitted to HPCL/Owner for approval. The monitoring for implementation shall

be done by regular inspections and compliance to the observations thereof.

The Contractor shall get similar HSE requirements implemented at his sub-

contractor(s) work site/office. However, compliance of HSE requirements shall

be the sole responsibility of the Contractor. Any review / approval by

HPCL/Owner shall not absolve contractor of his responsibility / liability in

relation to all HSE requirements.

3.1.8 Non-Conformance on HSE by Contractor (including his Sub-contractors) as

brought out during review/audit by HPCL/Owner representatives shall be

resolved forthwith by Contractor. Compliance report shall be provided to

HPCL/Owner.

3.1.9 The Contractor shall ensure participation of his Resident Engineer / Site-in-

Charge in the Safety Committee / HSE Committees meetings arranged by

HPCL/Owner. The compliance of any observations shall be arranged urgently. He

shall assist HPCL/Owner to achieve the targets set by them on HSE during



the project implementation.

3.1.10 The Contractor shall adhere consistently to all provisions of HSE requirements.

In case of non-compliance or continuous failure in implementation of any of

HSE provisions; HPCL/Owner may impose stoppage of work without any

Cost & Time implication to Owner and/or impose a suitable penalty for non-

compliance with a notice of suitable period, upto a cumulative limit of 1.0%

(one percent) of Contract Value with a maximum limit of Rs. 10 lakhs. This

penalty shall be in addition to all other penalties specified else where in the

contract. The decision of imposing stoppage work, its extent & monitory

penalty shall rest with HPCL/Owner & binding on the Contractor.

3.1.11 All fatal accidents and other personnel accidents shall be investigated by a

team of Contractor’s senior personnel for root cause & recommend corrective

and preventive actions. Findings shall be documented and suitable actions taken

to avoid recurrences shall be communicated to HPCL/Owner. Owner / HPCL

shall have the liberty to independently investigate such occurrences and

Contractor shall extend all necessary help and co-operation in this regard.

3.2 HOUSE KEEPING

3.2.1 Contractor shall ensure that a high degree of house keeping is maintained and

shall ensure interalia the followings:

a. All surplus earth and debris are removed/disposed off from the working

areas to identified location(s).

b. Unused/Surplus Cables, Steel items and steel scrap lying scattered at

different places within the working areas are removed to identified

location(s).

c. All wooden scrap, empty wooden cable drums and other combustible

packing materials, shall be removed from work place to identified

location(s).

d. Roads shall be kept clear and materials like: pipes, steel, sand boulders,

concrete, chips and bricks etc. shall not be allowed on the roads to

obstruct free movement of men & machineries.

e. Fabricated steel structural, pipes & piping materials shall be stacked

properly for erection.

f. Water logging on roads shall not be allowed.

g. No parking of trucks / trolleys, cranes and trailors etc. shall be allowed on

roads which may obstruct the traffic movement.

h. Utmost care shall be taken to ensure over all cleanliness and proper

upkeep of the working areas.

i. Trucks carrying sand, earth and pulverised materials etc. shall be covered

while moving within the plane area.



3.3 HEALTH, SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT

3.3.1 The Contractor shall provide safe means of access to any working place

including provisions of suitable and sufficient scaffolding at various stages

during all operations of the work for the safety of his workmen, and,

HPCL/Owner. Contractor shall ensure deployment of appropriate equipment

and appliances for adequate safety and health of the workmen and protection

of surrounding areas.

3.3.2 The Contractor shall ensure that all their staff and workers including their

sub-contractor(s) shall wear Safety Helmet and Safety shoes. Contractor shall

also ensure use of safety belt, protective goggles, gloves etc. by the personnel

as per job requirements. All these gadgets shall conform to relevant IS

specifications or equivalent.

3.3.3 Contractor shall ensure that a proper Safety Net System shall be used at

appropriate locations. The safety net shall be located not more than 30 feet

(9.0 metres) below the working surface at site to arrest or to reduce the

consequences of a possible fall of persons working at different heights.

3.3.4 Contractor shall ensure that flash back arrester shall be used while using Gas

Cylinders at site. Cylinders shall be mounted on trolleys.

3.3.5 The Contractor shall assign to his workmen, tasks commensurate with their

qualification, experience and state of health for driving of vehicles, handling

and erection of materials and equipments. All lifting equipments shall be

tested certified for its capacity before use. Adequate and suitable lighting at

every work place and approach there to, shall be provided by the Contractor

before starting the actual operations at night.

3.3.6 Hazardous and/or toxic materials such as solvent coating, or thinners shall be

stored in appropriate containers.

3.3.7 All hazardous materials shall be labeled with the name of the materials, the

hazards associated with its use and necessary precautions to be taken.

3.3.8 Contractor shall ensure that during the performance of the work, all hazards to

be health of personnel, have been identified, assessed and eliminated.

3.3.9 Chemical spills shall be contained & cleaned up immediately to prevent further

contamination.

3.3.10 All personnel exposed to physical agents such as ionizing radiation, ultraviolet

rays or similar other physical agents shall be provided with adequate shielding

or protection commensurate with the type of exposure involved.

3.3.11 Where contact or exposure of hazardous materials could exceed limits or

could otherwise have harmful affects, appropriate personal protective

equipments such as gloves, goggles, aprons, chemical resistant clothing and

respirator shall be used.

- A Crèche where 10 or more female workers are having children below the

age of 6 years.



- Reasonable Canteen facilities are made available at appropriate location

depending upon site conditions.

3.3.13 Suitable facilities for toilet, drinking water, proper lighting shall be provided at

site and labour camps, commensurate with applicable Laws / Legislation.

3.3.14 Contractor shall ensure storage and utilization methodology of materials that

are not detrimental to the environment. Where required Contractor shall ensure

that only the environment friendly materials are selected.

3.3.15 All persons deployed at site shall be knowledgeable of and comply with the

environmental laws, rules & regulations relating to the hazardous materials

substances and wastes. Contractor shall not dump, release or otherwise

discharge or dispose off any such materials without the express authorization

of HPCL/Owner.

4.0 DETAILS OF HSE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM BY CONTRACTOR

4.1 On Award of Contract

The Contractor shall prior to start of work submit his Health, Safety and

Environment Manual or procedure and HSE Plans for approval by

HPCL/Owner. The Contractor shall participate in the pre-start meeting with

HPCL/Owner to finalise HSE Plans including the following :

� Job procedure to be followed by Contractor for activities covering.

Handling of equipment, Scaffolding, Electric Installation, describing the

risks involved, actions to be taken and methodology for monitoring each

activity.

� HPCL/Owner review / audit requirement.

� Organization structure along with responsibility and authority records / reports

etc. on HSE activities.

4.2 During job execution

4.2.1 Implement approved Health, Safety and Environment management procedure

including but not limited to as brought out under para 3.0. Contractor shall

also ensure to:

� Arrange workmen compensation insurance, registration under ESI Act,

third party liability insurance etc., as applicable.

� Arrange all HSE permits before start of activities (as applicable) like hot

work, confined space, work at heights, storage of chemical / explosive

materials and its use and implement all precautions mentioned therein.

� Submit timely the completed checklist on HSE activities, Monthly HSE

report, accident reports, investigation reports etc. as per HPCL/Owner

requirements. Compliance of instructions on HSE shall be done by

Contractor and informed urgently to HPCL/Owner.

• Ensure that Resident Engineer / Site-in-Charge of the Contractor shall

attend all the Safety Committee / HSE meetings arranged by



HPCL/Owner. Only in case of his absence from site that a second

senior most person shall be nominated by him in advance and

communicated to HPCL/Owner.

• Display at site office and work locations caution boards, list of hospitals,

emergency services available.

• Provide posters, banners for safe working to promote safety consciousness.

• Carryout audits / inspection at sub contractor works as per approved HSE

document and submit the reports for HPCL/Owner review.

• Assist in HSE audits by HPCL/Owner, and submit compliance report.

• Generate & submit HSE records / report as per HSE Plan.

• Appraise HPCL/Owner on HSE activities at site.



ENCLOSURE 3



LIST OF APPROVED MAKES FOR MUNDRA DELHI PIPELINE PROJECT

Batch Controller Daniel, Smith, Contrec,Bopp & Reuther,

PD Meter + Pulse Transmitter Liquid Controls, Smith, Bopp & Reuther

Strainer Liquid Controls, Smith, Bopp & Reuther

Air Eliminator Liquid Controls, Smith, Bopp & Reuther

Bulk Air Eliminator Flash point, FMC Sanmar, Bopp & Reuther, Liquid

Controls

Piston Digital Control Valve Bermad, Smith, Brooks, Daniel

Radar Gauge with Tank side Indicator SAAB, ENRAAF

Averaging Temp Sensor for Tanks SAAB,ENRAAF

Water Interface Measurement Sensor SAAB,ENRAAF

Pressure Gauge

Gen. Instruments., H. Guru, Waree, AN Instruments,

Manometer (I) Ltd, Hirlekar

Level Transmitter ( Float & tape) S.B.Electromechanicals, Nivo Controls, E &H

Truck Proving Tank FMC Sanmar , Flash Point, Bopp & Reuther, Liquid

Controls

PD Meter Proving Tank FMC Sanmar , Flash Point, Bopp & Reuther, Liquid

Controls

UPS DB Electronics, EMERSON, Fuji, Hi – Rel, APC

Loading Arm Heatly and Gresham, Technica, Associate

Engineers, Shreeraj Ferro Tubes

Earthing Relay Scully, Anderson, Daniel, Osna Proximity Card reader Westing house , Daniel, Contrec, Stahl

Remote Interaction Terminal BALIGA, FCG

Density meter Smith , Micromotion, Bopp & Reuther , E&H

Mass flow meter Smith , Micromotion, Bopp & Reuther , E&H

RTD, Thermowells

General Instruments, Nagman, Altop, Pyroelectric,

Goa Junction Box

Baliga, CEAG Flameproof control gears, Ex

Protecta, Flameproof eqpt. (p) Ltd, Flexpro

Electricals (P) Ltd, Sterling Switch gears controls

(po) Ltd, Sudhir Switch gears (P) Ltd, Flamepack.

Signal cable & Control cable

LAPP, Delton, Universal cable, RPG, Reliance,

CMI, KEI Industries, Radient cables, Havell

RTD cable

LAPP, Delton, Universal cable, RPG, Havells,

Toshniwal

Power cable

Universal cable, Finolex, Fort Gloster ,CCI, Delton,

Cord, LAPP, RPG, Relience, Havell

PLC

Honeywell, Siemens, Ge Fanuc, Schneider –

Modicon, Rockwell

Barrier Gate Heidz India, Technica, Metachem

Pressure relief valve

Instrumentation Ltd., Keystone valves Ltd., Sebim

valves, Tyco Sanmar

Level Switches

Nivo Controls, SB Electro Mechanicals, Bells

Controls Ltd , Chemtrols Engg. Pvt. Ltd, Levcon

Instruments, DK Instruments Pvt. Ltd , V. Automat



Industries (P) Ltd

Gauge Glass & Cocks

Bliss Anand (P) Ltd., Chemtrols Engg. Pvt. Ltd,

Levcon Instruments

Receiver Instruments

ABB, Instrumentation Ltd., CG-ELSAG Bailey Ltd ,

Rosemount (India) Pvt.Ltd, Seimens Ltd ,

Honeywell Automation (I) Ltd., Yokogawa Bluestar

Ltd

Alarm annunciator

Electronic corporation of India Ltd, Industrial

Instruments & Controls, Procon Instrumentation(P)

Ltd.

Pressure Switches

Indfoss (India) Ltd , Switzer Instruments Ltd , Vasu

Tech Ltd

Orifice Plates, R.O., Flanges

Baliga Lighting Eqpt., Micro Precision products,

Placka Instruments & Controls (P), Ltd. , Starmech

Controls (I) Ltd. Engineering Specialities Pvt. Ltd.,

Hydropnuematics, Instrumentation Ltd., Mahindra

& Mahindra Ltd.

Control consoles, panels & Accessories Chemin, Lotus, Pyrotech Control India,

Instrumentation Limited ,Seimens Limited, Rittal

Instrument Tubing

Apex Tubes Pvt Ltd , Choksy Tube Co Ltd., Heavy

Metals & Tubes Ltd., Maharashtra Seamless Ltd ,

Nuclear Fuel Complex, India, Ratnamani Metal &

Tubes Ltd , Saw Pipes Ltd , Zenith Ltd, Swagelock

Client Computer HP, Dell, IBM/ Lenovo, Acer

Server HP, Dell, IBM, Acer

Printer Wipro, TVSE

Pressure transmitters Rosemount, ABB, THL, YBL

Proximity Switches P & F, Turck

Barriers P & F, MTL

Thermal Relief Valve Keystone/Sebim India/ Fainger Leser

Check Valves Steel Strong, Niton, PEC, Neco – Schubert & Salzer

Pvt. Ltd., BDK Engg.

Ball Valves Audco, Virgo, Flow Chem, KSB, BDR

Pipes Jindal pipes, Suryaroshni, Ratnamani, Indian

Seamless, Maharashtra Seamless, BHEL, Saw

Pipes

Pipes fittings & flanges Gujrat Infra pipes, Tube products, Kwality, Venus,

Parveen Ind., Stewarts & Lloyds

Master Station Rotork, Limitorque

Fiber Optic cable Lucent, Optel, Finolex, Avaya

Ethernet Switches and Terminal Server IBM, Emulex, Stallion, Systech, Nortel Networks,

D-Link, Cisco

Relays Omron, Tele Mechanique, Honeywell

Limit switches Telemechanique , L & T, siemens, BCH, Honeywell

Automation (I) Ltd

Turbine Meters Rockwin, Liquid controls, Solatron



ENCLOSURE - 4



PAINTING

General

- Surfaces in direct bonded contact with concrete, stainless steel or other corrosion

resistant alloys, metals are not required to be painted, unless specified, except for

identification marks wherever relevant.

- All surfaces to be painted shall be blast cleaned to Swedish Standard SA 2 ½. Paints

shall be applied not later than 3-4 h after cleaning of surface.

- Unless otherwise specified, areas, which become inaccessible after assembly, shall be

painted before assembly after cleaning the surface.

- The surface shall be perfectly dry before painting.

- Painting shall not be done in frosty or foggy weather or when humidity is such as to

cause condensation on the surface to be painted (relative humidity 80% or above) or

ambient temperature less than 40 degrees F.

- General compatibility between primer and finishing paints shall be certified by the

paint manufacturers supplying these paints.

- Colour scheme of painting of structures shall take into account national and

international safety standards on accident prevention and shall also be subject to

Owner’s approval.

Application of primer and finishing paints

- Unless otherwise specified, all steel structures, immediately after fabrication at shop

undergo surface preparation conforming to Swedish Standard SA 2 ½

- The primer painting shall consist of 2 coats of Zinc Phosphate red oxide primer of 30

to 35 microns DFT each.

- The finish coat shall consist of 2 coats of Coal Tar Epoxy of 15 to 20 microns DFT

each for steel structures and 2 coats of Aluminum paint for product pipes of 15 to 20

microns DFT each one before erection and one after erection.

- The total paint thickness shall not be less than 90 microns DFT.

- All paints shall be of approved quality.

- Whenever the primer paint is damaged, the surface shall be thoroughly cleaned and

touched up with the corresponding primer paint before applying the second coat of

primer.

- The finishing paints shall be of approved colour. The under-coat shall have a

different tinge to distinguish from the finishing coat.

- All paints shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.



- Parts of steel structures embedded in concrete, shall be given a protective coat of

portland cement slurry immediately after fabrication after surface of this part is

thoroughly cleaned from grease, rust, mill scales, etc. No paint shall be applied on

this part at site.

The approved makes for paints are Berger, Asian Paints, Jenson Nicholson, Shalimar,

ICI.



ENCLOSURE - 5



PROPOSED SPARES FOR LOCATION PER YEAR:

S.N ITEMS PROPOSED

SPARES QTY 1 Flow Metering system

i 3” PD Meter

ii 3” Strainer

iii 3” Air Eliminator

iv 3” Set Stop Valve

v 1 ½” PD Meter

vi 1 ½” Strainer

vii 1 ½” Air Eliminator

viii 1 ½” Set Stop Valve

ix Pulse Transmitter

x Differential Pressure Gauge

xi Batch Controllers

xii Loading Arm

xiii Earthing Relay

2 Proving Tank

3 Proximity card readers

4 Remote Interaction Terminals

5 Pressure Transmitter

6 TANK FARM MANAGEMENT SYSTEM

(i) Radar Gauge

(ii) Average Temperature Sensor

(iii) Water bottom sensor

(iv) Tank side Indicator

(v) Computer Interface unit

7 Densitometer

8 Float & Tape Level Transmitter

9 Mass Flowmeter

10 PLC system

11 UPS system

12 Pressure gauge

13 Electronic Display Board

14 Barrier Gate

15 Bulk Air Eliminator & Thermal relief valve

16 Printers

17 PC’s & Servers



18 LAN Components

19 Manual Call Points

List of spares that shall be kept in the location shall be listed out.

Minimum quantity of spares to be kept with the tenderer during AMC shall be furnished. Tender

shall replace the spares as and when it is consumed. The spares shall be handed over to the

location after AMC period.

� Recommended spares and quantity shall be filled by the Tenderer based on OEM

recommendation.



ENCLOSURE - 6



UPS LOAD CALCULATION SHEET

Location

Sl. No. Description Qty

Power Requirement

per unit in KVA

Total Power

Requirement KVA

230 VAC 24 VDC 230 VAC 24 VDC

Control Room

1

LRC server including 19" monitor and

accessories

2

TFMS PC including 19" monitor and

accessories

3

OIC including 19" monitor and

accessories

4

Windows Gateway server including

19" monitor and accessories

5

PLC programming terminal including

19" monitor and other accessories

6 Dot matrix printers

7 Network Components

8 PLC subsystem

A PLC

B Modules

DI

DO

AI

Relays

9 TDM server

10 TTES PC 19" monitor and accessories

11 Terminal / Communication servers

12

Field Communication Unit for Tank

Farm System

Field

1

Radar Gauges including Multipoint

temperature sensor, water bottom

sensor and Tankside indicator

2 Pressure Transmitters

3 Batch controllers

4 Pulse Transmitters

5 Earthing Relays

6 Electronic Display Unit

7 Access Card Readers

8 Barrier Gates

9 Remote Interaction Terminal

10 Pressure Transmitter in the Header

11 Density meter

12 Temperature transmitters

13 Mass flow meters

14 Emergency Shutdown Pushbutton



15 Set Stop Valve

16 Float & Tape type Level Transmitters

17 LA Barriers

Total at 100% load continuously ON

Power Rating Required

20 % spare capacity

Total Calculated Power with 20%

Additional Capacity

Rating of Offered UPS



ENCLOSURE - 7

QUALITY ASSURANCE, INSPECTION & TESTING



1.0. GENERAL REQUIREMENT OF QUALITY ASSURANCE

All materials, components and equipment covered under the Technical specification

for this Project shall be procured, manufactured, tested, erected and commissioned as

per a comprehensive Quality Assurance Programme. It shall be the primary

responsibility of the contractor to draw up and implement such a programme which

shall be duly approved by the Purchaser/Consultant/their authorized Inspection

Agency.

The detailed Quality Assurance Plan (QAP) for manufacturing and testing of

equipment shall be prepared by the contractor and submitted for approval by the

Purchaser/their aurhorised Inspection Agency.

2.0 Inspection and testing

The equipment shall be inspected by the Purchaser and / or their Inspection

Agency at the manufacturer’s works prior to despatch. The equipment will

be inspected as per the tests pre-identified in the approved QAP to ensure

conformity of the same with relevant approved drawings, data sheets,

technical specification, National/International Standard.

The contractor shall finalise the QAP within the stipulated schedule mentioned in

the Purchase Order and the QAP shall be submitted in four sets (Blank QAP

formats enclosed shall be adopted). In case of any sub-contracting, the QAP shall

be prepared by the contractor in consultation with his sub-contractor to avoid any

lapse in quality and disputes and misunderstanding.

The contractor shall provide full and free access of the Inspection Agency to the

manufacturer’s works to carry out any stage inspection to ensure the quality of the

equipment being manufactured.

Only on readiness of the equipment and approval of all relevant drawings & QAP,

the contractor shall give “Inspection Call” (Blank format enclosed shall be

adopted) to the Purchaser & the Inspection Agency with a clear notice of 10 days

for inspection. The Inspection Call shall be accompanied by the manufacturer’s

internal inspection report, test certificates, purchase order, sub-purchase order,

technical specification, approved QAP and approved drawings / data sheets. The

Inspection Call without above documents shall be ignored. In case of any

approved sub-contracting, only the main contractor shall give the Inspection Call

enclosing internal inspection/ test reports of the sub-contractor duly verified by

the main contractor. In case the equipment offered for inspection is found not

ready, all the cost of the visit of the Inspection Agency shall be borne by the

contractor.

2.1 The contractor shall furnish all relevant documents and test certificates as required

by the Inspection Agency during inspection. Materials shall be tested only in

recognised Test House/Laboratory.

2.2 The contractor shall delegate a representative/ coordinator to coordinate with the

Inspection Agency on all inspection matters.



2.3 No equipment shall be offered for inspection in the painted condition unless

otherwise agreed to the purchaser.

2.4 The contractor shall ensure that the equipment and materials once rejected by the

Inspection Agency are not reused in the manufacture of plant and equipment.

Where parts rejected by the inspection Agency have been rectified as per pre-

agreed procedure, such parts shall be segregated for separate inspection and

approval before being used in the work.

2.5 The contractor shall carry out their internal inspection and obtain clearance from

Statutory bodies, like IBR, CCE, Weights & Measures, Safety, IE Rules, etc., as

required for the equipment prior to offering any such equipment for Purchaser’s

inspection.

2.6 The contractor shall provide all required instruments, tools, necessary testing and

inspection facilities free of cost to carry out the inspection. These instruments and

testing machines shall be calibrated by an agency of National/ International

recognition and the calibration shall be valid during inspection period.

2.7 The inspection Agency shall have the right to demand for re-testing of any

material re-calibration of the instrument and testing machine & the charges for the

above will be borne by the contractor.

2.8 Performance tests of any particular equipment which cannot be conducted /

demonstrated either partially or wholly at the manufacturer’s works, shall be

conducted after erection at site in the presence of Purchaser and their Inspection

Agency. In all the cases, prior approval of the Purchaser shall be obtained.

2.9 No equipment shall be despatched before inspection and issue of Inspection

Certificate and despatch clearance from the Purchaser / Inspection Agency.

2.10 In case of waiver category items, the same shall be pre-identified in the QAP

itself. For such items, the contractor shall furnish necessary certificate, test

reports, etc., as agreed upon and indicated in the QAP. For these items also the

contractor shall obtain “Inspection Waiver Certificate” and despatch clearance

from the purchaser Inspection Agency before effecting despatch of equipment.

2.11 The issue of Inspection Certificate / Waiver Certificate for any equipment or

component thereof does not absolve the contractor from his contractual

obligations towards subsequent satisfactory performance of the equipment at site.

Should any equipment be found defective, in whole or part thereof after receipt at

site or during erection/ commissioning and testing shall be made good by the

contractor free of cost.



ENCLOSURE - 8



ENCLOSURE-9



ENCLOSURE-10



ENCLOSURE-11



ENCLOSURE – 12



SECTION - 9

UNPRICED SCHEDULE

FORMAT



UNPRICED SCHEDULE FORMAT

Sl.

No.

ITEM DESCRIPTION Qty UOM

SUPPLY

1 Strainer with DPG, air eliminator, positive displacement type flowmeter

with dual pulse transmitter and set stop valve (All the field instruments

shall be of explosion proof type) for 3" line

12 Set


with pulse transmitter (single pulse) and set stop valve and Non return

valve (All the field instruments shall be of explosion proof type) for

1.5" ethanol line

4 Set

3 Batch Controllers 12 Each

4 Remote Interaction Terminals (explosion proof) 12 Each

5 Earthing Relay (each with two units one for earthing and other for

bonding

12 Each

6 Tyre wheel mounted Proving tank (2 kl) for PD meter calibration with

W & M stamping

1 Each

7 Proving tanks of capacity 1000L two numbers, 500L one number for

tank truck calibration with W & M stamping

1 Set

8 Explosion proof/ IS Proximity card readers 11 Each

9 Proximity cards 200 Each

10 Universal hand held HART calibrator 1 Each

11 Pressure Transmitters in the header 12 Each

12 Supply of bulk air eliminators on the pipeline -Air eliminator of line size

DN 300 mm for flow rate 7200 LPM for HSD product

1 Each

13 Supply of bulk air eliminators on the pipeline- Air eliminator of line size

DN 200 mm for flow rate 4800 LPM for MS product

1 Each

14 Supply of bulk air eliminators on the pipeline- Air eliminator of line size

DN 100 mm for flow rate 2400 LPM for SKO product

1 Each

15 Tank Farm Management System : Explosion proof Radar type Level

transmitters RS 485 communication with all necessary communication

interfaces & accessories for FRVT

10 Each

16 >Average temperature sensor with water bottom sensor for FRVT 8 Each

17 >Average temperature sensor without water bottom sensor for FRVT for

SLOP

2 Each

18 Computer Interface Unit working in hot standby mode mounted in the

same panel

2 Each

19 Pressure transmitters for density measurement including supply of

Isolation valves

10 Each

20 Densitometer (Explosion proof) with 4 to 20 mA O/P, instrument range

0.2510 to 2.5 gm/cc, measurement range 0.6 to 1 gm/cc, accuracy +/-

0.0005 gm/cc over the measurement range for the following line sizes

and including Orifice plates, valves & flanges and micro strainer for

Density meter installation & Pt-100 RTD for density correction in TLF

area if density meter does not have in built Temperature with local and

remote display for both density and temperature. The scope of work

includes calibration at FCRI.

3 Each

21 Radar typeLevel Transmitter for U/G/ A/G tanks +/- 1 mm accuracy

with local display of level and temp.

3 Each

22 Radar type Level Transmitter for U/G/ A/G tanks +/- 3 mm accuracy


3 Each



Sl.

No.


23 Single point RTD for temp compensation in U/G, A/G horizontal tanks

with local and remote display

6 Each

24 Float & Tape type Level transmitters for Water tanks 2 Each

25 STATION CONTROL SUB SYSTEM consisting of 32 bit PLC system

in hot stand by mode with licenced software

1 Set.

26 UPS System: Suitably sized Parallel redundant Uninterruptible power

supply system (min 2 x 10 KVA) including sealed maintenance free

batteries (30 minutes back up time) and necessary cables of required

capacity (for all control room, TM's room, S&D room equipment & field

instrumentation equipment of Schedule of quantity

1 Set

27 Pressure gauges, 6" dial size with pulsation dampners 26 Each

28 Electronic Display for displaying truck nos 1 Each

29 Barrier gates with drive motor ( Squirrel cage Induction motor ) &

control panel (with start/ stop, L/R switch, PBS etc) complete with cables

and other accessories

3 Set

30 Emergency Push Button 3 Each

31 Cables shall include complete cabling required for automation of the

terminal viz. Power cables, control cables, signal cables, data

communiction cables and special cables, if any, including supply of

suitable size MCT at the entrance to Control Room, cable glands etc.

1 Lot

32 Cable trenches - shall be of 1 mt depth, 300/600 mm width. Scope

includes supply of sand, brick layer.

1 Lot

33 GI Cable tray, Heavy Duty PVC conduits for carrying armoured cables,

Earth pits, GI Earthing strips required for automation equipment and

Erection materials like O ring, Gasket, nut, bolt, half coupling, impulse

pipes etc.(Note: Hume pipes for crossing of cables under roads laid by

another vendor)

1 Lot

34 Flame proof junction boxes 1 Lot

35 Fire Water System -Manual Call Points 7 Each

36 Fire Water System -Pressure Switch 3 Each

37 Fire Water System -WP Junction boxes 1 Lot

38 Fire Water System -Level switch for makeup water system 4 Each

39 Fire Water System -DPG across Strainer for pumps 10 Each

40 Supply of all the material for-"Wiring and termination at both ends and

connection to PLC of fire water diesel engine panel for Local/ Remote

operation of pumps and Auto operation"

3 Each

41 Additive injection skid( dual module) including all instruments, complete

ss piping between skid to gantry,valves and accessories and integrating it

to the respective batch controller

6 Each

42 Supply of all the material for -Interfacing of signals from TAS control

room to pipeline control room through serial comm. link and hardwiring

1 Lot

43 Supply of Master Station for controlling the MOV's with RS485

(redundant) communication link to plant PLC as per specification

enclosed including serial communication cable (daisy chained) of

required length to all the MOV's

1 Each

44 Integration of VFD into TAS including supply of communication cables

and Energy management software

1 Lot

45 TFMS(1 no.), LRC Server(2 nos ) working on hot redundant basis ,

Windows Gateway Servers (2 nos.), 7 nos Client Computers with OS and

application software as per specifications and with 19" Monitors

1 Set



Sl.

No.


46 PRINTERS, 24 Pin 300 cps 136 Col Dot Matrix /Laser Printer 2 Each

47 Local Area Networking with CAT 6 cabling inside the building and FO

cabling for networking outside buildings

1 Each

48 Single computer console for mounting all the computer monitors located

in the control room. The console shall have provision for drawers . The

console shall be fabricated with Steel sheet with glass windows With

necessary dummy corner panels to achieve C profile.

1 No.

49 Training 1 Lot

50 Comprehensive AMC Year 1 1 Lump Sum





ERECTION, TESTING AND COMMISSIONING OF FIELD

INSTRUMENTS (PART – B)


with dual pulse transmitter and set stop valve (All the field instruments

shall be of explosion proof type) for 3" line

12 Set


with pulse transmitter (single pulse) and set stop valve and Non return

valve (All the field instruments shall be of explosion proof type) for

1.5" ethanol line

4 Set



59 Earthing Relay (each with two units one for earthing and other for

bonding

12 Each

60 Tyre wheel mounted Proving tank (2 kl) for PD meter calibration with

W & M stamping

1 Each

61 Proving tanks of capacity 1000L two numbers, 500L one number for

tank truck calibration with W & M stamping

1 Set



64 Air eliminator of line size DN 300 mm for flow rate 7200 LPM for HSD

product

1 Each

65 Air eliminator of line size DN 200 mm for flow rate 4800 LPM for MS

product

1 Each

66 Air eliminator of line size DN 100 mm for flow rate 2400 LPM for SKO

product

1 Each

67 Tank Farm Management System: Explosion proof Radar type Level

transmitters RS 485 communication with all necessary communication


10 Each

68 Pressure transmitters for density measurement including installation of

Isolation valves

10 Each

69 Densitometer (Explosion proof) with 4 to 20 mA O/P, instrument range

0.2510 to 2.5 gm/cc, measurement range 0.6 to 1 gm/cc, accuracy +/-

0.0005 gm/cc over the measurement range for the following line sizes

and including Orifice plates, valves & flanges and micro strainer for

Density meter installation & Pt-100 RTD for density correction in TLF

area if density meter does not have in built Temperature with local and

3 Each



Sl.

No.


remote display for both density and temperature. The scope of work

includes draining of oil, cutting and welding of pipes



3 Each



3 Each

72 Single point RTD for temp compensation in U/G, A/G horizontal tanks

with local and remote display

6 Each

73 Float & Tape type Level transmitters for Water tanks 2 Each

74 STATION CONTROL SUB SYSTEM consisting of 32 bit PLC system

in hot stand by mode with licenced software

1 Set

75 UPS System : Suitably sized Parallel redundant Uninterruptible power

supply system (min 2 x 10 KVA) including sealed maintenance free

batteries (30 minutes back up time) and necessary cables of required

capacity (for all control room, TM's room, S&D room equipment & field

instrumentation equipment of Schedule of quantity

1 Set

76 Pressure gauges, 6" dial size with pulsation dampners 26 Set


78 Barrier gates with drive motor ( Squirrel cage Induction motor ) &

control panel (with start/ stop, L/R switch, PBS etc) complete with cables

and other accessories

3 Set


80 Cables shall include complete cabling required for automation of the

terminal viz. Power cables, control cables, signal cables, data

communiction cables and special cables, if any, including installation of

suitable size MCT at the entrance to Control Room.

1 Lot

81 Cable trenches - shall be of 1 mt depth, 300/600 mm. Scope includes

excavation, cable laying width with sand, brick layer already supllied

under item 32, backfilling etc. complete

1 Lot

82 GI Cable tray, Heavy Duty PVC conduits for carrying armoured cables,

Earth pits, GI Earthing strips required for automation equipment and

Erection materials like O ring, Gasket, nut, bolt, half coupling, impulse

pipes etc.(Note: Hume pipes for crossing of cables under roads laid by

another vendor)

1 Lot


84 Fire water system- Manual Call Points 7 Each

85 Fire water system- Pressure Switch 3 Each

86 Fire water system- WP Junction boxes 1 Lot

87 Fire water system- Level switch for makeup water system 4 Each

88 Fire water system- DPG across Strainer for pumps 10 Each

89 Wiring and termination at both ends and connection to PLC of fire water

diesel engine panel for Local/ Remote operation of pumps and Auto

operation

3 Each

90 Additive injection skid( dual module) including all instruments, complete

ss piping between skid to gantry,valves and accessories and integrating it

to the respective batch controller

6 Each

91 Interfacing of signals from TAS control room to pipeline control room 1 Lot



Sl.

No.


through serial comm. link and hardwiring

92 Installation of Master Station for controlling the MOV's with RS485

(redundant) communication link to plant PLC as per specification

enclosed including serial communication cable (daisy chained) of

required length to all the MOV's

1 Each

93 Integration of VFD into TAS including supply and laying of

communication cables and Energy management software

1 Lot

94 IT COMPONENTS -TFMS(1 no.), LRC Server(2 nos ) working on hot

redundant basis , Windows Gateway Servers (2 nos.), 7 nos Client

Computers with OS and application software as per specifications and

with 19" Monitors

1 Set

95 IT COMPONENTS- Single computer console for mounting all the

computer monitors located in the control room. The console shall have

provision for drawers. The console shall be fabricated with Steel sheet

with glass windows With necessary dummy corner panels to achieve C

profile.

1 Each

Note: i) Bidder shall quote basic rates for AMC. Service Tax as applicable shall be

reimbursed at actuals.

ii) Bidders to note that items for which Erection, Testing & Commissioning

rates have not been taken, the same shall be included in the respective

supply items, if applicable.



SECTION – 10

COMPLETION

SCHEDULE



COMPLETION SCHEDULE

The complete work of Terminal, Instrumentation & Automation System for Jaipur

Terminal shall be completed and Commissioned within 6 (six) months from the date of

issue of LOI. After successful commissioning of the entire system, the system shall be

stabilized and proved for fault less service for a period of three months as stipulated.

The Contractor shall submit a detailed bar chart for the entire work enumerating the start

and finish date of various activities such as site mobilization, submission of documents,

supply of materials and equipments, erection and commissioning, trial runs and

stabilization obtaining statutory approvals etc along with the Tender.



SECTION - 11

PRICED SCHEDULE

FORMATS



PRICE SCHEDULE FORMAT

Sl.

No.

ITEM DESCRIPTION Qty UOM Unit Rate

Rs

Total

Rs

SUPPLY

1 Strainer with DPG, air eliminator, positive

displacement type flowmeter with dual pulse

transmitter and set stop valve (All the field

instruments shall be of explosion proof type) for 3"

line

12 Set


displacement type flowmeter with pulse transmitter

(single pulse) and set stop valve and Non return

valve (All the field instruments shall be of

explosion proof type) for 1.5" ethanol line

4 Set



5 Earthing Relay (each with two units one for

earthing and other for bonding

12 Each

6 Tyre wheel mounted Proving tank (2 kl) for PD

meter calibration with W & M stamping

1 Each

7 Proving tanks of capacity 1000L two numbers,

500L one number for tank truck calibration with W

& M stamping

1 Set


9 Proximity cards 200 Each

10 Universal hand held HART calibrator 1 Each


12 Supply of bulk air eliminators on the pipeline -Air

eliminator of line size DN 300 mm for flow rate

7200 LPM for HSD product

1 Each

13 Supply of bulk air eliminators on the pipeline- Air


4800 LPM for MS product

1 Each

14 Supply of bulk air eliminators on the pipeline- Air


2400 LPM for SKO product

1 Each

15 Tank Farm Management System : Explosion proof

Radar type Level transmitters RS 485

communication with all necessary communication


10 Each

16 >Average temperature sensor with water bottom

sensor for FRVT

8 Each

17 >Average temperature sensor without water

bottom sensor for FRVT for SLOP

2 Each

18 Computer Interface Unit working in hot standby

mode mounted in the same panel

2 Each

19 Pressure transmitters for density measurement

including supply of Isolation valves

10 Each



Sl.

No.


Rs

Total

Rs

20 Densitometer (Explosion proof) with 4 to 20 mA

O/P, instrument range 0.2510 to 2.5 gm/cc,

measurement range 0.6 to 1 gm/cc, accuracy +/-

0.0005 gm/cc over the measurement range for the

following line sizes and including Orifice plates,

valves & flanges and micro strainer for Density

meter installation & Pt-100 RTD for density

correction in TLF area if density meter does not

have in built Temperature with local and remote

display for both density and temperature. The

scope of work includes calibration at FCRI.

3 Each

21 Radar typeLevel Transmitter for U/G/ A/G tanks

+/- 1 mm accuracy with local display of level and

temp.

3 Each

22 Radar type Level Transmitter for U/G/ A/G tanks


temp.

3 Each

23 Single point RTD for temp compensation in U/G,

A/G horizontal tanks with local and remote display

6 Each

24 Float & Tape type Level transmitters for Water

tanks

2 Each

25 STATION CONTROL SUB SYSTEM consisting

of 32 bit PLC system in hot stand by mode with

licenced software

1 Set.

26 UPS System: Suitably sized Parallel redundant

Uninterruptible power supply system (min 2 x 10

KVA) including sealed maintenance free batteries

(30 minutes back up time) and necessary cables of

required capacity (for all control room, TM's room,

S&D room equipment & field instrumentation

equipment of Schedule of quantity

1 Set

27 Pressure gauges, 6" dial size with pulsation

dampners

26 Each


29 Barrier gates with drive motor ( Squirrel cage

Induction motor ) & control panel (with start/ stop,

L/R switch, PBS etc) complete with cables and

other accessories

3 Set


31 Cables shall include complete cabling required for

automation of the terminal viz. Power cables,

control cables, signal cables, data communiction

cables and special cables, if any, including supply

of suitable size MCT at the entrance to Control

Room, cable glands etc.

1 Lot

32 Cable trenches - shall be of 1 mt depth, 300/600

mm width. Scope includes supply of sand, brick

layer.

1 Lot



Sl.

No.


Rs

Total

Rs

33 GI Cable tray, Heavy Duty PVC conduits for

carrying armoured cables, Earth pits, GI Earthing

strips required for automation equipment and

Erection materials like O ring, Gasket, nut, bolt,

half coupling, impulse pipes etc.(Note: Hume pipes

for crossing of cables under roads laid by another

vendor)

1 Lot


35 Fire Water System -Manual Call Points 7 Each

36 Fire Water System -Pressure Switch 3 Each

37 Fire Water System -WP Junction boxes 1 Lot

38 Fire Water System -Level switch for makeup water

system

4 Each

39 Fire Water System -DPG across Strainer for pumps 10 Each

40 Supply of all the material for-"Wiring and

termination at both ends and connection to PLC of

fire water diesel engine panel for Local/ Remote

operation of pumps and Auto operation"

3 Each

41 Additive injection skid( dual module) including all

instruments, complete ss piping between skid to

gantry,valves and accessories and integrating it to

the respective batch controller

6 Each

42 Supply of all the material for -Interfacing of signals

from TAS control room to pipeline control room

through serial comm. link and hardwiring

1 Lot

43 Supply of Master Station for controlling the

MOV's with RS485 (redundant) communication

link to plant PLC as per specification enclosed

including serial communication cable (daisy

chained) of required length to all the MOV's

1 Each

44 Integration of VFD into TAS including supply of

communication cables and Energy management

software

1 Lot

45 TFMS(1 no.), LRC Server(2 nos ) working on hot

redundant basis , Windows Gateway Servers (2

nos.), 7 nos Client Computers with OS and

application software as per specifications and

with 19" Monitors

1 Set

46 PRINTERS, 24 Pin 300 cps 136 Col Dot Matrix

/Laser Printer

2 Each

47 Local Area Networking with CAT 6 cabling inside

the building and FO cabling for networking outside

buildings

1 Each

48 Single computer console for mounting all the

computer monitors located in the control room. The

console shall have provision for drawers . The

console shall be fabricated with Steel sheet with

glass windows With necessary dummy corner

panels to achieve C profile.

1 No.

49 Training 1 Lot



Sl.

No.


Rs

Total

Rs






ERECTION, TESTING AND

COMMISSIONING OF FIELD

INSTRUMENTS (PART – B)


displacement type flowmeter with dual pulse

transmitter and set stop valve (All the field

instruments shall be of explosion proof type) for 3"

line

12 Set


displacement type flowmeter with pulse transmitter

(single pulse) and set stop valve and Non return

valve (All the field instruments shall be of

explosion proof type) for 1.5" ethanol line

4 Set



59 Earthing Relay (each with two units one for

earthing and other for bonding

12 Each

60 Tyre wheel mounted Proving tank (2 kl) for PD

meter calibration with W & M stamping

1 Each

61 Proving tanks of capacity 1000L two numbers,

500L one number for tank truck calibration with W

& M stamping

1 Set



64 Air eliminator of line size DN 300 mm for flow

rate 7200 LPM for HSD product

1 Each


rate 4800 LPM for MS product

1 Each


rate 2400 LPM for SKO product

1 Each

67 Tank Farm Management System: Explosion proof

Radar type Level transmitters RS 485

communication with all necessary communication


10 Each

68 Pressure transmitters for density measurement

including installation of Isolation valves

10 Each

69 Densitometer (Explosion proof) with 4 to 20 mA

O/P, instrument range 0.2510 to 2.5 gm/cc,

measurement range 0.6 to 1 gm/cc, accuracy +/-

0.0005 gm/cc over the measurement range for the

following line sizes and including Orifice plates,

valves & flanges and micro strainer for Density

meter installation & Pt-100 RTD for density

correction in TLF area if density meter does not

3 Each



Sl.

No.


Rs

Total

Rs

have in built Temperature with local and remote

display for both density and temperature. The

scope of work includes draining of oil, cutting and

welding of pipes



temp.

3 Each



temp.

3 Each

72 Single point RTD for temp compensation in U/G,

A/G horizontal tanks with local and remote display

6 Each

73 Float & Tape type Level transmitters for Water

tanks

2 Each

74 STATION CONTROL SUB SYSTEM consisting

of 32 bit PLC system in hot stand by mode with

licenced software

1 Set

75 UPS System : Suitably sized Parallel redundant

Uninterruptible power supply system (min 2 x 10

KVA) including sealed maintenance free batteries

(30 minutes back up time) and necessary cables of

required capacity (for all control room, TM's room,

S&D room equipment & field instrumentation

equipment of Schedule of quantity

1 Set

76 Pressure gauges, 6" dial size with pulsation

dampners

26 Set


78 Barrier gates with drive motor ( Squirrel cage

Induction motor ) & control panel (with start/ stop,

L/R switch, PBS etc) complete with cables and

other accessories

3 Set


80 Cables shall include complete cabling required for

automation of the terminal viz. Power cables,

control cables, signal cables, data communiction

cables and special cables, if any, including

installation of suitable size MCT at the entrance to

Control Room.

1 Lot

81 Cable trenches - shall be of 1 mt depth, 300/600

mm. Scope includes excavation, cable laying width

with sand, brick layer already supllied under item

32, backfilling etc. complete

1 Lot

82 GI Cable tray, Heavy Duty PVC conduits for

carrying armoured cables, Earth pits, GI Earthing

strips required for automation equipment and

Erection materials like O ring, Gasket, nut, bolt,

half coupling, impulse pipes etc.(Note: Hume pipes

for crossing of cables under roads laid by another

vendor)

1 Lot



Sl.

No.


Rs

Total

Rs


84 Fire water system- Manual Call Points 7 Each

85 Fire water system- Pressure Switch 3 Each

86 Fire water system- WP Junction boxes 1 Lot

87 Fire water system- Level switch for makeup water

system

4 Each

88 Fire water system- DPG across Strainer for pumps 10 Each

89 Wiring and termination at both ends and

connection to PLC of fire water diesel engine panel

for Local/ Remote operation of pumps and Auto

operation

3 Each

90 Additive injection skid( dual module) including all

instruments, complete ss piping between skid to

gantry,valves and accessories and integrating it to

the respective batch controller

6 Each

91 Interfacing of signals from TAS control room to

pipeline control room through serial comm. link

and hardwiring

1 Lot

92 Installation of Master Station for controlling the

MOV's with RS485 (redundant) communication

link to plant PLC as per specification enclosed

including serial communication cable (daisy

chained) of required length to all the MOV's

1 Each

93 Integration of VFD into TAS including supply and

laying of communication cables and Energy

management software

1 Lot

94 IT COMPONENTS -TFMS(1 no.), LRC Server(2

nos ) working on hot redundant basis , Windows

Gateway Servers (2 nos.), 7 nos Client Computers

with OS and application software as per

specifications and with 19" Monitors

1 Set

95 IT COMPONENTS- Single computer console for

mounting all the computer monitors located in the

control room. The console shall have provision for

drawers. The console shall be fabricated with Steel

sheet with glass windows With necessary dummy

corner panels to achieve C profile.

1 Each

GRAND TOTAL

Note: i) Bidder shall quote basic rates for AMC. Service Tax as applicable shall be

reimbursed at actuals.

ii) Bidders to note that items for which Erection, Testing & Commissioning

rates have not been taken, the same shall be included in the respective

supply items, if applicable.



PROPOSAL FORMS



PF - 1

COMMERCIAL QUESTIONNAIRE

The Bidders reply /confirmation as furnished in the commercial questionnaire shall

supercede the stipulations mentioned elsewhere in their bid.

SL.NO HPCL’S QUERY BIDDERS REPLY/

CONFIRMATION

1. Confirm that Bid Security/Earnest Money as per bid

stipulations have been furnished along with unpriced bid.

2. Confirm your compliance to critical stipulations of bid

document as mentioned at Sl. No. 11.2.1 of bid document.

3 . Confirm your compliance to scope of work as specified in

bid document.

4. Confirm that all materials shall be supplied as per standards

& specifications given in bid document.

5. Confirm that all materials except HPCL’s Scope of supply

shall be supplied by the contractor at their cost without any

liability on the part of HPCL.

6. Confirm that the quoted Price includes the cost for carrying

out complete work as per drawing/specific

requirement/schedule of price/scope of work, scope of

supply mentioned in the bid document whether expressly

mentioned in the item description of Schedule of Rates or

not.

7. Confirm that the quoted price includes all taxes (service

taxes etc.), duties and insurance cost as specified in Special

Conditions of contract.

8. Confirm that Prices have been filled as per “Schedule of

Prices” format included in the bid document & submitted

accordingly.

9. Confirm your compliance to HPCL payment terms in toto

as per Appendix –I of Special Conditions of contract.

10. Confirm that there are No counter terms and conditions in

the Price-Part and in case any terms and conditions are

mentioned, the same shall be treated as null & void.

11. Confirm that all the proposal forms are filled and submitted

along with Part-1 of offer strictly as per proforma given in

bid document.

12. Confirm that you have proposed adequate Project/Site

organization with supervisory personnel having good

experience and the chart is enclosed.

13. Confirm that the price shall be firm till completion of work

in all respects.

14. Confirm that the quoted Price is not subjected to any

escalation.


MDPL JAIPUR TERMINAL PROJECT


15. Confirm that you have submitted all Data sheets duly filled

in Unpriced Part.

16. The planning schedule, S-curves, manpower estimate,

construction equipment deployment schedule etc.,

submitted by the bidder with his Bid, is well considered and

adequate and shall not be basis for extra compensation in

case actual needs are higher.

• Detailed planning schedule developed by

Contractor after award may be subject to

fluctuations depending upon actual progress of the

project and available work front.

• CO-ORDINATION and making available

Contractor of all staff, manpower, construction

equipment, tools, cranes, etc. and materials as

required for a timely completion of all WORK as

per HPCL’s. Construction and priority schedule

and in accordance with the available work front are

included in the quoted rates.

• Bio data of key personnel; such as Project

Manager, Construction Manager; Lead Engineer

for all relevant categories has been submitted in

your Bid.

17 Please confirm that all the construction equipment, tools &

tackles as required shall be deployed at site. You shall also

deploy additional equipments if deemed necessary to

complete the works in Schedule Time.

18 Please confirm having quoted for the Comprehensive AMC

charges applicable after completion of the warranty period

of 24 months.

19 Please also confirm that the rates quoted now will be valid

till end of the five years starting from completion of 24

months warranty period when a separate PO/Contract will

be finalized for the AMC.



Format PF-2 LIST OF ENCLOSURES

Type of Enclosure Yes / No

PAN NUMBER WITH DOCUMENTRY PROOF

Power of attorney of the signatory of the tender.



Format PF-3 PROJECT AND SITE ORGANISATION DESCRIPTION

The bidder must attach a description of the Head office and site of the organization

proposed to be committed for execution of the work. Organization chart must

include Details of key personnel, categories and numbers of personnel reporting at

Head office and Site Office, separately.

The description shall show lines of authority/responsibility/communication

together with a written description of the overall working of the organization with

particular emphasis on the Head office/site interface and monitoring and control of

progress.

Bidder agrees to augment the above chart with additional number/ categories, if

required and as directed by Engineer in charge to complete the work within the

completion time schedule and quoted price.

This form shall be part of contract documents.



Format PF-3A SUMMARY OF KEY PERSONNEL

Name Educational

Qualifications

Present

Position

Relevant

Experience

Employment

History in

brief

Bidder to provide a resume for each key person (indicated in the organization

chart) to be assigned by the Contractor, containing at least the following

information on each person (Additional pages are to be attached and properly

designated, if necessary). Such key personnel shall cover contractor’s own as well

as sub-contractor’s employees.

Note : Resume is generally required for the Project Manager, Lead Site Engineers

and Lead Site Supervisors, all of whom would be assigned full time to the contract.



Format PF-4 EXCEPTION AND DEVIATIONS STATEMENT

S.NO. PAGE NO. OF

TENDER

DOCUMENT

CLAUSE

NO.

SUBJECT DEVIATIONS

Bidder shall list all the deviations in the following given format only. Bidder may stipulate

exceptions and deviations to Bidding Document, if considered unavoidable.

Any exceptions/deviations brought out elsewhere in the Bid shall not be construed as

valid.



Format PF-5 COMPLIANCE TO BID

REQUIREMENT

Yes / No

We confirm that our Bid complies with the

total Techno-Commercial requirements of

Bidding Document.



Format PF-6 DETAILS OF SIMILAR WORK DONE SR.

NO.

FULL

POSTAL

ADDRRESS

OF CLIENT &

NAME OF

OFFICER-IN-

CHARGE

DESCRIP

TION OF

THE

WORK

VALUE

OF

CONTRA

CT

DATE OF

COMMENC

EMENT OF

WORK

SCHEDULED

COPLETION

TIME(MONT

HS)

DATE OF

ACTUAL

COMPLETION

REASONS

FOR TIME

OVER-

RUN, IF

ANY



Format PF - 7 DETAILS OF PROPOSED EQUIPMENT, TOOLS & TACKLES

ITEM

TO BE

DEPLOY

ED

DESCRIPTION

MAKE, MODEL

AND CAPACITY

NUMBERS YEAR OF

MANUFACT

URE

CATEGORY

(A)OR (B) OR

(C) ABOVE

LOCATION REMARKS

The Bidder shall herein details of constructions equipment, tools, tackles proposed to be

deployed for this work and shall indicate in each case whether the same (A) already

owned by Bidder and available for use of this Contract. (B) Anticipated to be hired (C)

anticipated to be purchased. In case of (A) present location shall be stated. In case of (B)

and (C) name and location of lending agency or supplier shall be stated.

Bidder agrees to augment the above list with additional number/categories of equipment,

tools and tackles, if required and directed by the Engineer-in-Charge, to complete the

work within the completion time schedule and

quoted price.

HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION...

Documents

Transcript of HINDUSTAN PETROLEUM CORPORATION...